TOSHIBA Bar Code Printer
B-SX4T Series, B-SX5T Series
External Equipment Interface Specification
First Edition:
2nd Edition:
3rd Edition:
4th Edition:
5th Edition:
6th Edition:
7th Edition:
8th Edition:
9th Edition:
10th Edition:
11th Edition:
12th Edition:
13th Edition:
14th Edition:
15th Edition:
November 18, 2002
February 21, 2003
June 6, 2003
August 22, 2003
February 27, 2004
January 14, 2005
February 8, 2005
May 9, 2005
April 4, 2006
May 23, 2007
April 18, 2008
November 13, 2008
January 23, 2009
March 6, 2009
October 30, 2009
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page
6.3.21 2-BYTE WRITABLE CHARACTER CODE RANGE COMMAND .................................... 197
6.3.22 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND ([ESC] XD)......................................... 198
6.3.23 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND ([ESC] XA) ......................................... 199
6.3.24 GRAPHIC COMMAND..................................................................................................... 210
6.3.25 SAVE START COMMAND ([ESC] XO)............................................................................ 218
6.3.26 SAVE START COMMAND ([ESC] XV) ............................................................................ 219
6.3.27 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND...................................................................................... 220
6.3.28 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND ([ESC] XQ) ................................................................. 221
6.3.29 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND ([ESC] XT).................................................................. 222
6.3.30 HEAD BROKEN DOTS CHECK COMMAND .................................................................. 223
6.3.31 MESSAGE DISPLAY COMMAND ................................................................................... 224
6.3.32 RESET COMMAND.......................................................................................................... 226
6.3.33 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND..................................................................................... 227
6.3.34 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE REQUEST COMMAND............................................ 228
6.3.35 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND ......................................................... 229
6.3.36 ATA CARD INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND ....................................................... 230
6.3.37 ATA CARD WRITABLE CHARACTER INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND ............ 232
6.3.38 PRINTER OPTION STATUS ACQUIRE COMMAND...................................................... 233
6.3.39 IP ADDRESS SET COMMAND........................................................................................ 234
6.3.40 SOCKET COMMUNICATION PORT SET COMMAND ................................................... 235
6.3.41 DHCP FUNCTION SET COMMAND................................................................................ 236
6.3.42 PASS-THROUGH COMMAND ........................................................................................ 237
6.3.43 INTERNAL SERIAL INTERFACE PARAMETER SET COMMAND................................. 238
6.4 COMMANDS FOR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR.................................................................. 239
6.4.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND....................................................................................... 239
6.4.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT VALUE SET COMMAND............................................................... 243
6.4.3 RFID PARAMETER SET COMMAND.............................................................................. 245
6.4.4 BATCH RESET COMMAND ............................................................................................ 247
6.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO RFID ........................................................................................ 248
6.5.1 RFID TAG POSITION ADJUSTMENT COMMAND......................................................... 248
6.5.2 RFID TAG READ COMMAND.......................................................................................... 250
6.5.3 RFID VOID PATTERN PRINT COMMAND ..................................................................... 254
6.5.4 RFID DATA WRITE COMMAND...................................................................................... 255
7. CONTROL CODE SELECTION................................................................................................. 261
8. ERROR PROCESSING.............................................................................................................. 262
8.1 COMMUNICATION ERRORS............................................................................................... 262
8.2 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING ................................................................................... 262
8.3 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES.................... 265
8.4 SYSTEM ERRORS................................................................................................................ 265
8.5 RESET PROCESSING.......................................................................................................... 265
8.6 RFID ERROR ........................................................................................................................ 266
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page
9. STATUS RESPONSE ................................................................................................................ 267
9.1 FUNCTIONS.......................................................................................................................... 267
9.1.1 STATUS FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 268
9.1.2 DETAIL STATUS.............................................................................................................. 269
9.1.3 SUMMARY OF STATUS FORMAT.................................................................................. 271
9.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE SINGALS ...................................................................................... 272
9.2.1 COMPATIBILITY MODE .................................................................................................. 272
9.3 E-MAIL................................................................................................................................... 273
10. LCD MESSAGES AND LED INDICATIONS ............................................................................. 274
11. LCD MESSAGES IN DIFFERENT LANGUAGES (UPPER LINE OF LCD) ............................. 278
12. CHARACTER CODE TABLE .................................................................................................... 281
12.1 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER,
GOTHIC725 BLACK....... 281
12.2 PRESENTATION................................................................................................................... 288
12.3 OCR-A ................................................................................................................................... 292
12.4 OCR-B ................................................................................................................................... 299
12.5 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1......................................................................................................... 305
12.6 PRICE FONT 1, 2, 3.............................................................................................................. 312
12.7 TEC OUTLINE FONT 2, 3, GOTHIC725 BLACK.................................................................. 313
12.8 GB2312-80 (CHINESE KANJI) (16×16, 24×24, 32×32, 48×48) ........................................... 320
12.9 TrueType FONT..................................................................................................................... 325
12.10 GB18030 (2-BYTE CODE).................................................................................................... 332
12.11 GB18030 (4-BYTE CODE).................................................................................................... 348
13. BAR CODE TABLE.................................................................................................................... 356
14. DRAWING OF BAR CODE DATA............................................................................................. 372
15. AUTOMATIC ADDING OF START/STOP CODES................................................................... 393
Copyright © 2002-2009
by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION
All Rights Reserved
570 Ohito,Izunokuni-shi,Shizuoka-ken,JAPAN
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. SCOPE
This specification applies to the external equipment interface for use with the B-SX4T-GS10/20-
QQ/QP/CN/QQ-US and B-SX4T-GS10-QQ-CCS (hereinafter referred to as “B-SX4T”) and B-SX5T-
TS12/22-QQ/QP/CN/QQ-US (hereinafter referred to as “B-SX5T”) industrial high-performance class
general-purpose bar code printers.
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The external equipment interface connects a printer to the host computer through a serial interface (RS-
232C/USB), parallel interface (Centronics), or a network for making various settings and printing labels.
This specification describes how to use the external equipment interface for the TPCL (TEC Printer
Command Language).
- 1 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following table shows the combination of the main program and the boot program. As shown
below, some combinations disable the proper printer operation.
Boot program
Main program
V1.0
V1.0
V1.1
V1.1A
V2.0
V2.0A
V2.0B
V2.0E
V3.0
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
{
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
V1.0A
V1.0B
V1.0C
V1.0D
V1.1
V1.1A
V1.1B
V1.2
V1.2A
V1.2B
V2.0
V2.0A
V2.0B
V2.1
V3.0
V3.1
V3.2
V3.3
V3.3A
V4.1
V4.2
V4.2A
V4.4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
X
(Note2)
(Note2)
{
{
V4.4A
V4.4C
X4.4C
C4.4C
V4.5
X4.5
C4.5
V4.6
X4.6
{
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
{
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C4.6
V4.6A
X4.6A
C4.6A
V4.7
X4.7
C4.7
V4.7B
V4.7C
V5.0
X5.0
C5.0
X
(Note3)
{
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
C5.3
C5.4
C5.5
V5.1
X5.1
- 2 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Boot program
Main program
V1.0
V1.1
V1.1A
V2.0
V2.0A
V2.0B
V2.0E
V3.0
V5.4
X5.4
V5.5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
{
{
{
{: This combination enables the proper printer operation.
X: This combination disables the proper printer operation.
NOTES: 1. Some program versions are not released actually.
2. Boot programs V1.1A and V2.0A do not support the SNMP function as they are not able to
download this function. Any other functions than the SNMP function are supported.
3. As the SNMP function has been included in the main program V5.0, it is not necessary to
download the SNMP program. Even if it is downloaded by mistake or the printer is used
with the SNMP program installed, there is no impact on the printer operation.
4. Firmware V5.0 or greater will not work with the MAIN3-R or earlier PC board. The
MAIN4-R or greater is required. Be careful of the combination.
Main PC board
MAIN4-R or greater
Downloaded normally.
MAIN3-R or earlier
Firmware Boot
program
When the boot program is sent to the
printer by the downloader, the printer
shows “MODEL TYPE ERROR” on the
LCD and results in an error.
V3.0 or
greater
When the COM is used as the
interface, the downloader shows
“Check Sum Error”. (Then, the printer
is forcibly shut down.)
After the printer is restarted, it starts
up in the previous status.
Main
Downloaded normally.
When the main program is sent to the
printer by the downloader, the printer
erases the Flash ROM and shows
“FORMAT ERROR” on the LCD.
When the COM or LPT1 is used as the
interface, the downloader shows
“Erase Error”. Then, the printer is
forcibly shut down.
program
V5.0 or
greater
After the printer restarted, it starts up
in the DOWNLOAD MODE.
Downloading the main program earlier
than V5.0 enables a recovery from the
erroneous state.
- 3 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main PC board
MAIN4-R or greater
MAIN3-R or earlier
Boot
When the boot program is sent to Downloaded normally.
the printer by the downloader, the
program
earlier than printer shows “MODEL TYPE
V3.0
ERROR” on the LCD and results in
an error.
When the COM is used as the
interface, the downloader shows
“Check Sum Error”. (Then, the
printer is forcibly shut down.)
After the printer is restarted, it starts
up in the previous status
Main
When the main program is sent to
the printer by the downloader, the
Downloaded normally.
program
earlier than printer writes the program, shows
V5.0
“FIRM VER. INVALID” on the LCD,
and results in an error.
When the COM is used as the
interface, the downloader shows
“Erase Error”. (Then, the printer is
forcibly shut down.)
After the printer restarted, it starts up
in
the
DOWNLOAD
MODE.
Downloading the main program V5.0
or greater enables a recovery from
the erroneous state
- 4 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The model configuration and the differences between the models of the B-SX series are described
below.
Model
B-SX4T-GS10/20-
QQ/QQ-US, B-SX4T- B-SX4T-GS10/20-QP B-SX4T-GS10/20-CN
GS10-QQ-CCS
Flash ROM
Whole
4 MB × 1 = 4 MB
8 MB × 1 = 8 MB
Memory
SDRAM Image buffer of
whole SDRAM
1.2 MB (Label length: 1500 mm)
When the SNMP function is enabled: 0.6 MB
(Label length: 750 mm)
Chinese ROM
None
Future specification
RS-232C
Centronics
USB board
Standard
Standard
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
None
100BASE LAN board
Ribbon save module
Swing cutter module
Rotary cutter module
Strip module
PCMCIA board
Expansion I/O board
RFID module (UHF band for US)
RFID module (UHF band for EU)
RFID module (UHF band for CN)
RFID module (UHF band for AU)
RFID module (HF band for QM)
Option
None
None
Option
None
None
None
Option
None
None
Option
None
None
Option
Model
B-SX4T-GS20-QM-R
B-SX4T-GS20-CN-R
Firmware version
Flash ROM
Whole
SDRAM Image buffer of
whole SDRAM
V5.0 or greater
8 MB × 1 = 8 MB
16 MB × 1 = 16 MB
Memory
1.2 MB (Label length: 1500 mm)
Bitmap Kanji ROM (Mincho)
Bitmap Kanji ROM (Gothic)
Chinese ROM
None
None
None
Standard from V5.1
Standard from V5.1
RS-232C
Centronics
USB board
Standard
Standard
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
100BASE LAN board
Ribbon save module
Swing cutter module
Rotary cutter module
Strip module
PCMCIA board
Expansion I/O board
RFID module (UHF band for US)
RFID module (UHF band for EU)
RFID module (UHF band for CN)
RFID module (UHF band for AU)
RFID module (HF band for QM)
Option
Option
None
Option
Option
None
None
Option
None
None
- 5 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model
Flash ROM
Whole
B-SX5T-TS12/22-QQ B-SX5T-TS12/22-QP B-SX5T-TS12/22-CN
4 MB × 1 = 4 MB
Memory
16 MB × 1 = 16 MB
3.3 MB (Label length: 1500 mm)
When the SNMP function is enabled: 1.65 MB
(Label length: 750 mm)
Image buffer of
whole SDRAM
SDRAM
Chinese ROM
None
Standard
RS-232C
Centronics
USB board
Standard
Standard
Option
Option
Standard
Option
Option
Standard
Option
Standard
None
100BASE LAN board
Ribbon save module
Swing cutter module
Rotary cutter module
Strip module
PCMCIA board
Expansion I/O board
RFID module (UHF band for US)
RFID module (UHF band for EU)
RFID module (UHF band for CN)
RFID module (UHF band for AU)
RFID module (HF band for QM)
Option
None
None
Option
None
None
None
Option
None
None
Option
None
None
Option
Model
B-SX5T-TS22-QM-R
B-SX5T-TS22-CN-R
Firmware version
Flash ROM
V5.0 or greater
8 MB × 1 = 8 MB
Memory
Whole
32 MB × 1 = 32 MB
3.3 MB (Label length: 1500 mm)
Image buffer of
whole SDRAM
SDRAM
Bitmap Kanji ROM (Mincho)
Bitmap Kanji ROM (Gothic)
Chinese ROM
None
None
Standard from V5.1
Standard
None
RS-232C
Centronics
Standard
Standard
Option
USB board
100BASE LAN board
Ribbon save module
Swing cutter module
Rotary cutter module
Strip module
Option
Standard
Option
Option
Standard
Option
PCMCIA board
Expansion I/O board
RFID module (UHF band for US)
RFID module (UHF band for EU)
RFID module (UHF band for CN)
RFID module (UHF band for AU)
RFID module (HF band for QM)
Standard
Option
Option
None
None
None
Option
None
None
Option
Option
- 6 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available PCMCIA cards
• LAN card
SCCE589ET series only, manufactured by 3COM
• ATA card
ATA flash card using flash memory manufactured by SanDisk or HITACHI.
• Flash memory card
Device
Code
Manufacturer’s
Code
Capacity
1 MB
Manufacturer
Item Code
Operation
Read only
Maxell
EF-1M-TB AA
D0H
1CH
Mitsubishi
MF81M1-GBDAT01
EF-4M-TB CC
4 MB
Maxell
88H
B0H
04H
01H
Read/Write
Maxell
EF-4M-TB DC
ADH
Centennial
FL04M-15-11119-03
Technologies INC.
INTEL
IMC004FLSA
A2H
89H
Read only
Simple TECNOLOGY
Mitsubishi
STI-FL/4A
MF84M1-G7DAT01
FJN-004M6C
PC Card KING MAX
Centennial
FL04M-20-11138-67
Technologies INC.
PC Card
FJP-004M6R
A0H
AAH
Mitsubishi
MF84M1-GMCAV01
- 7 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. INTERFACE
3.1 SERIAL INTERFACE
(1) Type:
Conforming to RS-232C
(2) Mode of Communication: Full duplex
(3) Transmission Speed:
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
38400 bps
115200 bps
(4) Synchronization Method: Start-stop synchronization
(5) Start Bit:
(6) Stop Bit:
1 bit
1 bit
2 bits
(7) Data Length:
(8) Parity:
7 bits
8 bits
None
Even
Odd
(9) Error Detection:
Parity error
Vertical parity error check
Framing error
This error occurs if no stop bit is found in the frame
specified starting with the start bit.
(10) Protocol:
No-procedure method
(11) Data Input Code:
ASCII code
European character set 8 bit code
Graphics 8 bit code
(12) Receive Buffer:
For B-SX4T: 1 MB
For B-SX5T: 6 MB
* The use of the receive buffer is shared between interfaces.
- 8 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(13) Transmission Control:
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol
READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
READY/BUSY (RTS) Protocol
c XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol
z When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer becomes ready to receive data
and sends an XON code (11H). (Transmission or non-transmission of the XON code is
selectable by means of the parameter setting.)
z The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the blank positions in the receive buffer
become 10 Kbytes or less.
z The printer sends an XON code (11H) when the blank positions in the receive buffer
become 512 Kbytes or more.
z When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
XOFF code, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer
becomes full.)
z The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the power is off. (Transmission or non-
transmission of the XOFF code is selectable by means of the parameter setting.)
z The DTR signal is always “High” (READY).
z The RTS signal is always “High”.
d READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
z When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer becomes ready to receive data
and turns the DTR signal to “High” level (READY).
z The printer turns the DTR signal to “Low” level (BUSY) when the blank positions in the
receive buffer become 10 Kbytes or less.
z The printer turns the DTR signal to “High” level (READY) when the blank positions in the
receive buffer become 512 Kbytes or more.
z When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer
becomes full.)
z The RTS signal is always “High”.
- 9 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
z When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer becomes ready to receive data
and turns the DTR signal to “High” level (READY). The printer also sends an XON code
(11H).
z When the blank positions in the receive buffer become 10 Kbytes or less, the printer turns
the DTR signal to “Low” level (BUSY) and sends an XOFF code (13H).
z When the blank positions in the receive buffer become 512 Kbytes or more, the printer
turns the DTR signal to “High” level (READY) and sends an XON code (11H).
z When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
XOFF code or BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer
receive buffer becomes full.)
z The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the power is off.
z The RTS signal is always “High”.
f READY/BUSY (RTS) Protocol
z When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer turns the RTS signal to “High”
(READY).
z The printer turns the RTS signal to “Low” (BUSY) when the blank positions in the receive
buffer become 10 Kbytes or less.
z The printer turns the RTS signal to “High” (READY) when the blank positions in the receive
buffer become 512 Kbytes or more.
z When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer
becomes full.)
z The DTR signal is always “High” (READY).
z The DSR signal from the host must always be “High”.
* When the flow control is performed with a Windows PC, “READY/BUSY (RTS) protocol”
should be selected, and “Hardware” should be selected for the flow control in the Windows
communication port setting.
NOTE: For “READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol”, data should be sent after 200 ms from when the
DTR signal is turned to “High” (READY). For “READY/BUSY (RTS) protocol”, data
should be sent after 200 ms from when the RTS signal is turned to “High” (READY).
- 10 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(14) Input/Output Signals
FG
TD
RD
RTS
CTS
DSR
SG
Printer
Host
DTR
(15) Connector Pin Assignment and Signal Description
Signal
Pin No.
Function
Signal Direction
Name
FG
1
2
z Ground line for circuit protection
RD z Line for data which the printer receives from the host.
z Logic 1 is a Low level, while logic 0 is a High level.
z It is in the Low (Mark) state when no transmission is in
progress.
← Host
3
TD
z Line for data which the printer sends to the host.
z Logic 1 is a Low level, while logic 0 is a High level.
z It is in the Low (Mark) state when no transmission is in
progress.
Printer →
4
5
CTS z It is an input signal indicating whether or not the data
transmission to the host is possible. However, this
printer does not detect this signal.
← Host
RTS z Output signal to the host.
Printer →
For the READY/BUSY (RTS) protocol:
z It indicates the ready state for the received data.
z It is at “Low” when the receive buffer is nearly full, and at
“High” when nearly empty.
For protocol other than the READY/BUSY (RTS) protocol:
z After the power is turned on, it is always at “High” level.
DTR z Output signal to the host.
6
Printer →
For the READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol or XON/XOFF
(DC1/DC3) protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol:
z It indicates the ready state for the received data.
z It is at “Low” level when the receive buffer is near full, and
at “High” level when near empty.
For the XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) protocol or READY/BUSY
(RTS) protocol:
z After the power is turned on, it is always at “High”.
SG z Ground line for all data and control signals.
DSR z Input signal from the host.
7
20
← Host
z For the printer to receive data, it must be at “High” level.
- 11 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(16) Interface Circuit
z Input Circuit
SN75189 or equivalent
RD
CTS
DSR
z Output Circuit
SN75188 or equivalent
TD
RTS
DTR
z Signal Levels
Input Voltage
H ......+3 ~ +15 V
L.......-3 ~ -15 V
Output Voltage H ......+6 ~ +13 V
L.......-6 ~ -13 V
- 12 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE
(1) Type:
(2) Mode:
Centronics
Conforms to IEEE1284 Compatibility mode, Nibble mode, and ECP mode
(3) Data Input Method: Parallel 8 bits (DATA1 ~ 8)
(4) Control Signals:
Compatibility mode
nStrobe
nAck
Nibble mode
HostClk
ECP mode
HostClk
PrtClk
PeriphClk
Busy
PtrBusy
PeriphAck
PError
AckDataReq
Xflag
nAckReverse
XFlag
Select
nAutoFd
nInit
HostBusy
nInit
HostAck
nReverseRequest
nPeriphRequest
IEEE1284Active
nFault
nDataAvail
IEEE1284Active
nSelectIn
(5) Data Input Code: ASCII code
European character set 8 bit code
Graphics 8 bit code
(6) Receive Buffer:
For B-SX4T: 1 MB
For B-SX5T: 6 MB
* The use of the receive buffer is shared between interfaces.
- 13 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) Input/Output Circuit Configuration and Input/Output Conditions:
Signal
Configuration
+5V
1K
SN74LS245 or equivalent
DATA1 ~ 8
Logic level
(Input)
Input
+5V
1K
“1” = 2 ~ 5 V
“0” = 0 ~ 0.4 V
nStrobe/HostClk/HostClk
nInit/nInit/
SN74LS14 or equivalent
nReverseRequest
nAutoFd/HostBusy/
HostAck
100P
nSelectIn/IEEE1284Active/
IEEE1284Active
+5V
Busy/PtrBusy/PeriphAck
nFault/nDataAvail/
nPeriphRequest
SN7406 or equivalent
1K
Outpu
t
nAck/PtrClk/PeriphClk
Select/Xflag/XFlag
PError/AckDataReq/
nAckReverse
Logic level
(Input)
100P
“1” = 2.4 ~ 5 V
“0” = 0 ~ 0.4 V
(8) Connector:
Printer
Amp. Japan
552742-1 or equivalent
DDK
57RE-40360-73B or equivalent
Cable
Amp. Japan
DDK
552470-1 or equivalent
57E-30360 or equivalent
- 14 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) Connector Pin Diagram (IEEE1284-B Connector):
Pin
No.
1
Signal Name
Nibble mode
Compatibility Mode
ECP mode
nStrobe
HostClk
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Data 8
PtrClk
HostClk
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Data 8
PeriphClk
2
Data 1
3
Data 2
4
Data 3
5
Data 4
6
Data 5
7
Data 6
8
Data 7
9
Data 8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
nAck
Busy
PtrBusy
PeriphAck
PError
AckDataReq
nAckReverse
Select
Xflag
XFlag
nAutoFd
HostBusy
HostAck
NC
NC
NC
0V
0V
0V
CHASSIS GND
CHASSIS GND
CHASSIS GND
+5V (for detection)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN1)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN2)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN3)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN4)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN5)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN6)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN7)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN8)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN9)
+5V (for detection)
+5V (for detection)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN1)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN2)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN3)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN4)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN5)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN6)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN7)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN8)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN9)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN1)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN2)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN3)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN4)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN5)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN6)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN7)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN8)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN9)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN10) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN10) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN10)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN11) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN11) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN11)
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN31) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN31) TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN31)
nInit
nInit
nReverseRequest
nFault
0V
nDataAvail
nPeriphRequest
0V
0V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
nSelectIn
IEEE1284Active
IEEE1284Active
19
1
36
18
NOTE: The signal name starting with a lower case “n” indicates that it is a low active signal.
- 15 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(10) Input/Output Signals :
Compatibility mode
c Data 1 ~ 8 (Printer ← Host)
z Input data signals for the 1st to 8th bits.
z Logic 1 is “High” level.
z Min. data pulse width of 2.5 µsec.
d nStrobe (Printer ← Host)
z Synchronizing signal for reading the above data.
z Normally at “High” level. The data is read at the rise of the Low level pulse.
z Minimum data pulse width of 0.5 µsec.
e Busy (Printer → Host)
z This signal indicates that the printer is in a Busy state.
z When initialized after the power is turned on, the printer becomes ready to receive data
and turns the signal to “Low” level.
z The signal turns to “High” level (in a Busy state) when data is set from the host (at the fall
of the nStrobe signal).
z The signal turns to “Low” level when the printer reads the data.
z When the blank positions in the receive buffer become 512 bytes or less, the printer keeps
the signal at “High” level (in a Busy state) for 10 seconds when data is set from the host, to
extend the data read interval.
z When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer stops reading data.
Then, it keeps the signal at “High” level (in a Busy state) until there are blank positions in
the receive buffer when data is set from the host.
z The signal is kept at “High” level (in a Busy state) until the current state (one of the
following states) is reset.
• PAUSE state caused by the [PAUSE] key
• Paper end state
• Ribbon end state
• Head open state
• Printer error state
• Initialization in progress upon receipt of the nInit signal
f nAck (Printer → Host)
z This signal indicates that the printer has read the data set by the host and is ready to
receive the next data.
z The signal is normally at “High”. It is at “Low” for about 5 µsec. after the fall of the BUSY
signal. The host should usually set data after the ACK signal is turned from “Low” to
“High”.
z If the nAck signal is ignored and the next data is set while the nAck signal is Low, the
“LOW” level continues about further 5 µsec at the fall of the BUSY signal. However, the
data can be received properly.
- 16 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g nInit (Printer ← Host)
z Reset request signal from the host.
z Normally at “High” level. A low on this input causes the printer to be initialized in the
same manner as when the power is turned on.
* When “Reset process when the nInit signal is ON” is set to “OFF” in the parameter setting
in the system mode, the printer is not initialized even if it receives a low signal.
z When the nInit signal is input during printing, the printer completes printing one tag/label
which is being printed, cancels the next processing, then is initialized in the same manner
as when the power is turned on.
* When “Reset process when the nInit signal is ON” is set to “OFF” in the parameter setting
in the system mode, the next process proceeds without being canceled.
z Minimum pulse width of 0.5 µsec.
h Select (Printer → Host)
z This is an output signal which indicates whether the printer is in Pause state or placed
online. The printer can receive data while placed online.
z The signal is at “Low” level while the printer is in a Pause state.
z The signal is kept at “Low” level (in a Pause state) until the current state (one of the
following states) is reset.
• Pause state caused by the [PAUSE] key
• Paper end state
• Ribbon end state
• Head open state
• Printer error state
• Initialization in progress upon power on or receipt of the nInit signal
i nFault (Printer → Host)
z Output signal indicating that the printer is in a Fault state.
z At “Low” level while the printer is in a Fault state.
z The signal is kept at “Low” level (in a Fault state) until the current state (one of the
following states) is reset.
• Pause state caused by the [PAUSE] key
• Paper end state
• Ribbon end state
• Head open state
• Printer error state
• Initialization in progress upon power on or receipt of the nInit signal
j PError (Printer → Host)
z Output signal indicating a label end or ribbon end state.
z At “High” level when the printer is in a label end or ribbon end state.
z Turns to “Low” level when the label end or ribbon end state is reset.
k +5 V
z This is not a signal but a +5 V power supply voltage.
z The maximum current of 500 mA can be taken out.
l nSelectIn (Printer ← Host)
z Not used
11
nAutoFd (Printer ← Host)
z Not used
- 17 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nibble mode
c PtrClk (Printer → Host)
z Reverse data transfer phase: It is used for evaluating data sent to the host.
z Reverse idle phase:
When the printer changes the signal from Low to High, an
interrupt informing the host that the data is available, occurs
d PtrBusy (Printer → Host)
z Reverse data transfer phase: Data bit 3 is used for the first transfer. Data bit 7 is used for
the second transfer. Indicates the forward channel is in a
Busy state.
e AckDataReq (Printer → Host)
z Reverse data transfer phase: Data bit 2 is used for the first transfer. Data bit 6 is used for
the second transfer.
z Reverse idle phase:
This signal is set to high until the data transfer is requested
by the host. Then, the process is performed according to
the nDataAvail signal.
f Xflag (Printer → Host)
z Reverse data transfer phase: Data bit 1 is used for the first transfer. Data bit 5 is used for
the second transfer.
g HostBusy (Printer ← Host)
z Reverse data transfer phase: It indicates that the host can receive data from the printer by
setting the signal to low. Then, the host sets the signal to
high, and sends the Ack indicating that the nibble data is
received. When the signal is set to low after the reverse
channel data transfer is performed, the interface phase
changes to the idle phase. At that time, there is no
available data on the printer.
z Reverse idle phase:
When this signal is set to high according to the low pulse of
the PtrClk signal, the host enters the reverse data transfer
phase again. If this signal is set to high when the
IEEE1284 Active signal is low, the IEEE1284 idle phase
stops, and the interface enters the Compatibility mode.
h nDataAvail (Printer → Host)
z Reverse data transfer phase: When the signal is low, it indicates the printer has data to be
sent to the host. And it is used for sending data bits 0 and
4.
z Reverse idle phase:
It is used for indicating that the data is available.
- 18 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ECP mode
c Data 1 ~ 8 (Printer ← → Host)
z Input/output data signals for the 1st to 8th bits.
z Logic 1 is “High” level.
d HostClk (Printer ← Host)
z This signal is used with the PeriphAck signal for transferring data information or address
information from the host to peripheral equipment when a closed loop and handshake are
executed.
e PeriphAck (Printer → Host)
z Peripheral equipment controls the forward data transfer using this signal. This signal also
provides the 9th data bit which is used for determining whether or not command
information or data information is included in the reverse data signal.
f PeriphClk (Printer → Host)
z This signal is used with the HostAck signal for transferring data information or address
information from peripheral equipment to the host when a closed loop and handshake are
executed.
g nReverseRequest (Printer ← Host)
z The host makes this signal LOW to change channels to the reverse direction.
z In the ECP mode, only when this signal is LOW and the IEEE1284Active is HIGH,
peripheral equipment can activate the bidirectional data signal.
h XFlag (Printer → Host)
z
i nPeriphRequest (Printer → Host)
z In the ECP mode, peripheral equipment can make this signal LOW for requesting
communications with the host. The request is just only a “Hint” for the host. The host
ultimately controls the transfer direction.
This signal provides the peer-to-peer
communication mechanism. This signal is usually used for generating an interrupt to the
host. This signal takes effect in both directions forward and reverse.
j nAckReverse (Printer → Host)
z Peripheral equipment makes this signal LOW, and returns an ACK to the
nReverseRequest signal. The host is dependent on the nAckReverse signal to determine
the timing when the host is allowed to activate the data signal.
k +5 V
z This is not a signal but a +5 V power supply voltage.
z The maximum current of 500 mA can be taken out.
l IEEE1284Active (Printer ← Host)
z
11
HostAck (Printer ← Host)
z The host activates this signal to control the reverse data transfer. This signal is used with
the PeriphClk signal, when an interlocked handshake is performed. This signal also
provides the 9th data bit which is used for determining whether or not command
information or data information is included in the forward data signal.
- 19 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(11) Timing Chart
c When receiving normal data:
For the Compatibility mode, one of two types of timing for BUSY-ACK can be selected.
a) Timing 1 (Default)
zThe USB board has not been installed.
Data 1 ~ 8
Min. 1 µsec
(Host → Printer)
Min. 1 µsec
nStrobe
Min. 0.5 µsec
(Host → Printer)
Busy
(Host ← Printer)
nAck
(Host ← Printer)
Approx. 1 µsec
zThe USB board has been installed.
Data 1 ~ 8
Min. 1 µsec
(Host → Printer)
Min. 1 µsec
nStrobe
Min. 0.5 µsec
(Host → Printer)
Busy
(Host ← Printer)
nAck
(Host ← Printer)
Approx. 10 µsec
b) Timing 2
Data 1 ~ 8
Min. 1 µsec
(Host → Printer)
Min. 1 µsec
nStrobe
Min. 0.5 µsec
(Host → Printer)
Busy
(Host ← Printer)
nAck
(Host ← Printer)
Approx. 5 µsec
- 20 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d Receiving data in the Compatibility mode when the blank positions in the receive buffer are
512 bytes or less:
z When the blank positions in the receive buffer become 512 bytes or less, the printer stores
all of the already received data in the receive buffer, continues to be in a Busy state (Busy
signal at “High” level) for 10 seconds to extend the data read interval when data is set from
the host, then reads the data 10 seconds later.
z If the blank positions becomes 513 bytes or more while waiting for reading data, the printer
will receive the data with the normal data receive timing.
z When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer stops reading data.
Then, it continues to be in a Busy state (Busy signal at “High” level) until there are blank
positions in the receive buffer when data is set from the host.
Data 1 ~ 8
(Host → Printer)
nStrobe
(Host → Printer)
Busy
10 sec
10 sec
(Host ← Printer)
nAck
(Host ← Printer)
511 blank
0 blank byte
1 blank byte
512 blank bytes
1 blank byte
(12) Relationship between Printer Setting and PC Setting and Their Operation Modes
Windows95/98/Me WindowsNT4.0 Windows2000/XP
Host setting
ECP
SPP
ECP
ECP
SPP
SPP
ECP
SPP
SPP
Printer setting
Compatibility
SPP
Compatibility
SPP
Compatibility
SPP
Compatibility mode (SPP)
ECP mode (ECP)
SPP
SPP
SPP
* When the Compatibility mode is selected for the printer setting, the printer does not respond to
the ECP negotiation from the host.
* When the ECP mode is selected for the printer setting, the Busy signal does not become HIGH
even if an error occurs.
* SPP mode operations include support for the Nibble mode.
* When SPP mode is selected for the printer setting, the printer returns 13 bytes of status
(described at the top of the next page) to the Nibble mode negotiation immediately after [ESC]
WS [LF] [NUL] is received. The printer returns 23 bytes of status with the receive buffer free
space information (described in (13) on the next page) to the Nibble mode negotiation
immediately after [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] is received,
* When ECP mode is selected for the printer setting, the printer returns 13 bytes of status,
(described at the top of the next page) to the Nibble mode negotiation or the ECP mode reverse
request immediately after [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL] is received. The printer returns 23 bytes of
status with the receive buffer free space information (described in (13) on the next page) to the
Nibble mode negotiation or the ECP mode reverse request immediately after [ESC] WB [LF]
[NUL] is received.
- 21 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status to be returned immediately after [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL] is received (13 bytes):
SOX STX Status Remaining count ETX EOT CR
LF
01H 02H 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
(13) Status with the receive buffer free space information
The printer should return a status with the receive buffer free space information to the Nibble
mode negotiation or the ECP reverse request immediately after [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] is
received, as described blow.
Status to be returned immediately after [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] is sent (23 bytes):
SOH
STX
01H Indicates the top of the status block
02H
Status
3XH Printer status
3XH
* For details, see section 9.1.1 “STATUS FORMAT”.
Status type
33H Indicates that the status includes the receive buffer free space
information.
Remaining
count
3XH Remaining issue count
3XH
3XH
3XH
* For details, see section 9.1.1 “STATUS FORMAT”.
Length
3XH Total number of bytes of this status block.
3XH
Free space
3XH Free space of the receive buffer
of receive buffer
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
“00000” (0 Kbyte) to “99999” (99999 Kbytes)
However, the maximum value should be the receive buffer
capacity.
Receive buffer
capacity
3XH Receive buffer capacity
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
“00000” (0 Kbyte) to “99999” (99999 Kbytes)
However, the maximum value differs depending on the models.
CR
LF
0DH Indicates the end of the status block.
0AH
- 22 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 USB INTERFACE
(1) Standard:
Conforming to USB Standard Rev. 1.1
Control transfer, Bulk transfer
(2) Data Transfer Type:
(3) Transfer Rate:
Full speed (12 Mbps)
(4) Transfer Control Method: Same as the transfer control method described in “(13) Data transfer
in ECP mode” of section 3.2 “PARALLEL INTERFACE”
3.4 NETWORK INTERFACE
(1) Configuration
c PCMCIA board + LAN card
d 100BASE LAN board
e PCMCIA board + Wireless LAN card
(2) Protocol: TCP/IP
(3) Network Specifications
c LPR server function
d WEB printer function
e Socket communication function
f FTP server function
g Mail transmission/reception function
* For more details on the network, refer to the Network Specification (TAA-1401).
- 23 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. KEY OPERATION FUNCTIONS
4.1 SYSTEM MODE FUNCTIONS
The system mode has the following functions for the printer self-test and setting various parameters.
For details, refer to Key Operation Specification (TAA-1379).
(1) Self-test
• Maintenance counter/various parameters printouts
• Automatic self-test
• Head broken dots check
(2) Various parameters settings
• Character code selection
• Selection of font 0
• RS-232C communication speed
• RS-232C data length
• RS-232C stop bit length
• RS-232C parity
• RS-232C transmission control
• Language for LCD messages
• Forward feed standby
• Forward feed standby action
• Head-up operation in cut issue mode or the use of the rewinder in batch issue mode
• Installed solenoid type setting
• Use of ribbon saving system
• Control code
• Peel-off wait status selection
• [FEED] key function
• Kanji code selection
• Euro code setting
• Automatic head broken dots check
• Centronics ACK/BUSY timing setting
• Web printer function setting
• Reset process when the nInit signal is ON
• Ribbon near end detection setting
• Expansion I/O operation mode
• Centronics operation mode
• Plug-and-play operation mode
• Label end/ribbon end process setting
• Pre-peel-off process setting
• Back feed speed setting
• MaxiCode specification setting
• Print head type setting
• System mode password operation setting
• XML specification setting (supported by V4.4A and Xx.x only)
- 24 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Various parameters settings
• Feed fine adjustment
• Cut (strip) position fine adjustment
• Back feed fine adjustment
• X-coordinate fine adjustment
• Print density fine adjustment (Thermal transfer print mode)
• Print density fine adjustment (Direct thermal print mode)
• Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment (Rewind)
• Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment (Back tension)
• Reflective sensor manual threshold fine adjustment
• Transmissive sensor manual threshold fine adjustment
(4) Test print
• Operation conditions setting
• 1-dot slant line printout
• 3-dot slant line printout
• Character printout
• Bar code printout
• Non-printing
• Line printout for the assembly process
• Automatic printout for the assembly process (Transmissive sensor)
• Automatic printout for the assembly process (Reflective sensor)
(5) Sensor display/adjustment
• Thermal head temperature sensor display
• Open-air temperature sensor display
• Heat sink sensor display
• Reflective sensor display/adjustment
• Transmissive sensor display/adjustment
• Reflective sensor adjustment value setting (without paper)
• Transmissive sensor adjustment value setting (without paper)
• Ribbon end sensor display/adjustment
(6) RAM clear
• Maintenance counter clear
• Parameter clear
(7) IP address setting
• Printer IP address
• Gateway IP address
• Subnet mask
• Socket communication port
• DHCP setting
• DHCP client ID setting
(8) BASIC setting
• BASIC setting
• BASIC file browser
• BASIC trace setting
- 25 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) RFID setting
• RFID module type selection
RFID module’s destination code setting
• RFID tag type selection
• RFID error tag detection
Password to protect error tag detection
Access password setting
• Max. number of RFID issue retries
• Max. number of RFID read retries
• RFID read retry timeout
Automatic unlock function setting
• Max. number of RFID write retries
• RFID write retry timeout
• RFID adjustment for retry
• RFID radio output power level setting
• RFID AGC threshold setting
• RFID channel setting
• Q value setting
• AGC threshold for data write
• AGC threshold lower limit for retry
(10) Initial values after RAM clear
•
Initial values after maintenance counter clear
Parameter
Label distance covered
Initial Value
0 km
Printed distance
0 km
Cut count
0
Head up/down count
0
Ribbon motor drive time
Head-up solenoid drive time
RS-232C hardware error count
System error count
0 hour
0 hour
0
0
0
Momentary power interruption count
•
Initial values after parameter clear
Parameter
Initial Value
Feed fine adjustment (PC)
Cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment
(PC)
0 mm
0 mm
Back feed fine adjustment (PC)
Print density fine adjustment
(Thermal transfer print mode) (PC)
Print density fine adjustment
(Direct thermal print mode) (PC)
Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment
(Rewind)
0 mm
0
0
0
(PC)
Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment
(Back tension) (PC)
0
Feed fine adjustment (Key)
Cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment
(Key)
0 mm
0 mm
Back feed fine adjustment (Key)
Print density fine adjustment
(Thermal transfer print mode) (Key)
0 mm
0
- 26 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter
Initial Value
0
Print density fine adjustment
(Direct thermal print mode) (Key)
Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment
(Rewind)
0
0
(Key)
Ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment
(Back tension) (Key)
X-coordinate fine adjustment (Key)
Transmissive sensor manual threshold fine
adjustment value
0 mm
1.4 V
Reflective sensor manual threshold fine
adjustment value
1.0 V
Type of character code
PC-850
Font of 0
“0” (without slash mark)
Communication speed
9600 bps
Data length
QP type
QQ type
CN type
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
Stop bit length
Parity
1 bit
QP type
QQ type
CN type
QP type
NONE
NONE
NONE
Flow control
XON/XOFF + READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol:
(XON output when the power is on, XOFF
output when the power is off)
QQ type
CN type
READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol
XON/XOFF + READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol:
(XON output when the power is on, XOFF
output when the power is off)
Language for LCD messages
QP type
QQ type
CN type
English
English
English
Forward feed standby after an issue
Forward feed standby action
OFF
MODE 1
Head-up operation in cut issue mode, or use of
the rewinder
OFF
(Head-up operation is not operated./
the rewinder is not used.)
Installed solenoid type setting
TYPE 2 (TDS-16A: Stronger pull force type)
Use of ribbon saving system
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
OFF
ON (When the head lever position is
“TAG”.)
Type of control code
Auto
Peel-off wait status selection
[FEED] key function
OFF
FEED (One label is fed.)
Kanji code
TYPE1
B0H
Euro code
Automatic head broken dots check
Centronics ACK/BUSY timing setting
Web printer function
OFF
TYPE 1
OFF
Reset process when the nInit signal is ON
Ribbon near end detection setting
Expansion I/O operation mode
ON
OFF
TYPE1
- 27 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter
Centronics operation mode
Initial Value
SPP
OFF
Plug-and-play operation mode
Label end/ribbon end process setting
Pre-peel-off process setting
Back feed speed
TYPE1
OFF
3”/sec
MaxiCode specification setting
TYPE1
Print head type setting
B-SX4
B-SX5
V2 type: TPH104R7
V2 type: TPH128R5
ON
Status response
Label pitch
76.2 mm
Effective print length
Effective print width
74.2 mm
B-SX4
104.0 mm
128.0 mm
Thermal transfer print mode
Transmissive sensor
6”/sec
B-SX5
Print method
Type of sensor
Feed speed
B-SX4
B-SX5
5”/sec
Issue mode
Batch
PC save automatic call
ON
Save No. on the CPU board (ID) 01
BASIC interpreter setting
BASIC interpreter trace setting
DHCP setting
OFF
OFF
OFF
RFID module type selection
RFID tag type selection
None
None
RFID module’s destination code setting
RFID error tag detection
Depends on the module setting.
OFF
Password to protect error tag detection
Access password setting
OFF: 0000
00000000
Automatic unlock function setting
Max. number of RFID issue retries
Max. number of RFID read retries
RFID read retry timeout
OFF
3
5
4.0 sec.
Max. number of RFID write retries
RFID write retry timeout
5
2.0 sec.
RFID adjustment for retry
Invalid: 0 mm
RFID radio output power level setting
B-9704-RFID-U1: 251
B-SX704-RFID-U2: 18
B-9704-RFID-U1-EU-R: 50
B-SX704-RFID-U2-EU/US/CN/AU-R: 18
RFID AGC threshold setting
RFID channel setting
0
AUTO
Q value
0
AGC threshold for data write
AGC threshold lower limit for retry
Hibiki tag multi-word write
0
0
0: OFF
0
Number of times RFID write succeeded
Number of times RFID write failed
System mode password operation setting
0
OFF
- 28 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter
LAN enable/disable setting
Initial Value
OFF
XML specification setting
STD (V4.4A and Xx.x only)
OFF (C5.3 or greater, Cx.x only)
Z-MODE enable/disable setting
• The total label distance covered, sensor adjustment values (system mode <5>), IP address
setting, socket communication number setting, and data of flash memory (flash memory card,
ATA card, and flash ROM on the CPU board) are not cleared by RAM clear.
• Number of successful RFID write and number of failure in RFID write are not cleared by RAM
clear.
• System password setting cannot be cleared by RAM clear.
• For the all B-SX704-RFID-U2 series models regardless of the destination, the RFID radio
output power level setting is initialized to 18, as the country data is also cleared by RAM clear.
• RFID module’s destination code setting, password setting to protect error tag detection,
access password setting, and automatic unlock function setting are not cleared by RAM clear.
(The values in the table are the factory default.)
4.2 ONLINE MODE FUNCTIONS
The online mode provides the following functions for issuing labels and setting the threshold.
(For details, refer to Key Operation Specification (TAA-1379).)
(1) Issuing labels (by external equipment interface commands)
(2) Paper feed (by the [FEED] key)
(3) Pause (Halts issuing labels by the [PAUSE] key)
(4) Restart (Reissues labels by the [RESTART] key after halting issuing labels or after the occurrence
of an error.)
(5) Reset (Enters an usual initial state which is obtained after the power is turned on, using the
[RESTART] key.)
(6) Error indication
(7) Threshold setting
(8) Various parameters settings
(9) Various fine adjustments setting
(10) Dumping of receive buffer
4.3 DOWNLOAD MODE SETTING FUNCTION
When the power is turned on by pressing the [FEED], [PAUSE], and [RESTART] keys at the same
time, the printer enters the download mode. Therefore, the usual operations cannot be performed.
For details, refer to the Key Operation Specification (TAA-1379).
- 29 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
This section describes the outline of the transmission sequence.
5.1 INITIALIZATION
Writable characters, logo, and PC interface commands must be stored before the label issue
operation.
(1) Storing writable characters and logo
Power ON
No
<New>
Yes
(Add/change)
[ESC] J1: Formats the 4-MB flash memory
Format Command
card (manufactured by Maxell).
or
[ESC] JA: Formats the ATA card.
[ESC] XD: Stores writable characters or a
logo on the flash memory card.
Bit Map Writable
Character Command
or
[ESC] XA: Stores writable characters or a
logo on the ATA card.
No
Completion of storing
all characters
Yes
z Storing PC interface commands
z Label issue operation
NOTES: (1) The storage of writable characters or logos is only performed if it is required.
(2) When the flash memory card is used, and the Format Command is not sent before
storing already stored writable characters or logos, memory will be taken up with every
such storing.
(3) When the flash memory card is used, and another operation (storing PC interface
commands or label issue operation) is performed after storing writable characters or
logos, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.
(4) If another storing operation does not take place after storing writable characters or
logos, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation) after
about 10 seconds. In this case, when the flash memory card is used, the image
buffer will be cleared automatically.
- 30 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) Storing PC interface commands
Power ON
No
<New>
(Add/change)
Yes
[ESC] J1: Formats the flash memory card.
Format Command
or
[ESC] JA: Formats the ATA card.
[ESC] XO, [ESC] XV: Declares the start of saving
PC interface commands.
Save Start Command
[ESC] D: Sets the label size.
Label Size Set Command
[ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed length, cut position, and
back feed length.
Position Fine Adjust Command
Print Density Fine Adjust
Command
[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density.
[ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.
Image Buffer Clear Command
Line Format Command
[ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.
[ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.
Bit Map Font Format Command
Outline Font Format Command
Bar Code Format Command
Bit Map Font Data Command
Save Terminate Command
[ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.
[ESC] XB: Sets the bar code format.
[ESC] RC: Draws data of the bit map font.
[ESC] XP: Declares the termination of saving PC
interface commands.
No
Completion of
all storing
Yes
z Storing writable characters or logos
z Label issue operation
NOTES: (1) The storage of PC commands is only performed if it is required.
(2) When the flash memory card is used, and the Format Command is not sent before
storing already stored PC interface commands, memory will be taken up with every such
storing.
(3) When the flash memory card is used, and another operation (storing writable characters
or logos, label issue operation) is performed after storing PC interface commands, the
image buffer will be cleared automatically.
(4) Select commands to be stored as the occasion demands.
(5) If another storing operation does not take place after storing PC interface commands, the
printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about 10 seconds. In this
case, when the flash memory card is used, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.
- 31 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION
An example of the label issue operation is described below.
(1) Where the Saved Data Call Command is not used:
Power ON
Place paper
[ESC] D: Sets the label size.
Label Size Set Command
[ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed length, cut position, and
back feed length.
Position Fine Adjust Command
Print Density Fine
Adjust Command
[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density.
[ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it
with the first print position.
Feed Command
[ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.
[ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.
[ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.
[ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.
[ESC] XB: Sets the bar code format.
Image Buffer Clear Command
Line Format Command
Bit Map Font Format Command
Outline Font Format Command
Bar Code Format Command
[ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.
[ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.
[ESC] RB: Draws bar code data.
[ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.
Bit Map Font Data Command
Outline Font Data Command
Bar Code Data Command
Issue Command
Yes
<Change data issue>
No
Yes
<Format change>
No
Yes
<Label change>
No
Power OFF
NOTES: (1) When placing new paper, the Label Size Set Command and the Feed Command must
always be sent. When using the same paper after the power is turned off and on, the
Label Size Set Command and the Feed Command may be omitted.
(2) After the power is turned off and on, the Bit Map Font Format Command, the Outline
Font Format Command, and the Bar Code Format Command should be sent as
occasion demands because they are not protected in memory.
- 32 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) Where the Saved Data Call Command is used:
Power ON
[ESC] XQ: Calls the label format stored in the flash
memory card.
Place paper
or
Saved Data Call Command
[ESC] XT: Calls the label format stored in the ATA
card.
Feed Command
[ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it
with the first print position.
[ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.
[ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.
[ESC] RB: Draws bar code data.
[ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.
Bit Map Font Data Command
Outline Font Data Command
Bar Code Data Command
Issue Command
Yes
<Change data issue>
No
Yes
<Label change>
No
Power OFF
NOTES: (1) When placing new paper, the Feed Command must always be sent. When using the
same paper after the power is turned off and on, the Feed Command may be omitted.
(2) If the option for “automatic call at power on” for the Saved Data Call Command has
previously been selected, the Saved Data Call Command may be omitted after the
power is turned off and on.
(3) Where the XML data is used:
Print data in XML format can be sent to the printer.
* For details, refer to the XML Data Print Specification (TAA-1320).
- 33 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. INTERFACE COMMANDS
6.1 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS
(1) Format of Interface command
ESC
Command & Data
LF NUL
z The length from [ESC] to [LF] [NUL] must be as specified by each command.
z There are the following three kinds of control codes:
c ESC (1BH), LF(0AH), NUL
d { (7BH), | (7CH), } (7DH)
e Code set in the system mode
(00H)
(2) How to use reference
Function
Format
Describes the outline of the function of the command.
Shows the format of the command.
The format designation method should conform to the following rules:
z Each set of small letters (such as aa, bbbb) indicates a parameter item.
z An item enclosed in parentheses may be omitted.
z “…” indicates the repetition of an item.
z Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be transmitted
in practice.
z Other symbols must always be inserted at designated positions before being
transmitted.
Term
Explains the term(s) used in the format.
* “0 to 999” described in the entry range indicates that up to 3-digit variable-length
entry is allowed. (Entry of “001” or “009” is also possible.) “000 to 999” indicates
that the entry must be fixed as 3 digits.
Explanation
Note
Explains the command in detail.
Supplementary explanation of the command.
Related commands
Refer to
Examples
Explains the command examples.
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
The above corresponds to the transfer of the following:
1B 54 32 30 43 33 30 0A 00
[ESC]
T
2
0
C
3
0 [LF] [NUL]
(3) Precautions
The commands and parameters described in this specification must always be used. If any
command or parameter other than those covered in this specification are used, the printer’s
operation will not be guaranteed. The commands must be used in the online mode.
If any
command is transmitted in the system mode, the printer will not operate. However, only the
Reset Command can be used.
- 34 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2 LIST OF COMMANDS
(1) Commands related to setting
Label Size Set Command
[ESC] D......................................37
(2) Commands related to fine adjustment
Position Fine Adjust Command
[ESC] AX....................................43
[ESC] AY....................................51
[ESC] RM...................................52
Print Density Fine Adjust Command
Ribbon Motor Drive Voltage Fine Adjust Command
(3) Commands related to clear
Image Buffer Clear Command
Clear Area Command
[ESC] C......................................53
[ESC] XR ...................................54
(4) Commands related to drawing format setting
Line Format Command
[ESC] LC....................................56
[ESC] PC ...................................60
[ESC] PV....................................77
[ESC] XB....................................94
Bit Map Font Format Command
Outline Font Format Command
Bar Code Format Command
(5) Commands related to print data
Bit Map Font Data Command
Outline Font Data Command
Bar Code Data Command
[ESC] RC .................................143
[ESC] RV .................................148
[ESC] RB .................................151
(6) Commands related to issue and feed
Issue Command
[ESC] XS..................................164
[ESC] T ....................................180
[ESC] IB...................................187
[ESC] U1, [ESC] U2.................189
Feed Command
Eject Command
Forward/Reverse Feed Command
(7) Commands related to writable characters
Storage Area Allocate Command
[ESC] XF..................................191
[ESC] J1...................................195
[ESC] JA ..................................196
[ESC] XE..................................197
[ESC] XD .................................198
[ESC] XA..................................199
Flash Memory Format Command
ATA Card Format Command
2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command
Bit Map Writable Character Command (for flash memory)
Bit Map Writable Character Command (for ATA card)
(8) Commands related to graphics
Graphic Command
[ESC] SG .................................210
(9) Commands related to PC command saving
Flash Memory Format Command
ATA Card Format Command
[ESC] J1...................................195
[ESC] JA ..................................196
[ESC] XO .................................218
[ESC] XV..................................219
[ESC] XP..................................220
[ESC] XQ .................................221
[ESC] XT..................................222
Save Start Command (for flash memory)
Save Start Command (for ATA card)
Save Terminate Command
Saved Data Call Command (for flash memory)
Saved Data Call Command (for ATA card)
- 35 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(10) Commands related to check
Head Broken Dots Check Command
[ESC] HD .................................223
[ESC] XJ ..................................224
(11) Commands related to display
Message Display Command
(12) Commands related to control
Reset Command
[ESC] WR ................................226
[ESC] Z0 ..................................247
Batch Reset Command
(13) Commands related to status
Status Request Command
[ESC] WS.................................227
[ESC] WB.................................228
[ESC] WV.................................229
[ESC] WI..................................230
Receive Buffer Free Space Request Command
Version Information Acquire Command
ATA Card Information Acquire Command
ATA Card Writable Character Information Acquire Command [ESC] WG ................................232
Printer Option Status Acquire Command
[ESC] WN ................................233
(14) Commands related to TCP/IP setting
IP Address Set Command
[ESC] IP...................................234
[ESC] IS...................................235
[ESC] IH...................................236
Socket Communication Port Set Command
DHCP Function Set Command
(15) Commands related to internal serial interface
Pass-through Command
[ESC] @002.............................237
[ESC] IZ ...................................238
Internal Serial Interface Parameter Set Command
(16) Commands related to parameter setting
Parameter Set Command
[ESC] Z2;1 ...............................239
[ESC] Z2;2 ...............................243
[ESC] Z2;3 ...............................245
Fine Adjustment Value Set Command
RFID Parameter Set Command
(17) Commands related to RFID
RFID Tag Position Adjustment Command
RFID Tag Read Command
[ESC] @003.............................248
[ESC] WF.................................250
[ESC] @006.............................254
[ESC] @012.............................255
RFID Void Pattern Print Command
RFID Data Write Command
- 36 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3 COMMANDS FOR CREATING APPLICATION
6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND
[ESC] D
Function
Format
Term
Sets the size of a label or tag.
[ESC] Daaaa, bbbb, cccc (, dddd) [LF] [NUL]
aaaa:
bbbb:
cccc:
dddd:
Pitch length of the label or tag
4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
4 digits: 0100 (10.0 mm) to 9999 (999.9 mm)
5 digits: 00100 (10.0 mm) to 15000 (1500.0 mm)
Effective print width
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
B-SX4T: 0100 (10.0 mm) to 1040 (104.0 mm)
B-SX5T: 0100 (10.0 mm) to 1280 (128.0 mm)
Effective print length
4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
4 digits: 0060 (6.0 mm) to 9999 (999.9 mm)
5 digits: 00060 (6.0 mm) to 14980 (1498.0 mm)
Backing paper width
(Omissible. If omitted, the initial value is the effective print width.)
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
B-SX4T: 0300 (30.0 mm) to 1120 (112.0 mm)
B-SX5T: 0300 (30.0 mm) to 1400 (140.0 mm)
Explanation
[Labels]
Backing paper width
Backing paper width
Backing paper
Label
Backing paper
Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
pitch
Label
pitch
Effective
Effective
print length
print length
X
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
0
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
Y
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Printing direction: Printing top first]
- 37 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Tags]
Black mark
(Back side of
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Origin of
Tag
Tag
coordinates
(0, 0)
Tag
pitch
Tag
pitch
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
X
0
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
Y
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Printing direction: Printing top first]
[Setting range]
Black mark
(Back side
of print)
I
Stop
I
Stop
position
position
Tag
Cut
position
E
B
Cut
position
F
Origin c
Origin c
Origin d
A
A
H
H
Origin d
G
D
C
G
C
Paper feed direction
[Labels]
[Tags]
- 38 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[mm]
Model
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
Cut
Cut
Rotary cutter
Head-up Head-up
operation operation
Swing
cutter
Rotary cutter
Head-up
operation
not
Swing
cutter
Head-up
operation
performed
Issue mode Batch
Strip
Batch
Strip
Item
not
performed
performed
performed
Thermal head dot density
Thermal head width
8 dots/mm (203 dpi)
104.0 mm
12.05 dots/mm (306 dpi)
127.5 mm
Range of values which can be set on the software
A: Label pitch
Tag pitch
3 ips:
3 ips:
3 ips:
3 ips:
94.0 38.0
94.0
38.0
38.0
Label Min.
10.0
10.0
25.4
38.0 6 ips:
6 ips:
10.0
25.4
38.0 5 ips:
102.0
8 ips:
5 ips:
38.0
106.0
10 ips: – 10 ips: –
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
8 ips:
38.0
113.0
Max.
1500.0
1500.0
3 ips: 30.0
3 ips: 30.0
Tag Min.
–
–
25.4 6 ips: 30.0
10 ips: – (NOTE 1)
10.0
–
–
25.4 5 ips: 30.0
8 ips: 38.0
Max. 1500.0
1500.0
3 ips: (*1) 3 ips:
81.0
1500.0
1500.0
B: Label length
3 ips: (*4) 3 ips:
32.0
32.0
81.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
Min.
8.0
23.4
25.0 (*3) 6 ips: (*2) 6 ips:
93.0
8.0
23.4
25.0 (*7) 5 ips: (*5) 5 ips:
89.0
10 ips: – 10 ips: –
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
1494.0
8 ips: (*6) 8 ips:
100.0
1494.0
30.0
Max.
1498.0
1498.0
30.0
C: Backing paper width Min.
30.0
50.0
30.0
50.0
Tag width
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
112.0
27.0
140.0
112.0
27.0
D: Label width
109.0
137.0
2.0
109.0
6.0
E: Label-to-label gap
F: Black mark length
2.0
6.0
20.0
2.0
20.0
2.0
10.0
10.0
104.0
10.0
G: Effective print width Min.
Max.
10.0
128.0
H: Effective
3 ips:
3 ips:
6 ips:
3 ips:
23.0 5 ips:
8 ips:
3 ips:
5 ips:
8 ips:
print length
79.0
91.0
30.0
30.0
79.0
87.0
98.0
23.0
23.0
23.0
Label Min.
6.0
21.4
23.0 6 ips:
6.0
21.4
10 ips: – 10 ips: –
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
1492.0
Max.
1496.0
1496.0
1492.0
3 ips: 28.0
3 ips: 28.0
23.4 5 ips: 28.0
8 ips: 36.0
1498.0
Tag Min.
8.0
–
–
23.4 6 ips: 28.0
8.0
–
–
10 ips: – (NOTE 1)
1498.0
Max. 1498.0
Slow-up
1498.0
I: Slow up/
1.0
1.0
1.0
down interval Slow-down
Max. effective print length for
on-the-fly issuing
1.0
749.0
749.0
NOTE 1: The use of the rotary cutter at 10 ips is not supported for the B-SX4T.
- 39 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-SX4T:
(*1): When a cut issue is performed at 3 ips by using the rotary cutter, label length B should be
as follows:
Label-to-label gap
2
Label length B ≥ 91.0 mm -
(*2): When a cut issue is performed at 6 ips by using the rotary cutter, label length Bshould be
as follows:
Label-to-label gap
Label length B ≥ 103.0 mm -
2
(*3): When a cut issue is performed by using the swing cutter, label length Bshould be as
follows:
Label-to-label gap
Label length B ≥ 35.0 mm -
2
B-SX5T:
(*4): When a cut issue is performed at 3 ips by using the rotary cutter, label length B should be
as follows:
Label-to-label gap
Label length B ≥ 91.0 mm -
2
(*5): When a cut issue is performed at 5 ips by using the rotary cutter, label length Bshould be
as follows:
Label-to-label gap
Label length B ≥ 99.0 mm -
2
(*6): When a cut issue is performed at 8 ips by using the rotary cutter, label length Bshould be
as follows:
Label-to-label gap
Label length B ≥ 110.0 mm -
2
(*7): When a cut issue is performed by using the swing cutter, label length Bshould be as
follows:
Label-to-label gap
Label length B ≥ 35.0 mm -
2
- 40 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
(1) Before changing the label size or type of sensor, the Label Size Set Command
must first be transmitted.
(2) The Label Size Set Command is protected in memory (even if the power is turned
off).
(3) After sending the Label Size Set Command, one sheet of paper must be fed by
the Feed Command ([ESC] T) and must be aligned with the first print position prior
to printing.
(4) The origin of drawing coordinates, print stop position (head position at stop), and
cut position are determined according to the parameters of the Label Size Set
Command as shown in the figure on the preceding page. For the print stop
position in strip issue mode, refer to the section of the Position Fine Adjust
Command. The effective print area is centered on the label/tag.
(5) Printing cannot be performed in the slow up (1 mm) and slow down (1 mm) areas.
Consequently, [A: Label pitch/Tag pitch] - [H: Effective print length] ≥ 2 mm must
be assumed.
(6) The origin of drawing coordinates, print stop position (head position at stop), and
cut position are adjustable by the Fine Adjust Commands and according to the
fine adjustment settings in the system mode.
(7) The tag rotation designation of the Issue Command ([ESC] XS) causes the origin
of drawing coordinates to be origin c in the case of “printing bottom first” and to
be origin d in the case of “printing top first”, as shown in the figure.
(8) The parameters must be as shown in the figure and table. Any value or paper
outside the range results in a failure of printing or an error.
(9) Where an effective print length within “max. effective print length for on-the-fly” is
specified, labels even each with different data can be printed continuously without
stopping every label because printing and drawing of the next label are processed
at the same time. [On-the-fly issue]
However, printing may stop every label depending on the quantity of drawing data.
Also, if the ribbon saving is performed, the On-the-fly issue will not be performed
regardless of the data quantity.
(10) The setting for the backing paper width is used for the control of the backing paper
rewind motor for a strip issue. Therefore, this setting is not effective for any
mode other than strip issue mode.
- 41 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
(1) Labels
(2) Tags
Effective
print area
Black mark
(Back side
of print)
Label
76.2
mm
50.8
mm
46.8
mm
72.2
mm
Effective
print area
Tag
76.0 mm
Backing paper
82.0 mm
99.6 mm
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468, 0820 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0762, 0996, 0722 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T10C30 [LF] [NUL]
- 42 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.2 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND
[ESC] AX
Function
c Adjusts the feed value so that the label will be shifted forward or backward from the
automatically set first print start position.
d Adjusts the cut position so that the label will be cut at a position shifted forward or
backward from the automatically set cut position, or adjusts the strip position so that
the label will be shifted forward or backward from the automatically set strip position.
e Adjusts the value for feeding the label back to the home position after cutting, or
adjusts the value for feeding the label back to the home position after stripping.
Format
Term
[ESC] AX; abbb, cddd, eff [LF] [NUL]
a:
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a fine adjustment is to
be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
bbb:
c:
Feed value to be finely adjusted.
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a cut position
(or strip position) fine adjustment is to be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
ddd:
e:
Fine adjustment value for the cut position (or strip position).
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
Indicates whether the back feed is to be increased or decreased.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
ff:
Back feed length fine adjustment value
00 to 99 (in 0.1 mm units)
- 43 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Explanation
[Feed Length Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the feed for shifting backward or forward)
0.0 mm
One label
First print position
+3.0 mm
One label
First print position
-3.0 mm
One label
First print position
Paper feed direction
[Cut Position Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the cut position for shifting backward or
forward)
0.0 mm
Cut position
+3.0 mm
Cut position
- 3.0 mm
Cut position
Paper feed direction
- 44 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Strip Position Fine Adjustment]
0.0 mm
+3.0 mm
-3.0 mm
Printing in strip issue mode is stopped at the position where the
distance from the middle point of the label-to-label gap to the
end of the strip shaft is 4 mm, since the label-to-label gap is
assumed to be 2 mm.
4 mm
3 mm
When the print stop position is not proper, the print stop position
should be adjusted using the strip position fine adjust function.
When the label-to-label gap is 5 mm or more, the effective print
length should be set to the maximum (label pitch -2 mm).
Then, the print stop position should be adjusted using the strip
position fine adjust function.
2 mm
[Back Feed Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the back feed for shifting backward or forward)
0.0 mm
First print position (home position after back feed)
+3.0 mm
First print position (home position after back feed)
- 3.0 mm
First print position (home position after back feed)
Paper feed direction
- 45 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
(1) If the feed value fine adjustment, cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment or
back feed value fine adjustment has been set in the system mode (key operation
on the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the sum of the fine adjustment by
this command and the fine adjustment in the system mode. The max. fine
adjustment values are as follows. However, the max. feed fine adjustment value
is limited within the label pitch.
Feed value fine adjustment.........................................................±50.0 mm
Cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment............................±50.0 mm
Back feed value fine adjustment.................................................±9.9 mm
(2) After changing the fine adjustment value by this command, one label must be fed
by the Feed Command ([ESC] T) to adjust the first print position.
(3) Each fine adjustment value is protected in memory (even if the power is turned off).
(4) If a fine adjustment value is improper, printing will not be performed correctly.
For example, if the back feed fine adjustment value is not set properly,
the print positions without cutting and after cutting will be different from
each other. If the label is fed back excessively, the paper will not be
fed correctly during printing.
In the strip issue mode, the print position may differ between the first
label and the second label. The back feed fine adjustment is used to
adjust the length so that the label is correctly fed back to the position
placed before the forward feed is performed.
(5) The cut position (or the strip position) fine adjustment and the back feed fine
adjustment are effective only when the printer is in cut issue or strip issue mode.
(6) Procedure for label having label pitch of less than 38 mm when the swing cutter is
used:
The minimum label pitch of the label which can be cut in normal use is 38 mm.
When a label having a label pitch of less than 38 mm is used (although it is out of
specifications), the edge of the label is caught by the edge of the thermal head
during a back feed to the home position after cutting the gap area between labels.
Therefore, the label may not be fed back to the proper home position. By
performing either method below, the problem will be solved.
[Method 1] Lift the head.
When the following conditions are all met, the cut operation is as follows.
Head lifted → Forward feed to the cut position → Head lowered → Cut →
Head lifted → Reverse feed to the home position → Head lowered
Conditions: Issue Command, Feed Command, and Eject Command received.
Label pitch of 38.0 mm or less, cut performed, transmissive sensor
designated, cut position fine adjustment of ±10.0 mm or less, and
issue mode “C”
* The head is lifted/lowered only when the optional ribbon save module is
attached and the use of the ribbon saving system is set to ON in the parameter
setting. When the ribbon save module is not installed, use Method 2 since the
head is not lifted/lowered.
- 46 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES: 1. If the head is being lifted when the edge of the label which is being
ejected passes the paper feed roller, the sensor may not be able to
detect an error even if it occurs (a feed cannot be performed).
2. If the head-up solenoid temperature is high when a cut issue is
about to be performed with the head lifted, the head may not be
lifted.
[Method 2] Adjust the cut position value.
When this procedure is used, one or more printed labels are left between the
head and the cutter. Therefore, these labels should be removed by an issue or
a label feed.
(a) Cut position fine adjustment value calculation
The cut position fine adjustment value can be calculated using the following
method. If a back feed to the proper home position cannot be performed
using this value, the cut position should be adjusted with any value.
Cut position fine
adjustment value
(Number of labels left
between head and cutter)
=
=
×
(Label pitch)
32.8 mm
× (Label pitch)
Label pitch
* Any decimal remainders
are dropped.
Ex) Label pitch: 30.0 mm
Cut position fine
adjustment value
32.8 mm
30.0 mm
=
× (30.0 mm)
= 1 × 30.0 mm
= +30.0 mm
- 47 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(b)
Operation example
Issue count: 2, Cut interval = 1
Cut
Head
position
position
(1) Idling
A
B
B
C
(2) Completes printing the first label (A).
A
(3) Feeds the label to the cut position, then
cuts the gap at the front of label A.
A
B
C
(4) Feeds back to the home position.
A
B
B
C
C
(5) Completes printing the second label (B).
A
(6) Feeds the label to the cut position, then
cuts the gap at the front of label B.
A
B
B
C
(7) Feeds back to the home position.
B
C
C
A
A
(8) To eject label B, feeds the third label
(C).
B
(9) Feeds the label to the cut position,
then cuts the gap at the front of label
C
A
(10) Feeds back to the home position.
C
B
A
- 48 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) Procedure for label having less than the minimum label pitch for each issue speed
when the rotary cutter is used:
When the following conditions are all met, the cut operation for the last label to be
cut is as follows.
Forward feed to the cut position → Cut with feeding → Feed stops →
Head lifted → Reverse feed to the home position → Head lowered
Conditions: Issue Command, Feed Command, and Eject Command received.
Label pitch: Less than the minimum label pitch for each issue speed,
cut performed, transmissive sensor designated, cut position fine
adjustment of ±10.0 mm or less, and issue mode “C”
* For the Issue Command, this procedure is effective only for the last label to be
cut when the next Issue Command is not received.
* The head is lifted/lowered only when the optional ribbon save module is attached
and the use of the ribbon saving system is set to ON in the parameter setting.
When the ribbon save module is not installed, the head-up/down operations are
not performed. See “NOTES” below.
NOTES: 1. If the head is being lifted when the edge of the label which is being
ejected passes the paper feed roller, the sensor may not be able to
detect an error even if it occurs (a feed cannot be performed more).
2. If the head-up solenoid temperature is high when a cut issue is
about to be performed with the head lifted, the head may not be
lifted.
(8) There may be cases where a label is not returned to the home position depending
on the print conditions, even if a backfeed, of which the length is the same as the
forward feed, is performed. In issues where any paper sensor is used, if the label
pitch length is almost the same as the distance between the thermal print head and
the paper sensors (75.5 mm), a label/tag may not be returned to the home position
when operations with a backfeed (such as cut issues, strip issues, automatic
forward feed standby) are performed. It may result in an error. In such cases, to
prevent an error from occurring, the backfeed length should be increased by
performing the back feed fine adjustment in the + direction.
- 49 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
(1) Cut issue
3.5 mm
Cut
Preprinted
2.0 mm
2.0 mm
z
Finely adjust the print
position by +2.0 mm.
Finely adjust the cut
position by +3.5 mm.
Finely adjust the back
feed value by +1.0 mm.
(3.0 - 2.0 = 1.0)
z
z
3.0 mm
Cut
Paper feed
direction
[ESC] AX; +020, +035, +10 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T21C30 [LF] [NUL]
(2) Strip issue
1.0 mm
3.0 mm
z
z
Finely adjust the strip
position by +2.0 mm.
Finely adjust the print
position by +1.0 mm.
A B C
A B C
1.0 mm
[ESC] AX; +010, +020, +00 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20D30 [LF] [NUL]
Paper feed
direction
- 50 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.3 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND
[ESC] AY
Function
Format
Term
Adjusts the automatically set print density.
[ESC] AY; abb, c [LF] [NUL]
a:
Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density.
+: Increase (darker)
-: Decrease (lighter)
bb:
c:
Print density fine adjustment value
00 to 10 (in units of 1 step)
Indicates the mode for fine adjustment, thermal transfer or direct thermal.
0: Thermal transfer
1: Direct thermal
Explanation
(1) The print density fine adjustment is performed by adjusting the time that the
voltage is applied to the thermal head.
(2) If the print density fine adjustment value has been set in system mode (key
operation on the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the sum of the fine
adjustment by this command and the fine adjustment in the system mode. The
maximum fine adjustment values for thermal transfer/direct thermal print modes
are each ±10.
(3) The fine adjustment values in thermal transfer print mode and direct thermal print
mode can be set independently.
(4) The Print Density Fine Adjust Command is protected in memory (even if the power
is turned off).
(5) The fine adjustment value for both the fine adjust command and the system mode
fine adjustment is 00 at shipment from the factory.
(6) The maximum value for each print speed is as follows. When the value exceeds
the maximum, it is automatically corrected to the max. value, and then the printer
prints.
B-SX4T
V1 type: TPH104R2 V2 type: TPH104R7
B-SX5T
V1 type: TPH128R4 V2 type: TPH128R5
Print
speed
Thermal
direct
Thermal
transfer
Thermal
direct
Thermal
transfer
Thermal
direct
Thermal
transfer
Thermal
direct
Thermal
transfer
3 ips
5 ips
6 ips
8 ips
10 ips
+10 step +10 step +10 step +10 step +10 step +10 step +10 step +10 step
----
----
----
----
+7 step
----
+10 step
----
+7 step
----
+10 step
----
+8 step
----
+8 step
----
+8 step
----
+8 step
----
+3 step
----
+10 step
----
+3 step
----
+10 step
----
+4 step
+8 step
+5 step
+7 step
Examples
To set the density in thermal transfer print mode to -2.
[ESC] AY; -02, 0 [LF] [NUL]
To set the density in direct thermal print mode to +3.
[ESC] AY; +03, 1 [LF] [NUL]
- 51 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.4 RIBBON MOTOR DRIVE VOLTAGE FINE ADJUST COMMAND
[ESC] RM
Function
Format
Term
Finely adjusts the drive voltage of the ribbon motor.
[ESC] RM; abbcdd [LF] [NUL]
a:
Fine adjustment direction of the ribbon rewind motor
-: Negative (The voltage is lowered.)
bb:
c:
Fine adjustment value for the ribbon rewind motor
00 to 15 (in units of 1 step)
Fine adjustment direction of the ribbon back tension motor
-: Negative (The voltage is lowered.)
dd:
Fine adjustment value for the ribbon back tension motor
00 to 15 (in units of 1 step)
Explanation
(1) If wrinkles occur on the ribbon, they can be prevented by adjusting the ribbon
motor drive voltage by this command.
(2) -1 step corresponds to -5% of the standard drive voltage.
(3) The ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment value is protected in memory (even
if the power is turned off).
(4) If the ribbon motor drive voltage fine adjustment value has been set in the system
mode (key operation on the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the sum of
the system mode and the ribbon rewind motor adjustments or the system mode
and the ribbon back tension motor adjustments. The max. fine adjustment values
are as shown below.
Model
Rewind
Back tension
Min.
-15
Max.
Min.
Max.
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
0
0
-15
-15
0
0
-15
(5) When RAM clear is performed, the fine adjustment values for both fine adjust
commands (rewind/back tension) and the system mode are 00.
(6) The fine adjustment values for both fine adjust commands (rewind/back tension)
and the system mode are 00 at the time of shipment from the factory.
Example
To set the value for the ribbon motor (rewind) to -3, and the value for the ribbon motor
(back tension) to -2.
[ESC] RM; -03-02 [LF] [NUL]
- 52 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.5 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND
[ESC] C
Function
Format
Clears the image buffer for drawing characters, lines, bar codes, and graphics.
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
(1) After changing the label size, the image buffer must be cleared.
(2) The increment/decrement designation (described later) is valid until the Image
Buffer Clear Command is transmitted.
(3) The link field designation (described later) is effective until the Image Buffer Clear
Command is sent.
(4) The RFID format and data are cleared.
(5) RFID tag position adjustment value set in the RFID Tag Position Adjustment
Command @003 is cleared.
Examples
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C51 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 53 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.6 CLEAR AREA COMMAND
[ESC] XR
Function
Clears the designated area or reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated
area in the drawing area.
Format
Term
[ESC] XR; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e [LF] [NUL]
aaaa:
bbbb:
cccc:
dddd:
e:
Designated area start point X-coordinate
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Designated area start point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Designated area end point X-coordinate
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Designated area end point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of clear
A: Clears the contents in the designated area to zeros.
B: Reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated area.
Explanation
Backing paper
Label
Backing paper
Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
End point
Start point
Effective
Effective
print length
print length
Start point
End point
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
Effective
X
print width
print width
0
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Print direction: Printing top first]
Notes
(1) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed.
(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are set to an
upper right and a lower left points, respectively.
(3) The start and end point coordinates of the designated area must be set within the
effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
- 54 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
Cut
Cut
Rotary cutter
Head-up Head-up
operation operation
Swing
cutter
Rotary cutter
Head-up
operation operation
Swing
cutter
Head-up
Issue mode Batch
Strip
Batch
Strip
Item
not
performed
not
performed
performed
performed
Effective print width
Min.
10.0
10.0
Max.
104.0
128.0
Effective print
length
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
30.0
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
23.0
Label Min.
6.0
8.0
21.4
23.0 6 ips:
6 ips:
30.0
6.0
21.4
23.0 5 ips:
5 ips:
23.0
91.0
87.0
98.0
10 ips: – 10 ips: –
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
1492.0
8 ips:
8 ips:
23.0
Max.
1496.0
1496.0
1492.0
3 ips: 28.0
3 ips: 28.0
23.4 5 ips: 28.0
8 ips: 36.0
Tag Min.
–
–
23.4 6 ips: 28.0
8.0
–
–
10 ips: – (NOTE 1)
1498.0
Max. 1498.0
1498.0
1498.0
NOTE 1: The use of the rotary cutter at 10 ips is not supported for the B-SX4T.
Examples
Start point of
designated area
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
10.0 mm
58.5 mm
Designated area
End point of designated area
34.5 mm
76.2 mm
[ESC] XR; 0345, 0100, 0762, 0585, A [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 55 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.7 LINE FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] LC
Function
Format
Term
Sets the line format and draws the line.
[ESC] LC; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, f (, ggg) (, h)[LF] [NUL]
aaaa:
bbbb:
cccc:
dddd:
e:
Start point X-coordinate
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Start point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
End point X-coordinate
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
End point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of line
0: Line (horizontal, vertical, slant)
1: Rectangle
f:
No. of line width dots
1 to 9 (in 0.1 mm units)
ggg:
Radius of rounded corners of rectangles
(Omissible. If omitted, the chamfering process for rectangle corners is not
performed.)
Fixed as 3 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Explanation
Backing paper
Label
Backing paper
Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Start point
End
point
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
Start
End
point
point
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
X
0
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Print direction: Printing top first]
- 56 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Line]
(1) Horizontal line (In the case of |Y2 - Y1| = 0)
(X1,Y1)
(X2,Y2)
Line width
(2) Vertical line (In the case of |X2 - X1| = 0)
(X1,Y1)
(X2,Y2)
Line width
(3) Slant line A ( |X2 - X1| ≤ |Y2 - Y1| )
(4) Slant line B ( |X2 - X1| > |Y2 - Y1| )
(X1,Y1)
(X1,Y1)
(X1,Y1)
Line width
(X2,Y2)
(X2,Y2)
(X1,Y1)
Line width
(X2,Y2)
(X2,Y2)
Line width
Line width
- 57 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Rectangle]
(1) Radius of rounded corners = 000 or parameter omitted
(X1,Y1)
(X2,Y2)
Line width
Line width
(X2,Y2)
(X1,Y1)
Line width
Line width
(2) Radius of rounded corners ≠ 000
(X1,Y1)
Line width
Radius
(X2,Y2)
Line width
Notes
(1) In line designation, a horizontal line, vertical line, or slant line A/B is drawn
according to the start and end point coordinates.
(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed.
(3) The start and end point coordinates must be set so that the result of line drawing
will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command
([ESC] D).
- 58 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Programming the radius of the rounded corner is effective only when the type of
line is 1 (rectangle). When the type of line is 0, designation of the radius is
ignored. When the type of line is 1, and the radius of the rounded corner is 000
or omitted, a rectangle is printed.
(5) A circle is assumed when:
| X2 - X1 |
2
| Y2 - Y1 |
2
=
≤ [Radius of rounded corners]
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SX4T
Swing
B-SX5T
Cut
Cut
Rotary cutter
Head-up Head-up
operation operation
Rotary cutter
Head-up
operation operation
Swing
cutter
Head-up
Issue mode Batch
Strip
cutter
Batch
Strip
Item
not
performed
not
performed
performed
performed
Effective print width
Min.
10.0
10.0
Max.
104.0
128.0
Effective print
length
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
30.0
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
23.0
Label Min.
6.0
8.0
21.4
23.0 6 ips:
6 ips:
30.0
6.0
21.4
23.0 5 ips:
5 ips:
23.0
91.0
87.0
98.0
10 ips: – 10 ips: –
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
1492.0
8 ips:
8 ips:
23.0
Max.
1496.0
1496.0
1492.0
3 ips: 28.0
3 ips: 28.0
23.4 5 ips: 28.0
8 ips: 36.0
Tag Min.
–
–
23.4 6 ips: 28.0
8.0
–
–
10 ips: – (NOTE 1)
1498.0
Max. 1498.0
1498.0
1498.0
NOTE 1: The use of the rotary cutter at 10 ips is not supported for the B-SX4T.
Examples
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
5.0 mm
28.0 mm
0.4 mm
0.4 mm
20.0 mm
30.5 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] LC; 0200, 0350, 0305, 0050, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] LC; 0200, 0050, 0200, 0280, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 59 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.8 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] PC
Function
Format
Sets the format indicating the position on the label at which the bit map font is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.
c
d
[ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (=rrr------rrr) [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (; ss1, ss2, ss3, ------, ss20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aaa:
Character string number
000 to 199 (two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d:
Character horizontal magnification
1 to 9 (in magnifications)
* Two digit designation enables magnifications in 0.5 units
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications).
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 and 1.
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).
d d
Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 (5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)
Designation in magnifications
: 0 to 9
e:
Character vertical magnification
1 to 9 (in magnifications)
* Two digit designation enables magnifications in 0.5 units
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications).
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 and 1.
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).
e e
Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 (5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)
Designation in magnifications
: 0 to 9
ff:
Type of font
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
8 point
A: Times Roman
B: Times Roman
C: Times Roman
D: Times Roman
E: Times Roman
F: Times Roman
G: Helvetica
(Medium)
(Medium)
(Bold)
12 point
15 point
15 point
18 point
21 point
18 point
9 point
10 point
10 point
12 point
14 point
12 point
6 point
(Bold)
(Bold)
(Italic)
(Medium)
(Medium)
(Medium)
(Bold)
H: Helvetica
15 point
18 point
18 point
21 point
18 point
27 point
10 point
12 point
12 point
14 point
12 point
18 point
I:
Helvetica
J: Helvetica
K: Helvetica
L: Helvetica
M: Presentation
(Bold)
(Italic)
(Bold)
- 60 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N: Letter Gothic
O: Prestige Elite
P: Prestige Elite
Q: Courier
(Medium)
(Medium)
(Bold)
14.3 point
10.5 point
15 point
15 point
18 point
12 point
12 point
9.5 point
7 point
10 point
10 point
12 point
12 point
12 point
(Medium)
(Bold)
R: Courier
S: OCR-A
T: OCR-B
a: (Reserved)
b: (Reserved)
c: (Reserved)
d: (Reserved)
e: (Reserved)
f:
(Reserved)
g: (Reserved)
h: (Reserved)
i:
j:
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
k: (Reserved)
l: (Reserved)
m: (Reserved)
n: (Reserved)
o: (Reserved)
p: (Reserved)
q: Gothic725 Black
r:
Chinese (24 x 24 dots) or writable character 42 (24 x 24 dots)
(When the Chinese fonts are installed.)
01 (a): Writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
to
40 (a): Writable character 40 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
51 (a): 2-byte code set writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
to
55 (a): 2-byte code set writable character 5 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
a: Drive
(Omissible. If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Slot 1 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
2: Slot 2 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
*
The following fonts are proportional.
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, q
ghh:
Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
hh: No. of space dots between characters
00 to 99 (in dots)
- 61 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ii:
Rotational angles of a character and character string
00:
11:
0° (char.)
0° (char.-string)
90° (char.-string)
180° (char.-string)
270° (char.-string)
90° (char.)
22: 180° (char.)
33: 270° (char.)
01:
12:
0° (char.)
90° (char.-string)
180° (char.-string)
270° (char.-string)
0° (char.-string)
90° (char.)
For font type “r” only
23: 180° (char.)
30: 270° (char.)
j:
Character attribution
B:
Black character
W (aabb): Reverse character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the horizontal direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the vertical direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
F (aabb): Boxed character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the
horizontal direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the vertical
direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
C (aa):
Stroked out character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the end of the stroke
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Descriptions in parentheses are omissible.
(If omitted, it is the character magnification (the larger one of horizontal or
vertical magnifications) × 6 dots.)
Jkkll:
Mm:
Bold character designation
(Omissible. If omitted, this process is not performed.)
kk: No. of horizontal shift dots
00 to 16 (in dots)
ll: No. of vertical shift dots
00 to 16 (in dots)
Type of check digit to be attached
(Omissible. If omitted, the check digit is not drawn.)
m: Type of check digit
0: Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)
1: Modulus 43 (Draws data and check digit)
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws check digit only)
- 62 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
noooooooooo: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)
n: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
-: Decrement
oooooooooo: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
Zero suppression
Zpp:
Pq:
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
pp: No. of zeros to be suppressed
00 to 20
Alignment (Omissible. If omitted, the alignment is set to the left.)
q: Designates the character position
1: Left
2: Center
3: Right
4aaaa: Equal space
aaaa: X direction of character string area
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units) B-SX4
0050 to 1280 (in 0.1 mm units) B-SX5
5aaaabbbcc: Automatic line feed
aaaa:
X direction of character string area
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units) B-SX4
0050 to 1280 (in 0.1 mm units) B-SX5
bbb:
cc:
Line feed length
010 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
Number of lines
01 to 99
rrr------rrr: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
ss1, ss2, ss3, ------, ss20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 63 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Explanation
(1) Character string number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RC), the format designated by the
character string number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates
Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
Label
Sample
Effective
Effective
Print origin
of coordinates
print length
print length
Print origin
of coordinates
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective print
width
Effective print
width
Y
X
0
0
X
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
[Printing direction: Printing bottom first]
[Printing direction: Printing top first]
The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the character drawing result will be within the
effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
- 64 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
Cut
Cut
Rotary cutter
Head-up Head-up
operation operation
Swing
cutter
Rotary cutter
Head-up
operation operation
Swing
cutter
Head-up
Issue mode Batch
Strip
Batch
Strip
Item
not
performed
not
performed
performed
performed
Effective print width
Min.
10.0
10.0
Max.
104.0
128.0
Effective print
length
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
30.0
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
23.0
Label Min.
6.0
8.0
21.4
23.0 6 ips:
6 ips:
30.0
6.0
21.4
23.0 5 ips:
5 ips:
23.0
91.0
87.0
98.0
10 ips: – 10 ips: –
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
1492.0
8 ips:
8 ips:
23.0
Max.
1496.0
1496.0
1492.0
3 ips: 28.0
3 ips: 28.0
23.4 5 ips: 28.0
8 ips: 36.0
Tag Min.
–
–
23.4 6 ips: 28.0
8.0
–
–
10 ips: – (NOTE 1)
1498.0
Max. 1498.0
1498.0
1498.0
NOTE 1: The use of the rotary cutter at 10 ips is not supported for the B-SX4T.
(3) Horizontal magnification and vertical magnification
Vertical
Horizontal
magnification
magnification
Horizontal
Vertical
magnification
magnification
- 65 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Relationship between drawing coordinates and magnification]
Char. height ×
Vertical
magnification
Char.
height
Enlarge
Point of
origin
Char. width
Char. Width ×
Horizontal magnification
Left offset
Point of
origin of
next char.
Point of
origin
Point of
origin of
next char.
Horizontal spacing/
proportional spacing
(Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing)
× Horizontal magnification
(4) Type of font
A: Times Roman
B: Times Roman
C: Times Roman
D: Times Roman
E: Times Roman
F: Times Roman
G: Helvetica
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
H: Helvetica
I: Helvetica
J: Helvetica
K: Helvetica
L: Helvetica
M: Presentation
N: Letter Gothic
O: Prestige Elite
P: Prestige Elite
Q: Courier
R: Courier
S: OCR-A
T: OCR-B
- 66 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
q: Gothic725 Black
r: Chinese (24×24 dots) :
To print font “r”, the Chinese ROM is required.
:
(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots between
characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal spacing/proportional
spacing determined for each character. If character-to-character space is specified,
drawing will take place according to the value obtained by adding the character
spacing/proportional spacing to the specified value.
Point of
origin
Point of origin of
next char.
No. of fine adjust space dots
between characters
(Horizontal spacing/proportional
spacing) × Horizontal magnification
(6) Rotational angles of a character and character string
Sample
Origin
0° (00)
90° (11)
180° (22)
270° (33)
Origin
90° (01)
180° (12)
270° (23)
0° (30)
“01”, “12”, “23”, and “30” are available only when the font type is “r”.
Specifying any font other than “r” results in an error.
- 67 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) Selection of character attribution
No. of dots in the
horizontal direction
No. of dots in the
vertical direction
A B
Black characters
Reverse characters
No. of dots in the
No. of dots in the
horizontal direction
horizontal direction
No. of dots in the
vertical direction
A B
A B
Boxed characters
Stroked out characters
(8) Bold character designation
0°
90°
Horizontally
bold
Vertically
bold
Vertically/
horizontally
bold
Horizontally
bold
Vertically
bold
Vertically/
horizontally
bold
(9) Check digit to be attached
When Modulus 10 or Modulus 43 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated
and attached to the data row for drawing. When modulus 10 is designated and the data
includes any data other than the numerals, the data row will not be drawn. When
modulus 43 is designated and the data includes any character other than CODE39, the
drawing is not performed.
When DBP Modulus 10 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated and only
the check digit is drawn. When the data includes any data other than the numerals,
drawing is not performed.
When the font type is “r”, the check digit cannot be added.
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.
- 68 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(10) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
When the font type is r, 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55, the
incrementing/decrementing cannot be designated. (If it is designated, it is ignored, and
the printer operates as if there was no designation.)
Initial value
INC/DEC
0000
+10
0000
+10
0000
+10
0000
+10
999999
+1
Not
designated
Zero suppression
5
3
0
3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
000
010
020
030
040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
999999
000
001
002
003
Letters and numerals for increment/decrement
For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are
possible. Only the numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/
decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation
Initial value
INC/DEC
00000
+1
A0A0A
+1
7A8/9
+3
A2A0A
-3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
A0A0A
A0A1A
A0A2A
A0A3A
A0A4A
7A8/9
7A9/2
7A9/5
7A9/8
8A0/1
A2A0A
A1A7A
A1A4A
A1A1A
A0A8A
(11) Zero suppression
0
1
2
2
3
4
5
No. of zeros to be suppressed
Data
Print
0000
0000
0000
0
0000
00
0A12
A12
0123
123
0123
0123
0123
0123
The leading zero(s) in a data row is replaced by a space(s) according to the designated
number of digits. However, if the number of digits to be suppressed is greater than the
data row, the data row will be drawn without zero suppression. Where the data row
exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be drawn. When the
font type is r, 51, 52, 53, 54 or 55, zero suppression is not designated. If it is designated,
it is ignored, and the printer operates as if there was no designation.
- 69 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(12) Alignment
Character string length in the
X direction (in 0.1 mm units)
Designated origin
Left
Center
Right
E q u a l s p a c e
Automatic line feed
Automatic line feed
Automatic
Line feed length
No. of lines
If characters are not placed on one line when equal space and automatic line feed is
designated, the following steps should be performed.
Decrease the value of the character-to-character space. When characters are not placed
on one line if the value is set to 0, return the value to its default, and then reduce the
horizontal magnification for a character by 0.5.
If characters are still not placed on one line, repeatedly decrease the value of the
character-to-character space, and then reduce the horizontal magnification. When
characters are not placed on one line if the character magnification is set to 0.5 and the
character-to-character space is set to 0, the field is not drawn. (The same previous field
is not drawn.)
When “01”, “12”, “23”, or “30” is specified for the rotational angles of a character and
character string, the alignment setting (Center, Right, Equal space, or Automatic line
feed) is ignored.
(13) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” Up to 255 digits can be printed. However, when the font type is “r”, the maximum
number of digits is 127. If the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, the
excessive data will be discarded.
For the character code table, refer to chapter 12 “CHARACTER CODE TABLE”.
- 70 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(14) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;”. After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01;........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC02;........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC03;........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 1 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
[ESC] PC04;........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC05;........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC06;........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 2 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
Designating the link field No.
[Data Command]
[ESC] RC; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
Link field No. 4
Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1
A
B
ABCD
001
ABCD
001
*ABCD001*
*ABCD001*
- 71 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
(1) The check digit attachment, increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes
are performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions are
improper, no drawing will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero
suppression but the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be
calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be
drawn. If the total bit map font, outline font, and bar code increment/decrement
fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any
excessive field. The field to be incremented or decremented is incremented or
decremented until the Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Example]
1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 001 (+1))
2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 002)
3) Format Command (Increment character string No. 003 (+2))
4) Image Buffer Clear Command
5) Data Command (Character string No. 001 “0001”)
6) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “AB-”)
7) Data Command (Character string No. 003 “0100”)
8) Issue Command (2 labels)
0001
AB - 0100
0002
AB - 0102
9) Issue Command (1 label)
0003
AB - 0104
10) Image Buffer Clear Command
11) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “00000”)
12) Issue Command (1 label)
00000
- 72 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) The Bit Map Font Format Command may be connected to the Outline Font Format
Command when transmitted.
[ESC] P C001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the drawing
data field for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character string
number. Then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character string
number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated. Since
the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same
character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command
should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the
same character string number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command
is sent.)
(5) The link field designation can be cleared by omitting the link field designation
using the same character string No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can also be cleared by the Image Buffer Clear
Command.
(6) A print data string and the link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.
Refer to
Bit Map Font Data Command ([ESC] RC)
Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
Bar Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)
- 73 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
12.5
mm
Effective print area
30.0
mm
S a m p l e
A B C D
55.0
mm
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, A, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 74 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 75 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
12.5
mm
30.0
mm
20.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, W, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, W, 01, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000;
[ESC] RC001;
AB [LF] [NUL]
AB [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 76 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.9 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] PV
Function
Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the outline font is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.
~ Fonts other than TrueType font
Format
Term
c
d
[ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk)
(, lmmmmmmmmmm) (, Znn) (, Po) (=ppp------ppp) [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk)
(, lmmmmmmmmmm) (, Znn) (, Po) (; qq1, qq2, qq3, ------, qq20) [LF] [NUL]
aa:
Character string number
00 to 99
bbbb:
cccc:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd(D): Character width
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
eeee(D): Height of the character
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
f:
Type of font
A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold])
B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold] proportional)
E: Price Font 1
F: Price Font 2
G: Price Font 3
H: DUTCH801 Bold (Times Roman Proportional)
I: BRUSH738 Regular (Pop Proportional)
J: GOTHIC725 Black (Proportional)
ghhh:
Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
hhh: No. of space dots between characters
000 to 512 (in dots)
ii:
Rotational angles of a character and character string
00:
11:
0° (char.)
0° (char.-string)
90° (char.-string)
180° (char.-string)
270° (char.-string)
90° (char.)
22: 180° (char.)
33: 270° (char.)
- 77 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
j:
Character attribution
B:
Black character
W (aabb): Reverse character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the horizontal direction.
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the vertical direction.
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
F (aabb): Boxed character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the
horizontal direction.
bb: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the vertical
direction.
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
C (aa):
Stroked out character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the end of the stroke
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Descriptions in parentheses are omissible.
(If omitted, it is character size (the larger character width or height) ÷ 8 dots.)
Mk:
Type of the check digit to be attached
(Omissible. If omitted, the check digit is not drawn.)
k: Type of check digit
0: Modulus 10
1: Modulus 43
(Draws data and check digit)
(Draws data and check digit)
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws check digit only)
lmmmmmmmmmm: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not
performed.)
l: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
-: Decrement
mmmmmmmmmm: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
Znn:
Zero suppression
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
nn: No. of zeros to be suppressed
00 to 20
- 78 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Po:
Alignment (Omissible. If omitted, the alignment is set to the left.)
o: Designates the character position.
1: Left
2: Center
3: Right
4aaaa: Equal space
aaaa: X direction of character string area
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units) B-SX4
0050 to 1280 (in 0.1 mm units) B-SX5
ppp------ppp: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
qq1, qq2, qq3, ------, qq20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 79 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ TrueType font
Format
[ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, ff, g (, hiii), jj, k (=ppp ------ ppp) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Character string number
00 to 99
bbbb:
cccc:
dddd:
eeee:
ff:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Character width
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
Height of the character
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of font
01: BalloonPExtBol (File name: Ballp_eb.ttf)
02: BlacklightD (File name: Blklt_rg.ttf)
03: BrushScrD (File name: Brush_rg.ttf)
04: CG Times (File name: Tec_cgt.ttf)
05: CG Times Bold (File name: Tec_cgtb.ttf)
06: CG Times Italic (File name: Tec_cgti.ttf)
07: Clarendon Condensed Bold (File name: Tec_clcd.ttf)
08: FlashPBol (File name: Flash_bd.ttf)
09: Garamond Kursiv Halbfett (File name: Tec_gmkh.ttf)
10: GoudyHeaP (File name: Gdyhp_rg.ttf)
11: GilliesGotDBol (File name: Gilli_bd.ttf)
12: GilliesGotLig (File name: Gilli_lt.ttf)
13: NimbusSanNovTUltLigCon (File name: Nsnct_ul.ttf)
14: Ryahd (File name: ryahd.ttf)
15: Ryahd Bold (File name: ryahdbd.ttf)
16: CG Triumvirate (File name: Trium.ttf)
17: CG Triumvirate Condensed Bold (File name: Triumcb.ttf)
18: Univers Medium (File name: Tec_uni.ttf)
19: Univers Bold (File name: Tec_unib.ttf)
20: Univers Medium Italic (File name: Tec_unii.ttf)
21: add_on TrueTypeFont 1 (File name: addttf01.ttf)
22: add_on TrueTypeFont 2 (File name: addttf02.ttf)
23: add_on TrueTypeFont 3 (File name: addttf03.ttf)
24: add_on TrueTypeFont 4 (File name: addttf04.ttf)
25: add_on TrueTypeFont 5 (File name: addttf05.ttf)
(*1) The font types 21 to 25 are the fonts a user adds. These fonts can be
used by specifying “addttf01.ttf” to “addttf05.ttf” for the file names and
installing these in the ATA card.
(*2) For the fonts stored in flash ROM on the CPU board, parameter “ff” for
the type of font corresponds to the font type according to the setting
made when fonts are stored.
- 80 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g:
Drive
Indicates where the TrueType font files are stored.
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Slot 1 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
2: Slot 2 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
* “0” cannot be specified for the font types from 21 to 25.
hiii:
Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
h: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
iii: No. of space dots between characters
000 to 512 (in dots)
jj:
k:
Rotational angles of a character and character string
00:
11:
0° (char.)
0° (char.-string)
90° (char.-string)
180° (char.-string)
270° (char.-string)
90° (char.)
22: 180° (char.)
33: 270° (char.)
Character attribution
B: Black character
ppp------ppp: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
* TrueType fonts are not included in the standard character generator data. Therefore,
they must be installed in flash ROM on the CPU board, or the ATA card.
For installation of TrueType font and details, refer to the TrueType Font Specification
(TAA-1416).
* If Arabic is selected as the character code, letters are written from right to left.
Origin
0° (00)
90° (11)
180° (22)
270° (33)
- 81 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Explanation
(1) Character string number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RV), the format designated by the
character string number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates
Backing paper
Label
Backing
paper
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
Print origin of
coordinates
Sample
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Print origin of
coordinates
Effective
Effective
X
print width
print width
0
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Print direction: Printing top first]
• The print origin of coordinates must be set so the character drawing result will be
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
- 82 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Effective print area]
[mm]
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
Model
Cut
Cut
Rotary cutter
Head-up Head-up
operation operation
Swing
cutter
Rotary cutter
Head-up
operation operation
Swing
cutter
Head-up
Issue mode Batch
Strip
Batch
Strip
Item
not
performed
not
performed
performed
performed
Effective print width
Min.
10.0
10.0
Max.
104.0
128.0
Effective print
length
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
30.0
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
23.0
Label Min.
6.0
8.0
21.4
23.0 6 ips:
6 ips:
30.0
6.0
21.4
23.0 5 ips:
5 ips:
23.0
91.0
87.0
98.0
10 ips: – 10 ips: –
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
1492.0
8 ips:
8 ips:
23.0
Max.
1496.0
1496.0
1492.0
3 ips: 28.0
3 ips: 28.0
23.4 5 ips: 28.0
8 ips: 36.0
Tag Min.
–
–
23.4 6 ips: 28.0
8.0
–
–
10 ips: – (NOTE 1)
1498.0
Max. 1498.0
1498.0
1498.0
NOTE 1: The use of the rotary cutter at 10 ips is not supported for the B-SX4T.
(3) Character width and character height
Char.
height
Char.
height
Char.
width
Standard size
(256 × 256 dots)
Char. width
Char.
height
Char.
width
- 83 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Type of font
A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold])
B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold] proportional)
E: Price font 1 (POP font)
- 84 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F: Price font 2 (POP font)
G: Price font 3 (POP font)
H: DUTCH801 Bold (Times Roman Proportional)
- 85 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I: BRUSH 738 Regular (Pop Proportional)
J: GOTHIC725 Black
(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots
between characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal
spacing/proportional spacing determined for each character. If character-to-
character space is specified, drawing will take place according to the value
obtained by adding the character spacing/proportional spacing to the specified
value. When equal space is selected for the alignment, the character-to-
character space setting is invalid. (The horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
are increased or decreased depending on the character size.)
A B C
A B
- 86 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) Rotational angles of a character and character string
Sample
Origin
0° (00)
90° (11)
180° (22)
270° (33)
(7) Selection of character attribution
No. of dots in the
horizontal direction
No. of dots in the
vertical direction
A B
Black characters
Reverse characters
No. of dots in the
No. of dots in the
horizontal direction
horizontal direction
No. of dots in the
vertical direction
A B
A B
Boxed characters
Stroked out characters
(8) Check digit to be attached
When Modulus 10 or Modulus 43 is selected, the check digit of a data row is
calculated and attached to the data row for drawing. When modulus 10 is
designated and the data includes any data other than the numerals, the data row
will not be drawn. When modulus 43 is designated and the data includes any
character other than CODE39, the drawing is not performed.
When DBP Modulus 10 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated and
only the check digit is drawn. When the data includes any data other than the
numerals, drawing is not performed.
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.
- 87 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented each time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
Initial value
INC/DEC
0000
0000
+10
0000
+10
0000
+10
999999
+1
+10
Not
designated
Zero suppression
5
3
0
3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
000
010
020
030
040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
999999
000
001
002
003
Letters and numerals for increment/decrement
For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are
possible. Only the numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/
decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation
Initial value
INC/DEC
00000
+1
A0A0A
+1
7A8/9
+3
A2A0A
-3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
A0A0A
A0A1A
A0A2A
A0A3A
A0A4A
7A8/9
7A9/2
7A9/5
7A9/8
8A0/1
A2A0A
A1A7A
A1A4A
A1A1A
A0A8A
(10) Zero suppression
0
1
2
2
3
4
5
No. of zeros to be suppressed
Data
Print
0000
0000
0000
0
0000
00
0A12
A12
0123
123
0123
0123
0123
0123
The leading zero(s) in a data row is replaced by a space(s) according to the designated
number of digits. However, if the number of digits to be suppressed is greater than the
data row, the data row will be drawn without zero suppression. Where the data row
exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be drawn.
Character string length in the
X direction (in 0.1 mm units)
(11) Alignment
Origin
Left
Center
Right
E q u a l s p a c e
If characters are not placed on one line when equal space is designated, the width is
calculated automatically. When the width is less than the limit value (2 mm) for the
outline font, the field is not drawn. (The same previous field is not drawn.)
(12) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” Up to 255 digits can be printed. When the number of digits exceeds the maximum
value, the excessive data will be discarded. For the character code table, refer to
chapter 12 “CHARACTER CODE TABLE”.
- 88 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(13) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.” After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PV01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 1 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
[ESC] PV04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 2 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
Designating the link field No.
[Data Command]
[ESC] RV; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
Link field No. 4
Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1
B
A
ABCD
001
ABC
D
*ABCD001*
*ABCD001*
Notes
(1) The check digit attachment, increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes
are performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions are
improper, no drawing will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero
suppression but the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be
drawn. If the total bit map font, outline font, and bar code increment/decrement
fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any
excessive field. The field to be incremented or decremented is incremented or
decremented until the Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
- 89 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Examples]
1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 01 (+1))
2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 02)
3) Format Command (Increment character string No. 03 (+2))
4) Image Buffer Clear Command
5) Data Command (Character string No. 01 “0001”)
6) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “AB-”)
7) Data Command (Character string No. 03 “0100”)
8) Issue Command (2 labels)
0001
AB-0100
0002
AB-0102
9) Issue Command (1 label)
0003
AB-0104
10) Image Buffer Clear Command
11) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “00000”)
12) Issue Command (1 label)
00000
(3) The Outline Font Format Command may be connected to the Bit Map Font Format
Command when transmitted.
[ESC] PC001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
- 90 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the drawing
data field for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character string
number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character string
number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.
Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command
([ESC] C) and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the
same character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the
fields with the same character string number are automatically cleared until the
Clear Command is sent.)
(5) When characters overlap due to the character-to-character space fine adjustment,
the outline font is not painted properly. Program the fine adjustment value so
that characters will not overlap. Also, when drawings such as lines or characters
are on the outline font drawing position, the outline font is not painted properly.
For font types A and B, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other
drawings do not overlap the area in which the outline font is to be drawn. For
font types E, F and G, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other
drawings do not overlap the area for the designated character width and height.
(6) The link field designation can be cleared by omitting the link field designation
using the same character string No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can also be cleared by the Image Buffer Clear
Command.
(7) A print data string and the link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.
Refer to
Outline Font Data Command ([ESC] RV)
Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)
Bar Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)
- 91 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
12.5
mm
Effective print area
30.0
mm
S a m p l e
A B C D
55.0
mm
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV00; 0200, 0300, 0080, 0080, B, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 92 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 93 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.10 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] XB
Function
Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the bar code is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.
~ In the case of WPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, Customer bar code, POSTNET, RM4SCC,
KIX CODE
(WPC is the generic name for bar codes of JAN, EAN and UPC.)
Format
c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)
(= sss ------ sss) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
0: JAN8, EAN8
5: JAN13, EAN13
6: UPC-E
7: EAN13 + 2 digits
8: EAN13 + 5 digits
9: CODE128 (with auto code selection)
A: CODE128 (without auto code selection)
C: CODE93
G: UPC-E + 2 digits
H: UPC-E + 5 digits
I:
EAN8 + 2 digits
J: EAN8 + 5 digits
K: UPC-A
L: UPC-A + 2 digits
M: UPC-A + 5 digits
N: UCC/EAN128
R: Customer bar code (Postal code for Japan)
S: Highest priority customer bar code (Postal code for Japan)
U: POSTNET (Postal code for U.S)
V: RM4SCC (ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE)
(Postal code for U.K)
W: KIX CODE (Postal code for Belgium)
- 94 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e:
Type of check digit
1: Without attaching check digit
2: Check digit check
WPC
Modulus 10
Modulus 47
CODE93
CODE128 PSEUDO 103
3: Check digit auto attachment (1)
WPC
Modulus 10
CODE93
CODE128
UCC/EAN128
Modulus 47
PSEUDO 103
Modulus 10 + Modulus 103
Customer code Special check digit
POSTNET
RM4SCC
Special check digit
Special check digit
4: Check digit auto attachment (2)
WPC
Modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
5: Check digit auto attachment (3)
WPC
Modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
* For the Customer bar code, POSTNET, and RMC4SCC, only “3:
Check digit auto attachment (1)” is effective.
ff:
k:
1-module width
01 to 15 (in dots)
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll:
Height of the bar code
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
For the Customer bar code, POSTNET, RMC4SCC, KIX CODE, the height
of the long bar is specified.
mnnnnnnnnnn: Increment/decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)
m:
Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
ooo:
p:
Length of WPC guard bar
(Omissible. If omitted, the guard bar is not attached.)
000 to 100 (in 0.1 mm units)
Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars
(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)
0: Non-print
1: Print
- 95 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
qq:
No. of zeros to be suppressed
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
00 to 20
sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, it varies depending on the type of bar code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------. tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
* Omissible parameters (such as “Increment/decrement”, “Selection of print or non-
print of numerals under bars” and “No. of zeros to be suppressed”) cannot be set
when the postal code (Customer bar code, POSTNET, RM4SCC, KIX CODE) is
selected.
- 96 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ In the case of MSI, Interleaved 2 of 5, CODE39, NW7, Industrial 2 of 5, MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC
Format
c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)
(=sss------sss) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
1: MSI
2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
3: CODE39 (standard)
4: NW7
B: CODE39 (full ASCII)
O: Industrial 2 of 5
a: MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC
e:
Type of check digit
1: Without attaching check digit
2: Check digit check
CODE39
Modulus 43
MSI
IBM modulus 10
ITF
Modulus 10
Industrial 2 of 5
MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC
Modulus check character
Modulus check character
3: Check digit auto attachment (1)
CODE39
Modulus 43
MSI
IBM modulus 10
ITF
Modulus 10
Industrial 2 of 5
MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC
Modulus check character
Modulus check character
4: Check digit auto attachment (2)
MSI
ITF
IBM modulus 10 + IBM modulus 10
DBP Modulus 10
5: Check digit auto attachment (3)
MSI
IBM modulus 11 + IBM modulus 10
ff:
Narrow bar width
01 to 99 (in dots)
gg:
Narrow space width
01 to 99 (in dots)
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, an element-to-element space is designated.
hh:
Wide bar width
01 to 99 (in dots)
- 97 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ii:
jj:
k:
Wide space width
01 to 99 (in dots)
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, the value is fixed to 00.
Character-to-character space width
01 to 99 (in dots)
* In the case of MSI and ITF, character-to-character space width is set to 00.
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll:
Height of the bar code
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
mnnnnnnnnnn:
Increment/decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not
performed.)
m:
Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
p:
Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars
(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)
0: Non-print
1: Print
qq:
r:
No. of zeros to be suppressed
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
00 to 20
Designates the attachment of start/stop code
(Omissible. If omitted, the start/stop code is automatically attached.)
T: Attachment of start code only
P: Attachment of stop code only
N: Start/stop code unattached
sss------sss:
Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, the number of digits varies depending on
the type of bar code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20:
Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 98 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ In the case of GS1 DataBar
Format
c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh (, ijjjjjjjjjj, kk) (, Sll) (= sss ------ sss) [LF]
[NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh (, ijjjjjjjjjj, kk) (, Sll) (; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20)
[LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
b: GS1 DataBar family
e:
Version (Type of GS1 DataBar)
1: GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/GS1 DataBar Truncated
2: GS1 DataBar Stacked
3: GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
4: GS1 DataBar Limited
5: GS1 DataBar Expanded
6: GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
ff:
g:
1-module width
01 to 15 (in dots)
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
hhhh:
ijjjjjjjjjj:
Height of the bar code
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
In the case of GS1 DataBar Truncated, set a value obtained by multiplying
one module width by 13.
Increment/decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)
i: Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
jjjjjjjjjj: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
kk:
ll:
No. of zeros to be suppressed
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
00 to 20
Segment width (Omissible. When omitted, “04” is specified.)
02 to 22 (Even number only. Specifying an odd number causes a
command error.)
This parameter is effective only for GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked.
(Version (type of GS1 DataBar): 6)
Setting this parameter to ”22” makes the symbol look similar to the GS1
DataBar Expanded.
- 99 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, it varies depending on the type of bar
code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------. tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 100 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ In the case of Data Matrix (Two-dimensional code)
Format
c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn) (= ooo ------ooo)
[LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn)
(; pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
Q: Data Matrix (Two-dimensional code)
ee:
ECC type
00: ECC0
01: ECC50
04: ECC50
05: ECC50
06: ECC80
07: ECC80
08: ECC80
09: ECC100
10: ECC100
11: ECC140
12: ECC140
13: ECC140
14: ECC140
20: ECC200
ff:
1-cell width
00 to 99 (in dots)
gg:
Format ID
01: Format ID 1
02: Format ID 2
03: Format ID 3
04: Format ID 4
05: Format ID 5
06: Format ID 6
* When ECC200 is designated as ECC type, the format ID designation is ignored.
When format ID of 11 through 16 is designated, the selection of ECC200 is
compulsory (to ensure compatibility with the old model).
- 101 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
h:
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Ciiijjj:
No. of cells
(Omissible. If omitted, it is automatically set.)
iii: No. of cells in the X direction 000 to 144
jjj: No. of cells in the Y direction 000 to 144
* Cell setting varies according to the ECC type.
ECC0 to ECC140
ECC200
No. of cells to be
designated
Odd numbers only
Even numbers only
Min./Max. No. of cells
Rectangular code
9 × 9 to 49 × 49
None
10 × 10 to 144 × 144
18 × 8
32 × 8
26 × 12
36 × 12
36 × 16
48 × 16
• When this parameter is omitted, the number of cells is automatically
set. Also, when any data other than the above values are
designated for the number of cells in the X and Y directions, the
number of cells are automatically set.
Jkkllmmmnnn: Connection setting
(Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)
kk:
ll:
Code number
01 to 16
No. of divided codes
02 to 16
mmm: ID number 1
nnn: ID number 2
001 to 254
001 to 254
ooo ------ ooo:
Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2000 digits.
pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20:
Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 102 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ In the case of PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
Format
c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (=jjj------jjj) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
P: PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
ee:
Security level
00: Level 0
01: Level 1
02: Level 2
03: Level 3
04: Level 4
05: Level 5
06: Level 6
07: Level 7
08: Level 8
ff:
1-module width
01 to 10 (in dots)
gg:
h:
No. of columns (strings)
01 to 30
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii:
Bar height
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2,000 digits
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 103 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ In the case of MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
Format
c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (=jjj------jjj) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d:
Type of bar code
X: MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
ee:
Security level
00: Fixed
ff:
1-module width
01 to 10 (in dots)
gg:
h:
No. of columns/rows
00 to 38
Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii:
Bar height
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 366 digits
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 104 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417
Parameter
(gg)
Max. number of digits
for binary mode
Max. number of digits for
upper case letter/space mode
Max. number of digits
for numeric mode
No. of columns No. of rows
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
–
1
2
3
4
–
150
22
43
97
150
3
250
38
366
55
–
–
72
105
237
366
8
–
162
250
6
–
11
14
17
20
24
28
8
7
12
17
1
10
13
18
22
8
18
26
22
32
30
44
38
55
14
20
11
14
17
20
23
26
6
14
21
27
33
38
43
6
24
35
36
52
2
46
67
56
82
64
93
72
105
14
10
8
10
15
20
27
39
54
68
82
97
8
18
26
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
4
26
38
34
49
3
46
67
66
96
90
132
167
202
237
20
114
138
162
14
6
13
20
27
34
45
63
85
106
128
150
22
32
8
34
49
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
46
67
58
85
4
76
111
155
208
261
313
366
106
142
178
214
250
“–” for parameter 00 to 04 indicates the numbers of columns/rows which are automatically set by the
printer. In this case, the pattern which has a smaller number of code words is automatically selected.
When the numbers of code words is equal, the smaller number of columns are selected.
- 105 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ In the case of QR code (Two-dimensional code)
Format
c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (= nnn --- nnn) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (; oo1, oo2, oo3 ------ oo20)
[LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
T: QR code (Two-dimensional code)
e:
Designation of error correction level
L: High density level
M: Standard level
Q: Reliability level
H: High reliability level
ff:
g:
1-cell width
00 to 52 (in dots)
Selection of mode
M: Manual mode
A: Automatic mode
h:
Rotational angle of the bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Mi:
Kj:
Selection of model
(Omissible. If omitted, Model 1 is automatically selected.)
i = 1: Model 1
2: Model 2
Mask number
(Omissible. If omitted, the number is automatically set.)
j = 0 to 7: Mask number 0 to 7
8:
Jkkllmm: Connection setting
(Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)
kk = 01 to 16: Value indicating which divided code is connected.
ll = 01 to 16: Number of divided codes
No mask
mm = 00 to FF: A value for all data to be printed, to which XOR is applied
in units of bytes (Not divided)
nnn --- nnn: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2000 digits
oo1 --- oo20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 digits can be designated using commas.
- 106 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ In the case of MaxiCode Code (Two-dimensional code)
Format
Term
c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d (, e) (, Jffgg) (, Zh) [LF] [NUL]
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
Z: MaxiCode (Two-dimensional code)
e:
Mode selection (Omissible)
• When the MaxiCode specification setting is set to “TYPE1: Compatible with
the current version” in the system mode.
Omitted: Mode 2
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
Mode 2
Mode 4
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 2
Mode 6
Mode 2
Mode 2
Mode 2
• When the MaxiCode specification setting is set to “TYPE2: Special
specification” in the system mode.
Omitted: Mode 2 or Mode 3(*)
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
Mode 2 or Mode 3(*)
Mode 4
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Mode 2 or Mode 3 (*)
Mode 6
Mode 2 or Mode 3 (*)
Mode 2 or MODE 3 (*)
Mode 2 or MODE 3 (*)
*: Mode 2 or Mode 3 should be determined depending on the country
code of the data command. When the country code is 840, Mode 2
should be selected. For other codes than 840, Mode 3 should be
selected.
Jffgg:
Zh:
Connection setting (Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)
ff: Code number
gg: No. of divided codes
01 to 08
01 to 08
Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
(Omissible. If omitted, they are not attached.)
h= 0: No attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
1: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
2: Attachment of Zipper block
3: Attachment of Contrast block
- 107 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ In the case of CP code (Two-dimensional code)
Format
c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Ciijj) (= kkkk --- kkk) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Ciijj) (; ll1, ll2, ll3, --- ll20) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
Y: CP code (Two-dimensional code)
e:
Designation of ECC (Error Correction Code) level
0: No designation
1: 10%
2: 20%
3: 30%
4: 40%
5: 50%
Only when the number of code characters are specified, can “0” (No
designation) be selected. If “0 (No designation)” is selected without
specifying the number of code characters, the CP code is not printed.
When the number of code characters are specified, blank code areas
created after the characters are encoded should all be filled with ECC
characters.
ff:
g:
1-cell width
00 to 99 (in dots)
No. of character bits
0: Set automatically
A: 8 bits
Designates how many bits are used for representing a character.
When “0” is designated, the optimal value is automatically set, according to
data.
h:
Rotational angle of the bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Ciijj:
No. of code characters
(Set automatically when the designation is omitted.)
ii =No. of characters in the X direction: 03 to 22
jj =No. of characters in the Y direction: 02 to 22
“Character” is a unit for code for encoding the CP code.
1 character occupies a 3×3 square block.
When a value for “jj” larger than “ii” is set, an error occurs.
The number of cells for the code is as follows.
(No. of characters × 3 +2)
kkkk --- kkk: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 473 digits
ll1, ll2, ll3, --- ll20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 digits can be designated using commas.
- 108 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ In the case of RFID (Data write)
Function
Writes a specified data onto an RFID tag. When the feed amount has been set by the
RFID Tag Position Adjustment Command ([ESC] @003) for adjusting an RFID tag
position, the specified amount of the media is fed forward or backward before writing
data.
Format
c [ESC]XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d (,Aeee) (,Mg) (,Ph) (,Fi) (,Tff) (,Djj) (,Gk) (,Cl) (,Smmmm)
(,Ennnn) (,Roooooooo) (,Kpppppppp) (,Lqq) (,Jrrrrrrrr) (,Vs) (,Btt) (,uvvvvvvvvvv)
(,Hxyyyyyyyy· · ·) (,Qzabcdef· · ·) (,Xghhhhhhhh· · ·) (=www------www)[LF][NUL]
d [ESC]XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d (,Aeee) (,Mg) (,Ph) (,Fi) (,Tff) (,Djj) (,Gk) (,Cl) (,Smmmm)
(,Ennnn) (,Roooooooo) (,Kpppppppp) (,Lqq) (,Jrrrrrrrr) (,Vs) (,Btt) (,uvvvvvvvvvv)
(,Hxyyyyyyyy· · ·) (,Qzabcdef· · ·) (,Xghhhhhhhh· · ·) (;ww1,ww2,ww3,-----,ww20) [LF]
[NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Parameter not referred to
Fixed to 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Parameter not referred to
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
r: RFID (data write)
Aeee:
Address where the data is written (Omissible)
000 to 999
Designates the address where data starts to be written.
When omitted, this parameter will be set to 18 for ISO18000-6B tag, or 0 for
other tag types.
Mg:
Format of U-Code V1.19 (Omissible)
0: SGTIN 96 format
1: SSCC96 format
2: (Reserved)
When the format of U-Code V1.19 is designated, the specified address,
where the data is written, will become invalid. This parameter is effective
only when the tag type is ISO18000-6B.
When omitted, the U-Code V1.19 format is not used.
When 2: (Reserved) is selected, operations are not guaranteed.
Ph:
Fi:
Partition number (Omissible)
0 to 6
This parameter is effective only when U-Code V1.19 or EPC format is
designated. When omitted, 5 will be set.
Filter number (Omissible)
0 to 7
This parameter is effective only when U-Code V1.19 or EPC format is
designated. When omitted, 0 will be set.
Tff:
Tag type (Omissible)
00: None
11: I-Code
12: Tag-it
13: C220
14: ISO15693
- 109 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15: C210
16: C240
17: C320
21: EPC Class 0
22: EPC Class 1
23: ISO 18000-6B
24: EPC Class 1 Generation 2
Designates the type of RFID tag onto which data is to be written.
When omitted, the tag type set in the system mode will be designated.
In accordance with the tag type designated by this setting, the tag type set in
the system mode changes.
When “00: NONE” is designated, the backed up tag type will be designated,
and the system mode setting will not be changed.
Dii:
EPC format (Omissible)
00: No format (When omitted)
10: GID-96
11: SGTIN-64
12: SGTIN-96
13: SSCC-64
14: SSCC-96
15: SGLN-64
16: SGLN-96
17: GRAI-64
18: GRAI-96
19: GIAI-64
20: GIAI-96
21: DoD-64
22: DoD-96
23:SGTIN-198
24:SGLN-195
25:GRAI-170
26:GIAI-202
Gk: Data type (Omissible)
0: No conversion of data (When omitted)
1: Conversion to binary
2: Conversion to hexadecimal
3: No conversion of data (with separator)
4: Conversion to binary (with separator)
5: Conversion to hexadecimal (with separator)
When a separator is to be used, use a colon “:” (3AH) a separator between
the blocks in the data.
For example:
RB00;UII Code0123:TIDx0123:0000:1111:2222:3333:4444:5555 for the
following data:
UII="UII Code0123", TID="TIDx0123", User Data ="0000", U1 Data ="1111",
U2 Data ="2222", U3 data = “3333”, U4 Data = “4444”, and U5 Data =
“5555”
Cl:
On-the-fly issue (Omissible)
0: Disabled. (On-the-fly issue is not performed. (When omitted))
1: Enabled. (On-the-fly issue is performed.)
• When “1: Enabled” is designated, writing data onto an RFID tag and printing
are performed at the same time.
• The positions where RFID data write is started and ended during printing
- 110 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
can be designated by the parameters of RFID data write start point
designation for on-the-fly issue and RFID data write end point designation
for on-the-fly issue, respectively.
Smmmm: RFID data write start point designation for on-the-fly issue (Omissible)
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units) When omitted, 0 mm will be designated.
Ennnn:
RFID data write end point designation for on-the-fly issue (Omissible)
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units) When omitted, 75.5 mm (which is equals to
the distance between the print head and the media sensor) will be
designated.
Roooooooo: Access password setting (Omissible)
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
Sets a password to access tags.
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type.
Kpppppppp: Kill password setting (Omissible)
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
Sets a kill password for tags.
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type.
Lqq: Lock/unlock setting (Omissible)
Access
password
Kill password
EPC code
TID
User data
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
- 111 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33 Permanent lock
34 Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
35 Permanent lock Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
36
37 Permanent lock
38 Unlocked
39 Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
40
41 Permanent lock
42 Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
43 Permanent lock Permanent lock
44
45 Permanent lock
46 Unlocked
47 Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
48
49 Permanent lock
50 Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
51 Permanent lock Permanent lock
52
53 Permanent lock
54 Unlocked
55 Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock
56
57 Permanent lock
58 Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock
59 Permanent lock Permanent lock
60
61 Permanent lock
62 Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
63 Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
64 Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Designates the areas to be locked. When omitted, no areas are locked.
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type.
Jrrrrrrrr: Access to the password-protected tags (Omissible)
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
Accesses the password-protected tags.
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class1 Generation 2 tag type.
Vs:
Write data verify designation (Omissible)
0: Verification disabled (When omitted)
1: Verification enabled
This parameter verifies if data has been written successfully. Select “1”
(Verification enabled) for tags which may generate a phenomenon that the
written data may not be the same as actual data even when an issue has
successfully completed. When “1” is selected, it takes more time than
when “0” (Verification disabled) is selected.
Btt:
Designates the area where the data is written (Omissible)
00: Bank0 (Reserved area)
01: Bank1 (EPC area) (When omitted)
02: Bank2 (TID area)
03: Bank3 (User area)
04: Bank4 (User block 1)
05: Bank5 (User block 2)
(Effective only when the Hibiki tag is
used for the B-SX704-RFID-U2-R.)
06: Bank6 (User block 3)
07: Bank7 (User block 4)
08: Bank8 (User block 5)
- 112 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class1 Generation 2 tag type.
When a format is designated, this parameter is ignored.
When the RFID module type is the U1, the EPC area and user area are
effective.
Hxyyyyyyyy: User block password setting (Effective only when the Hibiki tag is used
for the B-SX704-RFID-U2-R.)
Designates a password to lock certain user blocks.
Up to five user blocks can be specified continuously.
For example: H4AABBCCDD,H5BBCCDDEE,H6CCDDEEFF
x: Designates a user area bank (4 to 8)
4: Bank4 (User block 1)
5: Bank5 (User block 2)
6: Bank6 (User block 3)
7: Bank7 (User block 4)
8: Bank8 (User block 5)
yyyyyyyy: User block password
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
Qzabcdef: Area lock designation (Effective only when the Hibiki tag is used for the B-
SX704-RFID-U2-R.)
Designates an area lock type.
Area lock type can be specified for up to eight areas continuously.
For example: Q1100000,Q4101010,Q5100010, which indicates:
Bank1:Read lock, Bank4:Read lock, Write lock, Password read/write lock
Bank5:Read lock, Password read/write lock
z: Area bank designation (1 to 8)
1: Bank1 (EPC/UII bank)
2: Bank2 (TID bank)
3: Bank3 (User area)
4: Bank4 (User block 1)
5: Bank5 (User block 2)
6: Bank6 (User block 3)
7: Bank7 (User block 4)
8: Bank8 (User block 5)
a: Read lock designation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
b: Read permanent lock designation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
c: Write lock designation (Effective to Bank4 to Bank8 only)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
d: Write permanent lock designation (Effective to Bank4 to Bank8 only)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
e: User block password read/write lock designation (Effective to Bank4 to
Bank8 only)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
- 113 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f: User block password read/write permanent lock designation (Effective to
Bank4 to Bank8 only)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NOTES:
1. Once a permanent lock is enabled for parameter b, d, or f, any
subsequent change is disabled.
2. When read/write permanent lock is selected, a read/write lock state is
retained. To permanently prohibit reading/writing a tag, enable both
the read/write lock and the read/write permanent lock. The setting
which disables read/write lock and enables read/write permanent lock
allows the tag to be read/written permanently.
Xghhhhhhhh: User block access password execution setting (Effective only when the
Hibiki tag is used for the B-SX704-RFID-U2-R.)
Designates a password to access and write a tag of which user block is
write-locked.
Up to five user blocks can be specified continuously.
For example: X4AABBCCDD,X5BBCCDDEE,X6CCDDEEFF
g: Designates a user area bank. (4 to 8)
4: Bank4 (User block 1)
5: Bank5 (User block 2)
6: Bank6 (User block 3)
7: Bank7 (User block 4)
8: Bank8 (User block 5)
hhhhhhhh: User block access password
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
uvvvvvvvvvv: Increment/Decrement
(Omissible. When omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)
u: Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+:
-:
Increment
Decrement
vvvvvvvvvv: Skip value (10 digits)
0000000000 to 9999999999
www---www: Print data string (Omissible)
Max. 512 digits, but the number of digits to be written is different depending
on the tag types.
ww1,ww2,ww3,-----,ww20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
- 114 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ In the case of RFID (Data read)
Function
Reads an RFID tag which is positioned above the antenna. When the feed amount
has been set by the RFID Tag Position Adjustment Command ([ESC] @003) for
adjusting an RFID tag position, the specified amount of the media is fed forward or
backward before reading the RFID data. The read RFID data is transmitted included
in an RFID read terminate status after printing is completed.
Format
Term
c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc,d (,Neeee) (,Afff) (,Tgg) (,Ih) (,Jiiiiiiii) (,Xjkkkkkkkk · · ·) [LF]
[NUL]
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbbb:
cccc:
d:
Parameter not referred to
Fixed to 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Parameter not referred to
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
Type of bar code
r: RFID (data read)
Neee:
Number of bytes to be read (Omissible)
0001 to 4096
When omitted, the number of bytes specified for the tag type being used will
be designated.
Afff:
Address where the data is read (Omissible)
000 to 999
Designates the address where data starts to be read.
When omitted, this parameter will be set to 18 for ISO18000-6B tag, or 0 for
other tag types.
Tgg:
Tag type (Omissible)
00: None
11: I-Code
12: Tag-it
13: C220
14: ISO15693
15: C210
16: C240
17: C320
21: EPC Class 0
22: EPC Class 1
23: ISO 18000-6B
24: EPC Class 1 Generation 2
Designates the type of RFID tag from which data is to be read.
When omitted, the tag type set in the system mode will be designated.
In accordance with the tag type designated by this setting, the tag type set in
the system mode changes.
When “00: NONE” is designated, the backed up tag type will be designated,
and the system mode setting will not be changed.
- 115 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ih:
RFID read mode (Omissible)
1: Only user data is read.
2: Only tag ID is read.
3: Both tag ID and user data are read.
When omitted, only user data will be read.
When the tag type is Gen2, user data equals to TID bank + user bank,
and tag ID equals to EPC bank.
Jiiiiiiii:
Access to the password-protected tags (Omissible)
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
Accesses the password-protected tags.
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type.
Xjkkkkkkkk: User block access password execution setting (Effective only when the
Hibiki tag is used for the B-SX704-RFID-U2-R.)
Designates a password to access and read a tag of which user block is
read-locked.
Up to five user blocks can be specified continuously.
For example: X4AABBCCDD,X5BBCCDDEE,X6CCDDEEFF
j: Designates a user area bank. (4 to 8)
4: Bank4 (User block 1)
5: Bank5 (User block 2)
6: Bank6 (User block 3)
7: Bank7 (User block 4)
8: Bank8 (User block 5)
kkkkkkkk: User block access password
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
- 116 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Explanation
(1) The parameter, “Number of bytes to be read”, is effective only when RFID read
mode is set to 1 or 3, as this parameter is intended for reading user data. When
reading tag ID, this parameter is ignored.
(2) When the value exceeding the maximum number of bytes storable in a tag is
designated for “Number of bytes to be read”, a read error results.
(3) With RFID (data read) being specified by this command, when an RFID data read
failed, the printer will retry to read data after sending a void pattern printing end
status (60H) or result in an error and stop after sending an RFID write error status
(61H).
SOH
STX
01H
02H
34H
32H
Indicates the start of the status block
Printer status
Status
Status type
34H Indicates the end of an RFID read and issue.
3XH
Remaining
count
3XH
Remaining issue count
3XH
3XH
30H30H: RFID read failed.
31H31H: I-Code
31H32H: Tag-it
XXH
31H33H: C220
31H34H: ISO15693
31H35H: C210
31H36H: C240
31H37H: C320
Tag type
32H31H: EPC Class 0
XXH
32H32H: EPC Class 1
32H33H: ISO18000-6B
32H34H: EPC Class 1 Generation 2
XXH
Length
RFID data length
XXH
XXH
XXH
:
:
Tag ID + User data
RFID data
* Data to be read is different depending on the RFID
read mode setting.
XXH
XXH
03H
ETX
EOT
CR
04H
Indicates the end of the status block.
0DH
LF
0AH
(4) When an access password is designated using this command, writing data onto a
tag cannot be performed if the access password registered in the tag differs from
the access password designated. However, reading data can be performed.
(If the tag is the Hibiki tag and read lock is set, reading the tag is also disabled.)
- 117 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Explanation
(1) Bar code number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the
bar code number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates
Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
Label
Print origin of
coordinates
Effective
print
Effective
print
Print origin of
coordinates
length
length
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
X
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
0
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Print direction: Printing top first]
The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the bar code drawing result will be
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
Cut
Cut
Rotary cutter
Head-up Head-up
operation operation
Swing
cutter
Rotary cutter
Head-up
operation operation
Swing
cutter
Head-up
Issue mode Batch
Strip
Batch
Strip
Item
not
performed
not
performed
performed
performed
Effective print width
Min.
10.0
10.0
Max.
104.0
128.0
Effective print
length
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
30.0
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
23.0
Label Min.
6.0
8.0
21.4
23.0 6 ips:
6 ips:
30.0
6.0
21.4
23.0 5 ips:
5 ips:
23.0
91.0
87.0
10 ips: – 10 ips: –
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
1492.0
8 ips:
8 ips:
23.0
98.0
Max.
1496.0
1496.0
1492.0
3 ips: 28.0
3 ips: 28.0
23.4 5 ips: 28.0
8 ips: 36.0
Tag Min.
–
–
23.4 6 ips: 28.0
8.0
–
–
10 ips: – (NOTE 1)
1498.0
Max. 1498.0
1498.0
1498.0
NOTE 1: The use of the rotary cutter at 10 ips is not supported for the B-SX4T.
- 118 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Type of bar code
0: JAN8, EAN8
1: MSI
2: Interleaved 2 of 5
3: CODE39 (standard)
5: JAN13, EAN13
7: EAN13 + 2 digits
9: A: CODE128
C: CODE93
4: NW7
6: UPC-E
8: EAN13 +5 digits
B: CODE39 (Full ASCII)
G: UPC-E + 2 digits
I: EAN8 + 2 digits
K: UPC-A
H: UPC-E + 5 digits
J: EAN8 + 5 digits
L: UPC-A + 2 digits
- 119 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M: UPC-A + 5 digits
O: Industrial 2 of 5
Q: Data Matrix
N: UCC/EAN128
P: PDF417
R: Customer bar code
S: Highest priority customer bar code
T: QR code
V: RM4SCC
U: POSTNET
W: KIX code
Y: CP Code
X: MicroPDF417
Z: MaxiCode
- 120 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b: GS1 DataBar family
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
(4) Type of check digit
c Where no check digit is attached, the bar code of the data row will be drawn.
d In the case of the check digit check, if each check digit checked according to
the type of bar code is normal, the bar code will be drawn. If the check digit
not meeting the requirement is designated, the bar code will not be drawn.
e In the case of the check digit auto attachment, each check digit is attached
according to the type of bar code and the bar code is drawn.
f If the type of bar code is CODE93, CODE128 (with auto code selection), or
UCC/EAN128, the check digit will always be attached regardless of the
designation of the type of check digit.
g If the type of bar code is JAN, EAN, or UPC, the designation of no check digit
attachment automatically assumes the check digit check.
h DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.
(5) Bar width, space width, and character-to-character space
Designate the bar, space, and character-to-character space widths according to
the type of bar code. Note that the designated proper value differs according to
the rotational angle of bar code, type, number of digits, print speed, paper used,
etc. Examples of such designations are listed below. (1 dot = 1/12 mm)
In the case of JAN, EAN, UPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, PDF417, or
MicroPDF417, a 2 to 6-module width is automatically calculated when a 1-module
width is designated.
- 121 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Example of setting]
B-SX4T:
Type of bar code 1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
JAN, EAN, UPC
CODE93
3
2
2
2
2
6
4
4
4
4
9
6
6
6
6
12
8
-
-
-
-
8
-
-
CODE128, EAN128
PDF417
8
10
10
12
12
MicroPDF417
8
Type of bar code
Narrow
Wide
Character-to-character
Bar Space Bar Space
space
MSI
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
0
6
0
0
2
2
2
2
ITF
CODE39
NW7
Industrial 2 of 5
MATRIX 2 of 5
B-SX5T:
Type of bar code 1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
JAN, EAN, UPC
CODE93
4
3
3
3
2
8
6
6
6
4
12
9
16
12
12
12
8
-
-
-
-
9
-
-
CODE128, EAN128
PDF417
9
15
10
18
12
MicroPDF417
6
Type of bar code
Narrow
Wide
Character-to-character
Bar Space Bar Space
space
MSI
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
0
8
0
0
3
3
3
3
ITF
CODE39
NW7
Industrial 2 of 5
MATRIX 2 of 5
When NW7 is used, transmission of the space character assumes the space of (narrow
space ×12) dots. In this case, the space is max. 255 dots.
In the case of Data Matrix or CP code
1-cell width
When 1-cell width is 00 for the Data Matrix
or CP code, a two-dimensional code is not
1-cell width = 3
drawn.
However, the two-dimensional
code printed on the previous label is
cleared.
- 122 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the case of QR code
1-cell width
1-cell width
When the 1-cell width is 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the bar
code printed on the previous label is cleared.
In the case of a postal code
1-module width
(6) Rotational angle of bar code
Point of origin
0°
90°
180°
270°
Point of origin
0°
90°
180°
270°
- 123 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) Bar code height
Height
Height
[PDF417, MicroPDF417]
Height
Height
[Postal code]
Height
[GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/GS1 DataBar Truncated]
Height
[GS1 DataBar Stacked]
Height (The height of the bottom row is 7/5 of the specified height.)
[GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional]
Height (The height of the bottom row is the same as the specified height.)
- 124 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[GS1 DataBar Limited]
Height
[GS1 DataBar Expanded]
Height
When the bar code height is 0000, bar code (including guard bars) and numerals
under bars are not drawn. However, the bar code printed on the previous label is
cleared.
(8) Length of guard bar
The length of guard bar is valid only when the type of bar code is WPC.
It is ignored in all other cases.
Height of bar code
Length of guard bar
(9) Numerals under bars
Numerals are/are not provided under bars according to the parameter for
print/non print of numerals under bars. The contents of numerals under bars to
be printed vary according to the type of bar code. The character set of numerals
under bars is OCR-B. Such numerals are enlarged or reduced only horizontally
according to the width of the bar code. They are drawn vertically in the fixed one
magnification.
[Drawing positions of numerals under bars]
c In the case of JAN and EAN
(Example) EAN13 + 2 digits
(Example) EAN8
- 125 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d In the case of UPC
(Example) UPC-A + 2 digits
(Example) UPC-E
e In the case of bar codes other than JAN, EAN, and UPC
(Example) CODE39
(Example) UCC/EAN128
(10) Start/Stop Code
y This parameter is valid only when the type of bar code is CODE39 and NW7.
y Where the parameter is designated, the program will not check if the stop code and the
start code are attached to the print data to be sent.
y When the parameter is omitted in the case of CODE39 and NW7, a start/stop code will
be attached. The code to be added is “*” in the case of CODE39, and “a” in the case
of NW7.
y For details, refer to chapter 15 “AUTOMATIC ADDING OF START/STOP CODES”.
- 126 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(11) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
When CODE128 (without auto code selection) is used, the number of the start code
(code A, code B, and code C) digits is regarded as 2.
Initial value
INC/DEC
0000
0000
+10
0000
+10
0000
+10
999999
+1
+10
Not
designated
Zero suppression
5
3
0
3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
000
010
020
030
040
0000
0010
0020
0030
0040
999999
000
001
002
003
Letters and numerals for increment/decrement
For CODE39 (standard), CODE39 (full ASCII), NW-7, CODE93, CODE128, if a data
string other than numerals are included in the data, increment/decrement is
performed. If any code which does not exist in each bar code table is contained in
the data, increment/decrement is not performed.
Up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are possible. Only the
numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/decrementing, and then are
returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation
Initial value
INC/DEC
00000
+1
A0A0A
+1
7A8/9
+3
A2A0A
-3
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
A0A0A
A0A1A
A0A2A
A0A3A
A0A4A
7A8/9
7A9/2
7A9/5
7A9/8
8A0/1
A2A0A
A1A7A
A1A4A
A1A1A
A0A8A
Example of increment/decrement of data including the special codes of CODE128
Increment/decrement calculation starts from the last digit in the data strings. When
the data string to be calculated is numeric, and the next (upper) digit is “>”, the data is
a special code (shown with underline below). The next digit is calculated without
incrementing/decrementing these two digits.
Example of increment/decrement calculation of CODE128
Initial value
INC/DEC
00000
+1
00>08
+1
0A>08
+1
0A9>08
+1
1st label
2nd label
3rd label
4th label
5th label
00000
00001
00002
00003
00004
00>08
00>09
01>00
01>01
01>02
0A>08
0A>09
1A>00
1A>01
1A>02
0A9>08
0A9>09
1A0>00
1A0>01
1A0>02
- 127 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(12) Zero suppression
0
1
2
2
3
4
5
No. of zeros to be suppressed
Data
Print
0000
0000
0000
0
0000
00
0A12
A12
0123
123
0123
0123
0123
0123
The leading zero(s) in a data row is replaced by a space(s) according to the designated
number of digits. However, if the number of digits to be suppressed is greater than the
data row, the data row will be drawn without zero suppression. Where the data row
exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be drawn.
When the print data including start/stop codes are sent to sending print data, the
start/stop codes are also counted as a digit each. When the bar code type is JAN, EAN,
UPC, or UCC/EAN 128, the data will be drawn without zero suppression.
(13) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed varies according to the types of bar
codes. For codes, refer chapter 13 “BAR CODE TABLE”.
(14) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.” After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data string are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01;........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC02;........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC03;........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 1 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
[ESC] PC04;........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC05;........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC06;........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL]
: Link field No. 2 is designated.
: Link field No. 3 is designated.
: Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02;................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.
Designating the link field No.
- 128 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
Link field No. 4
Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1
A
B
ABCD
001
ABCD
001
*ABCD001*
*ABCD001*
(15) Explanation for Data Matrix
c ECC type
Data Matrix contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correction code (ECC) and restore normal data. Since there are several ECCs.
ECC should be designated according to usage. The general correction ability is as
follows. However, it may vary according to the error conditions.
ECC type
Error Correction Ability
Low
Overhead by ECC
ECC0
0%
25%
ECC50
ECC80
ECC100
ECC140
ECC200
33%
50%
High
75%
Approx. 30%
d Format ID
Data Matrix can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji. Since
data compression rate varies according to codes, a code to be used is designated
using the format ID.
Format ID
Code
Details
1
2
3
4
5
6
Numerics
Letters
0 to 9 space
A to Z space
Alphanumerics, symbols
Alphanumerics
ASCII (7 bit)
0 to 9 A to Z space
0 to 9 A to Z space
00H to 7FH
.
,
-
/
ISO (8 bit)
00H to FFH (Kanji)
- 129 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e Maximum number of digits
The maximum number of digits varies according to the ECC type or format ID.
Since each Kanji character uses 2 bytes, the maximum number of digits for it
becomes half of the following values.
ECC0
500
452
394
413
310
271
ECC50
457
ECC80
402
ECC100
300
ECC140
144
105
91
Format ID 1
Format ID 2
Format ID 3
Format ID 4
Format ID 5
Format ID 6
333
293
218
291
256
190
305
268
200
96
228
201
150
72
200
176
131
63
Numeric
2000
Alphanumeric
2000
8 bit
1556
ECC200
For the maximum number of digits in cell units, see the next page.
f Connection setting
The connection setting is used to comprise data with a set of two-dimensional codes
when the data cannot be expressed with a two-dimensional code. When three two-
dimensional codes are used to comprise data, identification information of 1/3, 2/3,
and 3/3 is inserted into each two-dimensional code. The ID number is programmed
to include a proper combination of two-dimensional codes when one label contains
plural connecting symbols. For example, when there are two kinds of data
containing identification information for 1/2 and 2/2 in the same label, combination of
two-dimensional codes is unclear. By adding the ID number, the combination is
made clearer.
- 130 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cell size and the effective data capacity
ECC000
ECC050
ECC080
ECC100
ECC140
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Symbol size
Row Col
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
9
9
3
2
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
11 11 12
13 13 24
15 15 37
17 17 53
19 19 72
21 21 92
23 23 115
25 25 140
8
5
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
16
25
35
48
61
76
93
10
16
23
31
40
50
61
10
20
32
46
61
78
97
6
4
4
3
2
1
1
–
–
–
–
13
21
30
41
52
65
78
93
9
13
24
36
50
65
82
9
6
8
5
3
–
–
–
14
20
27
34
42
16
24
33
43
54
67
80
94
10
16
22
28
36
44
52
16
25
36
47
60
73
88
11
17
24
31
40
49
59
69
81
93
7
2
1
1
11
15
20
26
32
38
45
53
61
69
78
88
6
4
3
12
17
24
30
38
46
54
64
73
84
94
8
5
11
16
20
25
30
36
42
49
56
63
70
78
87
96
7
10
13
16
20
24
28
32
36
41
46
51
57
63
27 27 168 112
29 29 197 131
73 118
86 140
51 100
61 120
72 141
31 31 229 153 100 164 109
33 33 264 176 115 190 126
35 35 300 200 131 217 145
62 104
72 121
82 140
83 164 109
95 188 125
37 37 339 226 148 246 164 108 214 143
94 159 106
39 39 380 253 166 277 185 121 242 161 106 180 120
41 41 424 282 185 310 206 135 270 180 118 201 134
43 43 469 313 205 344 229 150 301 201 132 224 149
98 106
45 45 500 345 226 380 253 166 333 222 146 248 165 108 118
47 47 500 378 248 418 278 183 366 244 160 273 182 119 130
49 49 500 413 271 457 305 200 402 268 176 300 200 131 144
- 131 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Symbol size
capacity
capacity
Row Col
10 10
6
3
1
12 12 10
14 14 16
16 16 24
18 18 36
20 20 44
22 22 60
24 24 72
26 26 88
32 32 124
6
3
10
16
25
31
43
52
64
91
6
10
16
20
28
34
42
60
84
36 36 172 127
40 40 228 169 112
44 44 288 214 142
48 48 348 259 172
52 52 408 304 202
64 64 560 418 278
72 72 736 550 366
80 80 912 682 454
88 88 1152 862 574
96 96 1392 1042 694
104 104 1632 1222 814
120 120 2000 1573 1048
132 132 2000 1954 1302
144 144 2000 2000 1556
Rectangular code
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum
8-bit
byte
Symbol size
capacity
capacity
capacity
Row Col
8
8
18 10
32 20
6
3
13
22
31
46
72
8
12 26 32
12 36 44
16 36 64
16 48 98
14
20
30
47
- 132 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(16) Explanation for the PDF417 and MicroPDF417
c Security level
The PDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correcting code word and restore normal data. The security level should be
designated according to usage to perform the error correction function.
For the MicroPDF417, the printer sets the security level automatically.
No. of error correction
Security level
Error Correction Ability
code words
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
Level 7
Level 8
0
2
6
14
30
62
126
254
510
Low
High
d No. of columns (strings)
The number of rows are variable in the PDF417. The row length (No. of data strings)
is also variable. Therefore, a symbol can be created in a form that can be easily
printed, by changing the proportion of the height and width.
The number of columns (data strings) is varied between 1 and 30.
If the number of columns is too small when th data amount is large and the security
level is high, drawing may not be performed. This is because the number of rows
exceeds 90 when the number of columns becomes small. (When the PDF417 is
used, the number of rows of symbols is limited from 3 to 90.)
For the MicroPDF417, not only the number of columns (data strings) but also the
number of rows (data lines) can be designated. When these are to be designated,
see the table on page 100. Note that the max. number of digits for the set parameter
(gg) varies according to the character type. If data over the max. number of digits for
the set parameter (gg) is set, the bar code is not printed. The number of columns
(data strings) is varied from 1 to 4.
However, the max. number of lines, which is 44, depends on the number of columns.
(17) Explanation for QR code
c Error correction level
The QR code contains functions to detect and correct an error. If one of the data
characters is damaged, the information can be restored when this code is read.
There are 4 levels that can be designated. The level should be specified according
to usage. The general correction ability is as follows.
Overhead by correcting
Level
Error correction ability
Low
an error
High density level
Standard level
7%
15%
25%
30%
Reliability level
High reliability level
High
- 133 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d 1-cell width
1-cell width
1-cell width
When the 1-cell width is 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the two-
dimensional code printed on the previous label is cleared.
e Selection of mode
All codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji can be used in one QR code.
Manual mode or automatic mode can be selected to perform the operation.
f Selection of model
Model 1: Original specification
Model 2: Extended specification which enhances the function of position correction
and can contain a large amount of data.
g Mask number
To be sure the QR code is read, it is preferable that white and black modules are
arranged in this symbol in a balanced manner. This prevents the bit pattern
“1011101”, which is characteristically seen in the position detecting pattern, from
appearing in the symbol as much as possible.
The mask number is 0 to 7. The pattern is determined by placing each masking
pattern for the mask number upon the module pattern. When the mask number is set
to 8, masking is not performed. When the parameter is omitted, the most appropriate
mask number is automatically selected to perform masking.
h Connection setting
For QR code, data can be divided into several codes. Even though there is only a
narrow print space, the code can be entered in the space by dividing the code. The
data can be divided into a max. of 16 codes. Parity data is obtained by XORing all
input data in units of bytes before dividing. The input data is calculated based on
shift JIS for Kanji, or on JIS 8 for others. Examples are shown below:
“0123456789
” is divided into “0123”, “4567”, and “89
”.
Code No. 1
Code No. 2
Code No. 3
No. of divided codes: 3
Parity data: 84
Parity data: 84
Parity data: 84
Data “0123”
Data “4567”
Data “89
No. of divided codes: 3
No. of divided codes: 3
”
* The parity data is the XORed value for “0123456789
”.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 93 FA 96 7B
=
85
(18) Explanation for MaxiCode
c Connection setting
For MaxiCode, data can be divided into a max. of 8 codes.
- 134 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(19) Explanation for CP code
c ECC (Error Correction Code) level
The CP code contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correcting code word and restore normal data. The error correction level should be
selected according to usage to perform the error correction function.
The higher the percentage of the error correcting code word is, the higher the error
correcting ability is.
For the CP code, the program is designed so that all remaining areas are used for
correcting errors when the number of code characters is specified by a user. When
the number of code characters is specified, “0” (No designation) can be used.
When the number of code characters is not specified by the user, a value from 10 to
50% must be selected. The printer automatically determines the number of code
characters so that the error correcting code word exceeds the percentage specified by
the user.
d The number of bits per character
Data is compressed by using the 8-bit compression method. If “0” is specified, the
data is compressed in the same way.
Character set for 8 bits
8 bits: ISO 00H to FFH (for Kanji)
e The number of code characters
For the CP code, a 3×3 cell is used for one block, and the block set forms the CP
code.
The numbers of characters in the X and Y directions can be set by the user.
If “0” is specified, the printer automatically sets the smallest code size in which data
set by the user can be contained.
The rectangular code can be specified. The value for the Y direction must be smaller
than the X direction.
The number of cells for the code is as follows.
(No. of code characters) × 3 + 2
(20) Explanation for RFID
c The number of bytes to be written
.The number of bytes to be written on the tag depends on the type of tag.
d Sequence of writing data on the RFID tag
Data is written on the RFID tag prior to printing. When +3-mm or more feed, or a –3-
mm or less feed has been set in the @003 command, the printer performs a
forward/reverse feed before printing, according to the command setting.
When writing data onto the RFID tag succeeds, the printer feeds the paper in the
direction opposite to the feed performed before data write, and then starts printing.
If writing data fails, and when the parameter of RFID adjustment for retry has been set
to +3mm or more, or –3mm or less in the system mode, the printer performs a
forward/reverse feed again and retries to write data.
If writing data failed again, the printer prints the void pattern on that paper to abandon
it, and retries the next tag up to the max. number of RFID issue retries.
- 135 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e Writing binary data on RFID tags
When writing binary data on RFID tags, the data is specified by attaching a ‘>’. Or,
the data is converted to binary format when “conversion to binary” is designated for
the data type, and converted to hexadecimal format when “conversion to
hexadecimal” is designated for the data type. In the case of binary format, only ‘0’
and ‘1’ are used. In the case of hexadecimal format, ‘0’ to ‘F’ are used.
(Example) To specify “00H01H02H”
No conversion:
>@>A>B
Conversion to binary:
Conversion to hexadecimal:
000000000000000100000010
000102
For details, refer to Chapter 13 BAR CODE TABLE.
f On-the-fly issue
When “On-the-fly issue” is enabled for RFID write, a data write time depends on the
start point, the end point, and the print speed. If that time is shorter than the time
required to write data onto an RFID tag (300 msec.), the printer will not perform the
on-the-fly issue. When a write error occurs during the on-the-fly issue, the printer will
feed the paper backward and print the void pattern on it. When the printer has no
ribbon saving module, the RFID tag paper may be jammed at the print head during a
reverse feed. Even if the printer includes a ribbon saving module, care must be
taken not to cause a paper jam during strip issue.
Success rate of data write onto RFID tags is high when the print speed is as slow as 3
inches/sec. Even if the on-the-fly issue is enabled, it may take much time to issue
RFID tag paper because the printer will feed the paper backward when an error
occurs. Therefore, the total throughput could be higher when the print condition is
set so that the on-the-fly issue is not performed, RFID data is written prior to printing
and print speed is 10 inches/sec.
g U-Code V1.19 and EPC format
When U-Code V1.19 or EPC format is designated, data will be written onto an RFID
tag in the format of its own.
Data is all specified with numbers, and no partitions are inserted between the fields.
When U-Code V1.19 and EPC format are designated and both designations are
incorrect, U-Code V1.19 takes precedence over the EPC format.
When U-Code V1.19 or EPC format is designated and the number of input digits of
print data string is different from the size of the data to be formatted for the designated
format, only the input data of designated size is formatted.
When a format is designated and data other than the one supported by the format,
which has designated data string to be printed, is designated, a variable value is
written.
h Data type
When “conversion to binary” or “conversion to hexadecimal” is designated for the data
type and the number of digits of print data string is less than that for the data type
designated, the remaining digits are filled with “0”, then an RFID write is performed.
This also applies when a link field is designated. Each field must designate 1-byte
data. If data of less than 1 byte is designated, shortfall of data must be filled with “0”
and an RFID write is performed.
- 136 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i Designation of access password registration and kill password registration
When registration of access password or kill password fails, a registration error will
result and the printer prints the void pattern.
This setting is effective only for the EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type and is ignored
for other tag types. This setting may not be effective for some of the EPC Class 1
Generation 2 tags.
j Lock/unlock setting
This setting is effective only for the EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type and is ignored
for other tag types. This setting may not be effective for some of the EPC Class 1
Generation 2 tags.
k Access to the password-protected tags
When “Access to the password-protected tags” is designated for an RFID write, the
printer prints the void pattern if an access password for the RFID write does not match
with the access password designated. Note that data can be written even onto
password-protected tags when a designation of “Access to the password-protected
tags” is omitted, but an access password cannot be registered when “Access to the
password-protected tags” is designated.
This setting is effective only for the EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type and is ignored
for other tag types. This setting may not be effective for some of the EPC Class 1
Generation 2 tags.
- 137 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
(1) The check digit attachment, increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes are
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no
drawing will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero suppression but
the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be drawn. If
the total bit map font, outline font, and bar code increment/decrement fields exceeds 32,
drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excessive field. The field to
be incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer Clear
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Example]
c Format Command (Increment bar code No. 01 (+1))
d Format Command (Increment bar code No. 02 (+2))
e Image Buffer Clear Command
f Data Command (Bar code No. 01 “0001”)
g Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “0100”)
h Issue Command (2 labels)
(0001)
(0100)
(0002)
(0102)
i Issue Command (1 label)
(0003)
(0104)
j Image Buffer Clear Command
k Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “3000”)
l Issue Command (1 label)
(3000)
- 138 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) More than one Bar Code Format Command can be connected when transmitted.
[ESC]
XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the bar code number, then the next
drawing data is printed. Therefore, the bar code number which differs according to the
drawing fields should be designated. Since the automatic field clear is not performed
between the Clear Command ([ESC] C) and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data
may be drawn using the same bar code number. In this case, the Format Command and
Data Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields
with the same bar code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.)
(5) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same bar
code No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can also be cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(6) A print data string and the link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.
Refer to
Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)
Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
Bar Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)
- 139 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
12.5
mm
Effective print area
15.0
mm
55.0
mm
20.0 mm
83.0 mm
15.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150=12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 140 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 141 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3)
Origin (0, 0)
12.5
mm
Effective print area
55.0
mm
20.0 mm
83.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 142 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.11 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND
[ESC] RC
Function
Format
Provides data for the bit map font row.
c [ESC] RCaaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]
d Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RC; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]
Term
aaa:
Character string number
000 to 199 (Two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable.)
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
Max. 255 digits
(Max. 127 digits when the font type is r, 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55.)
Any excess data will be discarded.
For the character codes, refer to chapter 12 “CHARACTER CODE
TABLE”.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99
Note:If the Bit Map Font Data Command is sent without entering any data string for the
specified character string number (e.g. [ESC]RC00;[LF][NUL]), the previous data
string of the same character string number (No. 00 in the case of the above
example) is deleted.
Explanation
(1) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 255 digits of data strings can be linked. However, when the font type is
r, 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55, only up to 127 digits can be linked.
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, excess data will be
discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due
to the omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command
code is designated.)
- 143 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) Data string of Kanji code
• When the font type is r, Chinese Kanji is used. GB18030 can be printed.
(3) Kanji code selection
• The character code is automatically selected in the manner described below.
c GB18030 (Chinese characters)
~ 20h to A0h: Half-width character
A: Kanji [
Other codes: GB18030
]
[D6h] [D0h] [B9h] [FAh]
B: Kanji + Half-width character [
ABC
abc]
[D6h] [D0h] [41h] [42h] [43h] [B9h] [FAh] [61h] [62h] [63h]
A
B
C
a
b
c
C: Half-width character [1
23ABC]
[31h] [32h] [33h] [41h] [42h] [43h]
1
2
3
A
B
C
(4) To mix Kanji and writable characters on the same field
• The character code should be specified in the manner described below.
c GB18030 (Chinese characters)
~ 20h to A0h: Half-width character
A: Kanji [ ] + Writable character
[D6h] [D0h] [B9h] [FAh] [FAh] [A1h]
Writable character
Other codes: GB18030
B: Kanji + Half-width character [
ABC
abc] + Writable character
[D6h] [D0h] [41h] [42h] [43h] [B9h] [FAh] [61h] [62h] [63h]
A
B
C
a
b
c
[FAh] [A1h]
Writable character
C: Half-width character [1
[31h] [32h] [33h] [41h] [42h] [43h] [FAh] [A1h]
Writable character
23ABC] + Writable character
1
2
3
A
B
C
Refer to
Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)
- 144 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
12.5 mm
Sample
55.0 mm
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 145 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 146 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
12.5
mm
30.0
mm
20.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, X, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, X, 01, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000;
[ESC] RC001;
AB [LF] [NUL]
AB [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 147 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.12 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND
[ESC] RV
Function
Format
Provides data for the outline font row.
c [ESC] RVaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]
d Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RV; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Character string number
00 to 99
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
Max. 255 digits
Any excess data will be discarded.
For the character codes, refer to chapter 12 “CHARACTER CODE
TABLE”.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99
Note:If the Outline Font Data Command is sent without entering any data string for the
specified character string number (e.g. [ESC]RV00;[LF][NUL]), the previous data
string of the same character string number (No. 00 in the case of the above
example) is deleted.
Explanation
(1) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 255 digits of data strings can be linked. Data exceeding the max.
number of digits will be discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to
the omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command
code is designated.)
Refer to
Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
- 148 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
12.5 mm
Sample
55.0 mm
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 149 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 150 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.13 BAR CODE DATA COMMAND
[ESC] RB
Function
Format
Provides data for the bar code.
c [ESC] RBaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]
d Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RB; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]
Term
aa:
Bar code number
00 to 31
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
The maximum number of digits varies according to the type of bar code.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99
The Data Command for the MaxiCode is described later.
Explanation
(1) Data check
If there is data in the data row, which does not meet the type of bar code, the bar
code will not be drawn. If wrong code selection takes place in the data row of
CODE128 (without auto code selection), the bar code will not be drawn.
If there is data different from the one designated using the format ID when Data
Matrix is used, the symbol is not drawn.
If the Bar Code Data Command is sent without entering any data string for the
specified bar code number (e.g. [ESC]RB00;[LF][NUL]), the previous data string of
the same bar code number (No. 00 in the case of the above example) is deleted.
In the case of the bar code type of which data length is specified (e.g. Binary mode
of QR code), the previously drawn bar code cannot be deleted just by setting the
data length to zero. To delete the previous bar code, be sure to send the
command without entering any data string.
(2) No. of digits of data
When data exceeding the maximum number of digits is sent, the excess data will
be discarded. For the maximum number of digits for each bar code, see below.
Data Matrix, PDF417, QR code:
CP code:
2000 digits
473 digits
366 digits
93 digits
MicroPDF417:
MaxiCode:
Customer bar code:
Highest priority customer bar code:
POSTNET:
20 digits
19 digits
5, 9, 11 digits
ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE: 12 digits
KIX CODE:
18 digits
Bar codes other than the above
126 digits
When the number of digits does not correspond to the bar code type, the bar code
is not drawn.
For the MaxiCode, the maximum number of digits varies according to the mode.
In mode 2 or 3 and mode 4 or 6, the maximum number of digits is 84 and 93,
respectively.
- 151 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maximum number of digits for Data Matrix varies according to the settings for
ECC type, format ID, and the cell size. In the case of Kanji, the maximum number
of digits is half those of the values described below since a Kanji character
occupies 2 bytes.
Max number of digits for Data Matrix
ECC0
500
452
394
413
310
271
ECC50
457
ECC80
402
ECC100
300
ECC140
144
105
91
Format ID 1
Format ID 2
Format ID 3
Format ID 4
Format ID 5
Format ID 6
333
293
218
291
256
190
305
268
200
96
228
201
150
72
200
176
131
63
Numeric
2000
Alphanumeric
2000
8 bit
1556
ECC200
The maximum writable data volume on the RFID is 512 bytes. However, the
actually writable data volume varies according to the type of tag to be used.
Cell Size and Effective Data Capacity
ECC000
ECC050
ECC080
ECC100
ECC140
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Symbol size
Row Col
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
capacity
9
9
3
2
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
11 11 12
13 13 24
15 15 37
17 17 53
19 19 72
21 21 92
23 23 115
25 25 140
8
5
1
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
16
25
35
48
61
76
93
10
16
23
31
40
50
61
10
20
32
46
61
78
97
6
4
4
3
2
1
1
–
–
–
–
13
21
30
41
52
65
78
93
9
13
24
36
50
65
82
9
6
8
5
3
–
–
–
14
20
27
34
42
16
24
33
43
54
67
80
94
10
16
22
28
36
44
52
16
25
36
47
60
73
88
11
17
24
31
40
49
59
69
81
93
7
2
1
1
11
15
20
26
32
38
45
53
61
69
78
88
6
4
3
12
17
24
30
38
46
54
64
73
84
94
8
5
11
16
20
25
30
36
42
49
56
63
70
78
87
96
7
10
13
16
20
24
28
32
36
41
46
51
57
63
27 27 168 112
29 29 197 131
73 118
86 140
51 100
61 120
72 141
31 31 229 153 100 164 109
33 33 264 176 115 190 126
35 35 300 200 131 217 145
62 104
72 121
82 140
83 164 109
95 188 125
37 37 339 226 148 246 164 108 214 143
94 159 106
39 39 380 253 166 277 185 121 242 161 106 180 120
41 41 424 282 185 310 206 135 270 180 118 201 134
43 43 469 313 205 344 229 150 301 201 132 224 149
98 106
45 45 500 345 226 380 253 166 333 222 146 248 165 108 118
47 47 500 378 248 418 278 183 366 244 160 273 182 119 130
49 49 500 413 271 457 305 200 402 268 176 300 200 131 144
- 152 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum
capacity
8-bit
byte
Symbol size
capacity
capacity
Row Col
10 10
6
3
1
12 12 10
14 14 16
16 16 24
18 18 36
20 20 44
22 22 60
24 24 72
26 26 88
32 32 124
6
3
10
16
25
31
43
52
64
91
6
10
16
20
28
34
42
60
84
36 36 172 127
40 40 228 169 112
44 44 288 214 142
48 48 348 259 172
52 52 408 304 202
64 64 560 418 278
72 72 736 550 366
80 80 912 682 454
88 88 1152 862 574
96 96 1392 1042 694
104 104 1632 1222 814
120 120 2000 1573 1048
132 132 2000 1954 1302
144 144 2000 2000 1556
Rectangular code
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum
8-bit
byte
Symbol size
capacity
capacity
capacity
Row Col
8
8
18 10
32 20
6
3
13
22
31
46
72
8
12 26 32
12 36 44
16 36 64
16 48 98
14
20
30
47
- 153 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When PDF417 or MicroPDF417 is used, the number of symbol characters called
code words is limited to 928 or less. Moreover, the data compression rate varies
according to the contents of data. Therefore, the maximum number of digits
according to modes is as follows.
When letters and numerics are mixed in data in EXC mode, for example, the
maximum values become smaller than the values below, since the internal mode
selection code is used.
To correct a reading error by designating the security level, the maximum value
becomes smaller, since the error correction code words below are used.
When the number of the code words exceeds 928, or when the number of rows
exceeds 90, the symbols are not drawn.
For the MicroPDF417, the numbers of rows and columns can be specified.
The maximum number of digits varies according to the setting.
In the case of PDF417
• Extended Alphanumeric Compaction (EXC) mode: 1850 digits
• Binary/ASCII Plus mode:
• Numeric compaction mode:
1108 digits
2000 digits
In the case of MicroPDF417
• Binary mode:
150 digits
250 digits
366 digits
• Upper case letter/space mode:
• Numeric compaction mode:
For the MicroPDF417, the printer
sets the security level automatically.
No. of Error Correction Code Words of PDF417
No. of error correction
Security level Error Correction Ability
Level 0
code words
0
2
6
14
30
62
126
254
510
Low
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
Level 7
Level 8
High
- 154 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417
Parameter
(gg)
Max. number of digits
for binary mode
Max. number of digits for
upper case letter/space mode
Max. number of digits
for numeric mode
No. of columns No. of rows
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
–
1
2
3
4
–
150
22
43
97
150
3
250
38
366
55
–
–
72
105
237
366
8
–
162
250
6
–
11
14
17
20
24
28
8
7
12
17
1
10
13
18
22
8
18
26
22
32
30
44
38
55
14
20
11
14
17
20
23
26
6
14
21
27
33
38
43
6
24
35
36
52
2
46
67
56
82
64
93
72
105
14
10
8
10
15
20
27
39
54
68
82
97
8
18
26
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
4
26
38
34
49
3
46
67
66
96
90
132
167
202
237
20
114
138
162
14
6
13
20
27
34
45
63
85
106
128
150
22
32
8
34
49
10
12
15
20
26
32
38
44
46
67
58
85
4
76
111
155
208
261
313
366
106
142
178
214
250
- 155 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) CODE128 code selection
In the case of CODE128 (with auto code selection), code selection is performed in
the following manner. (Conforming to USS-128 APPENDIX-G)
c Determining the start character
(a) If the data begins with four or more consecutive numerals, the start code
to be used is (CODE C).
(b) In any case other than (a) in c, if a control character appears before a
small letter (see f.) or four or more consecutive numerals, the start code
is (CODE A).
(c) In none of the above cases, the start code is (CODE B).
d If the data begins with an odd number of digits in (a), c:
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the last numeric
data. When (FNC1), if found in the number, breaks a pair of digits in the
number, insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character before the numeric
data preceding the (FNC1). Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should
conform to (b) and (c) in c.
e If four or more digits of numeric data continue in (CODE A) or (CODE B).
(a) When the numeric data is an even number of digits, insert the (CODE C)
character just before the first numeric data.
(b) When the numeric data is an odd number of digits, insert the (CODE C)
character immediately after the first numeric data.
f If a control character appears in (CODE B):
(a) In the subsequent data, when a small letter appears before the next
control character or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT)
character before the first control character.
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first control
character.
g If a small letter appears in (CODE A):
(a) In the subsequent data, when a control character appears before the next
small letter or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT)
character before the first small letter.
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first small
letter.
h If any data other than the numerals appears in (CODE C):
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the data other
than the numerals. Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should conform
to (b) and (c) in c.
- 156 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) CODE128 code selection check
Check if selection of (CODE A), (CODE B), or (CODE C) of CODE128 has been
set correctly. If an error is found, the bar code will not be drawn.
[Conditions causing an error]
c No start code is designated.
d A small letter (including { , | , } , ~, _ ) is found in (CODE A).
e A control character is found in (CODE B).
f Any data other than the numerals, (FNC1), (CODE A), and (CODE B) is found
in (CODE C).
g There are two or more consecutive (SHIFT) characters.
h The number in (CODE C) is an odd number of digits.
i (SHIFT) is followed by (CODE A), (CODE B) or (CODE C).
(5) Kanji code selection
• In the case of Data Matrix, PDF417, and QR code, Kanji codes can be printed.
Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal, JIS 8 codes can be mixed.
(6) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 2000 digits of data strings of Data Matrix and PDF417 can be linked.
For other bar codes, up to 126 digits can be linked. (The value varies
according to the type of bar code.)
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, excess data will be
discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to
the omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV”, or “RB” command
code is designated.)
- 157 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) When manual mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code
c Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode
Mode selection
Data to be printed
d Binary mode
Mode selection
No. of data strings
(4 digits)
Data to be printed
“,” (comma)
e Mixed mode
Data
“,” (comma)
Data
Data
The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji.
Since data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used is
designated when the mode is selected.
Mode
Code
Details
N
A
Numerals
0 to 9
Alphanumerics, symbols A to Z 0 to 9 space
$
%
*
+
-
.
/
:
B
K
Binary (8-bit)
Kanji
00H to FFH
Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal
If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.
(8) When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code.
Data to be printed
(9) How to transmit the control code data
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
=
=
=
> @ (3EH, 40H)
> A (3EH, 41H)
> B (3EH, 42H)
STX (02H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
=
=
=
> ] (3EH, 5DH)
> ^ (3EH, 5EH)
> _ (3EH, 5FH)
* How to transmit the special codes
> (3EH) > 0 (3EH, 30H)
=
- 158 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(10) Transfer code for QR code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
q
r
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
G
H
I
g
h
i
w
(
x
)
y
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
z
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
{
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
CR GS
SO RS
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
•
^
~
SI
US
/
_
DEL
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.
(11) Examples of data designation
c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
A A B C 1 2 3
Data to be printed
Designation of mode
d Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H
B 0 0 0 6 > A > C > E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
e Mixed mode
Numeric mode
Kanji mode
:
:
:
123456
Kanji data
Binary mode
a
i
u
e
o
Alphanumeric mode : ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a
i
u
e
o
, A A B C
Data to be
printed
Data to be
printed
No. of
data strings
Data to be printed
Data to be
printed
Designation of mode
f Automatic mode
When the data above (e) is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a A B C
Data to be printed
i
u
e
o
- 159 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(12) MaxiCode data
For mode 2 or 3:
[ESC] RBaa; bbbbbbbbbcccdddeeeee --- eeeee [LF] [NUL]
For mode 4 or 6:
[ESC] RBaa; fffffffffggggg --- ggggg [LF] [NUL]
c bbbbbbbbb:
Postal code
Fixed as 9 digits
•
Mode 2:
b1b2b3b4b5:
b6b7b8b9:
Mode 3:
b1b2b3b4b5b6: Zip code
Zip code
Fixed as 5 digits (Numerics)
Zip code extension Fixed as 4 digits (Numerics)
•
Fixed as 6 digits (Character “A” of
code set)
b7b8b9:
Vacant
Class of service
Country code
Fixed as 3 digits (20H)
Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics)
Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics)
84 digits
d ccc:
e ddd:
f eee --- eee: Message data strings
g fffffffff:
Primary message data strings
9 digits
h ggg --- ggg: Secondary message data strings
84 digits
NOTES: 1. When anything other than numerics is included in the data string of zip
code (mode 2), zip code extension, class of service, or country code, a
MaxiCode is not drawn.
2. If the message data is less than 84 digits when mode 2 or 3 is selected,
the printer adds a CR (000000) at the end of the data, and the remaining
digits will be padded with FSs (011100).
When message data
exceeding 84 digits is received, the excess data will be discarded before
drawing a MaxiCode.
3. If the message data is less than 93 digits (9 digits + 84 digits) when
mode 4 or 6 is selected, the printer adds a CR (000000) at the end of the
data, and the remaining digits will be padded with FSs (011100). When
message data exceeding 93 digits is received, the excess data will be
discarded before drawing a MaxiCode.
4. Mode 6 should not be used for usual operation since it is used for
scanner programming.
5. When “TYPE2: Special specification” is set for MaxiCode specification
setting in the system mode and when Mode 2 is selected, the country
code must be 840. Otherwise, a MaxiCode will not be printed.
6. When “TYPE2: Special specification” is set for MaxiCode specification
setting in the system mode and when Mode 3 is selected, the country
code must be other than 840. Otherwise, a MaxiCode will not be
printed.
- 160 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
(1)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
12.5 mm
15.0 mm
55.0 mm
20.0 mm
63.0 mm
15.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; 12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 161 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2)
Origin (0, 0)
Effective print area
30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S 0 0 1
20.0 mm
65.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 162 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3)
Origin (0, 0)
12.5
mm
Effective print area
55.0
mm
20.0 mm
83.0 mm
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 163 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.14 ISSUE COMMAND
[ESC] XS
Issues labels according to the print conditions programmed.
[ESC] XS; I, aaaa, bbbcdefgh [LF] [NUL]
Function
Format
Term
aaaa:
bbb:
Number of labels to be issued
0001 to 9999
Cut interval. Designates the number of pieces to be printed before the
backing paper is cut.
000 to 100 (no cut when 000)
c:
Type of sensor
0: No sensor
1: Reflective sensor
2: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)
3: Transmissive sensor (when using preprinted labels)
4: Reflective sensor (when using a manual threshold value)
d:
e:
f:
Issue mode
C: Batch mode
D: Strip mode (with back feed, the strip sensor is valid.)
E: Strip mode (with back feed, the strip sensor is ignored,
the applicator supports this mode.)
Issue speed
B-SX4T:
3: 3 ips
6: 6 ips
A: 10 ips
B-SX5T:
3: 3 ips
5: 5 ips
8: 8 ips
With/without ribbon
0: Without ribbon
1: With ribbon (with ribbon saving function)
2: With ribbon (without ribbon saving function)
3: With ribbon (with head up function)
g:
h:
Designates tag rotation.
0: Printing bottom first
1: Printing top first
2: Mirror printing bottom first
3: Mirror printing top first
Type of status response
0: No status response
1: Status response
- 164 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Explanation
(1) Number of labels to be issued
c If increment/decrement is not specified, the designated number of pieces with
the same drawing data will be issued.
d If increment/decrement is specified, the designated number of pieces will be
issued while incrementing/decrementing the piece of the designated drawing
area.
* The increment/decrement designation is valid until the Image Buffer Clear
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
(2) Cut interval
The cut interval is valid only when the cutter has been installed and the issue
mode is “C”. If an error occurs during an issue after the cut interval is
designated, and then printing is restarted, the printer ejects the printed paper, then
resumes printing on the paper where the error occurred.
If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 1 second after issuing the
last label, the printer automatically performs an approximately 13.7-mm forward
feed. However, if the label pitch length is 20 mm or less, the edge of the label is
caught on the head, when the label is fed back to the home position. Therefore,
even if the automatic forward feed standby is specified, a forward feed is not
performed.
When receiving the Issue Command during the automatic forward feed standby,
the printer starts an issue after a reverse feed to the original position.
If any command is sent and processed after the Issue Command is sent, the
automatic forward feed is not performed. Therefore, a command should not be
sent after the Issue Command is sent. The power should not be turned off then
on, or the printer should not be placed in a pause/reset state before the automatic
forward feed, since the automatic forward feed is not performed when the paper is
fed by turning the power off then on, or by pressing the [FEED] key of the printer
in the pause/reset state.
If the paper is fed by pressing the [FEED] key of the printer during the forward
feed standby, the printer feeds one label, cuts, performs the automatic forward
feed then stops.
When writing data onto the RFID tag failed and the void pattern is printed, the
paper including the void one is cut at the specified cut interval.
(3) Type of sensor
c No sensor: Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the
Label Size Set Command.
d Reflective sensor:
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the
tag paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the paper
position is finely adjusted for every piece.
e Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels):
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by
the transmissive sensor and the paper position is finely adjusted for every
piece.
f Transmissive sensor (when using preprinted labels):
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by
the transmissive sensor and the paper position is finely adjusted for every
piece according to the value set by the threshold setting operation (key
operation).
- 165 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g Reflective sensor (when using a manual threshold value)
Printing takes place according to the parameters designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back of the tag
paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the paper position
is finely adjusted for every piece, according to the value set by the threshold
setting operation (key operation).
(4) Issue mode
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 0, Issue count: 3)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to OFF in the system mode.
Head position
(1) Idling (at the home position)
(2) Prints the 1st label (A).
(3) Prints the 2nd label (B).
(4) Prints the 3rd label (C).
A
B
C
A
B
A
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 0, Issue count: 3)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to ON in the system mode.
Head position
(1) Idling (during the forward feed standby)
(2) Feeds back to the home position.
(3) Prints the 1st label (A).
A
(4) Prints the 2nd label (B).
(5) Prints the 3rd label (C).
A
B
B
C
A
(6) After 1 second, performs 13.7-mm
automatic forward feed.
A
B
C
- 166 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to OFF in the system mode.
• The swing cutter is used.
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling
(2) Completes printing the 1st label (A).
(3) Feeds the 1st label (A) to the cut position.
(4) Cuts the 1st label (A).
A
A
A
(5) Feeds back to the home position.
(6) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).
(7) Feeds the 2nd label (B) to the cut position.
(8) Cuts the 2nd label (B).
B
B
B
(9) Feeds back to the home position.
- 167 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to ON in the system mode.
• The swing cutter is used.
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling (during the forward feed standby)
(2) Feeds back to the home position.
(3) Completes printing the 1st label (A).
(4) Feeds the 1st label (A) to the cut position.
(5) Cuts the 1st label (A).
A
A
A
(6) Feeds back to the home position.
(7) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).
(8) Feeds the 2nd label (B) to the cut position.
(9) Cuts the 2nd label (B).
B
B
B
(10) Feeds back to the home position.
(11) After 1 second, performs 13.7-mm
automatic forward feed.
- 168 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to OFF in the system mode.
• The rotary cutter is used.
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling (at the home position)
(2) Completes printing the 1st label (A).
(3) Starts printing the 2nd label (B).
A
A
B
B
B
(4) The 1st label (A) reaches the cut position
and is cut.
A
B
(5) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).
B
(6) Feeds the 2nd label (B) to the cut position.
(7) The 2nd label (B) reaches the cut position
and is cut.
(8) Since non-stop cutting is performed, paper
is fed and stopped over the cut position.
(9) Feeds back to the home position.
- 169 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to ON in the system mode.
• The rotary cutter is used.
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling (during the forward feed standby)
(2) Feeds back to the home position.
(3) Completes printing the 1st label (A).
(4) Starts printing the 2nd label (B).
A
A
B
B
B
(5) The 1st label (A) reaches the cut position
and is cut.
A
B
(6) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).
B
(7) Feeds the 2nd label (B) to the cut position.
(8) The 2nd label (B) reaches the cut position
and is cut.
(9) Since non-stop cutting is performed, paper
is fed and stopped over the cut position.
(10) Feeds back to the home position.
(11) After 1 second, performs 13.7-mm
automatic forward feed.
- 170 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[D: Strip mode (Issue count: 3)]
Strip position Head position
(1) Idling
(2) Feeds back to the home position.
(3) Completes printing the 1st label (A).
(4) Remove the 1st label (A).
A
B
C
(5) Feeds back to the home position.
(6) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).
(7) Remove the 2nd label (B).
(8) Feeds back to the home position.
(9) Completes printing the 3rd label (C)
* The next label is not printed until the printed
label is removed.
- 171 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E: Strip mode (Issue mode: E)]
The expansion I/O is installed:
The strip sensor is ignored. An issue is performed by checking a PAUSE
signal generated from the expansion I/O.
Strip position Head position
(1) Idling
The PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O, is turned ON.
(2) The PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O, is turned OFF.
Feeds back to the home position.
(3) Completes printing the 1st label (A).
The PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O, is turned ON.
A
(4) Remove the 1st label (A).
The PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O, is turned OFF.
(5) Feeds back to the home position.
B
(6) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).
The PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O, is turned ON.
(7) Remove the 2nd label (B).
The PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O, is turned OFF.
(8) Feeds back to the home position.
C
(9) Completes printing the 3rd label (C).
The PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O, is turned ON.
* When the PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O is on, a label is not printed.
- 172 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The expansion I/O is not installed:
The strip sensor is ignored, an issue is performed.
Strip position Head position
(1) Idling
(2) Feeds back to the home position.
(3) Completes printing the 1st label (A).
A
B
C
(4) Feeds back to the home position.
(5) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).
(6) Feeds back to the home position.
(7) Completes printing the 3rd label (C).
* The next label is printed regardless of whether
or not the label is removed.
*1 Issue mode E is different from issue mode D. In issue mode E, a label is
issued regardless of whether or not a label to be stripped is placed.
*2 The peripheral device such as an applicator, must control the PAUSE
signal generated from the expansion I/O.
*3 If the issue count is set to 2 or more to issue labels when the expansion I/O
has been installed, the printer issues the specified number of labels while
the PAUSE signal generated from the expansion I/O is off.
*4 If the issue count is set to 2 or more to issue labels when the expansion I/O
has not been installed, the specified number of labels is issued.
- 173 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) Issue speed
• Printing takes place at the designated speed.
However, the back feed speed in cut mode and strip mode is 3 ips. This back
feed speed can be changed from 3 ips to 2 ips in the system mode.
• For B-SX4T, the print speed “10 ips” is not supported for printing with the rotary
cutter. If “10 ips” is specified when the rotary cutter has been installed, the
print speed is corrected from 10 ips to 6 ips, regardless of the cut designation.
• The possible issue speed varies according to types and sizes of the paper
supply. For details, refer to the Supply Specification.
Model
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
Rotary cutter Rotary cutter
Parameter
not installed
installed
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
3 ips
3 ips
3 ips
6 ips
5 ips
8 ips
6 ips
10 ips
(6) With/without ribbon
Without ribbon: Use direct thermal paper.
With ribbon: Use thermal transfer ribbon.
With ribbon saving:
• When there is a non-print area (in the feed direction) of 20 mm or more (30 mm
or more at 10 ips for the B-SX4T) in the batch mode, cut mode or strip mode,
ribbon saving is performed automatically.
• The minimum print area (in the feed direction) in ribbon saving issue is 8 mm.
If the print area is less than 8 mm, printing is performed by automatically
assuming the minimum print area of 8 mm.
• Ribbon saving is performed for up to 4 fields (Max: 4 printing fields + 4 ribbon
saving fields).
• When the parameter in the Issue Command is set to “Without ribbon saving
function”, or the ribbon saving system is set in the system mode so that it is not
used, no ribbon saving will take place.
NOTES: 1. To use the ribbon saving function, it is necessary to select the parameter
depending on the head lever position. This selection is performed by the
parameter settings in the system mode.
Head lever position is “TAG”:
Select “RBN SAVE ON(TAG)”
Head lever position is “LABEL”: Select “RBN SAVE ON(LBL)”
Incorrect selection may disable the proper ribbon saving function.
When the head lever position is “TAG” and solenoid type is TYPE1, the
thermal head is pulled up with strong power. So, depending on the area in
which the ribbon is saved and the number of fields, the head-up solenoid
temperature may be raised and the ribbon saving function may not be able to
work. Therefore, when the area in which the ribbon is to be saved exceeds
the specified value, the ribbon saving length is automatically shortened, as
described on the following page, to prevent the temperature from being raised,
even if the above conditions are satisfied.
2. If the ribbon saving module has not been installed, when the parameter in the
Issue Command is set to “With ribbon saving function”, or the ribbon saving
system is set in the system mode so that it is used, the ribbon will sag during
printing.
Without ribbon (with head up function): Use direct thermal paper. When there
is a non-print area, the print head is raised in the same way with the ribbon save
function.
- 174 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Correction for the ribbon saving area (in case of TAG and solenoid TYPE 1):
Printing area
A B C D E
A B C D E
Printing area
Correct so that the head is
lowered to at least 50% of
the label pitch length
(Solenoid OFF).
Correction
Ribbon saving
area
Ribbon saving
area
Paper feed direction
Ribbon saving
area
Ribbon saving
area
Correction
Printing area
Correct so that the head is
lowered to at least 50% of
the label pitch length
(Solenoid OFF).
Printing area
A B C D E
A B C D E
Paper feed direction
- 175 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) Tag rotation
The origin of coordinates and printing direction vary according to the designation
of tag rotation.
c Printing bottom first
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Backing paper
Label
Tag
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
pitch
Tag
pitch
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
S a m p l e
S a m p l e
Effective
Effective
print width
print width
X
X
0
0
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
Y
[Labels]
[Tags]
d Printing top first
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Backing paper
Label
Tag
Label
pitch
Tag
pitch
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
Y
0
Y
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
0
X
X
[Labels]
[Tags]
- 176 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e Mirror printing bottom first
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Backing paper
Label
Tag
Origin of
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
coordinates
(0, 0)
Label
pitch
Tag
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
pitch
Effective
Effective
print width
print width
X
X
0
0
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
Y
[Labels]
[Tags]
f Mirror printing top first
Black mark
(Back side of print)
Backing paper
Label
Tag
Label
pitch
Tag
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
pitch
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
print width
Effective
print width
Y
Y
Paper feed direction
X
Paper feed direction
0
0
X
[Labels]
[Tags]
- 177 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(8) Status response
When the option with status response has been selected, a status response is
made at the end of printing or if an error occurs.
In the batch mode and the cut mode, the print end status response is made after
printing on the designated number of labels.
In the strip mode, the status response is made after printing one label.
* Do not change the parameter for status response/no status response during
printing. Otherwise the status response may not be performed properly.
Examples
• Issue count:
• Cut interval:
• Paper:
4 pieces
1 piece
Tag paper (Reflective
sensor used)
Cut issue
41.0
mm
S a m p l e
76.2
mm
• Issue mode:
• Issue speed:
• Ribbon:
73.2
mm
8”/sec.
With
• Status response: On
15.0 mm
82.0 mm
Paper feed direction
[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C8201 [LF] [NUL]
- 178 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
~ Explanation of processes involved to stop the label at the home position after the
head-open state is detected:
When the gap between labels (black mark) is found after the head open state is
detected, the value to stop at the home position of each label between the head and
the sensor is set again.
Stop position
Sensor
A
B
C
77 mm
92 mm
• The paper is moved in the above state.
Stop position
Sensor
A
B
C
• Stop position after feeding one label
Stop position
Sensor
+15 mm after detection
of gap between B and C
A
B
C
D
* However, an error will result when feed jam conditions are met.
Paper feed direction
- 179 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.15 FEED COMMAND
[ESC] T
Function
Format
Term
Feeds the paper.
[ESC] Tabcde [LF] [NUL]
a:
Type of sensor
0: No sensor
1: Reflective sensor
2: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)
3: Transmissive sensor (when using preprinted labels)
4: Reflective sensor (when using a manual threshold value)
b:
c:
Selects cut or non-cut
0: Non-cut
1: Cut
Feed mode
C: Batch mode (Cut and feed when “1 (Cut)” is selected for parameter b.)
D: Strip mode
E: Strip mode
(with back feed)
(with back feed, the strip sensor is ignored, the applicator
supports this mode.)
d:
e:
Feed speed
B-SX4T:
3: 3 ips
B-SX5T:
3: 3 ips
5: 5 ips
8: 8 ips
6: 6 ips
A: 10 ips
With/without ribbon
0: Without ribbon
1: With ribbon (with ribbon saving function)
2: With ribbon (without ribbon saving function)
Explanation
(1) Type of sensor
c No sensor:
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command.
d Reflective sensor:
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag
paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the stop position is
finely adjusted.
e Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels):
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the
transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted.
- 180 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f Transmissive sensor (when using preprinted labels):
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by
the transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted according to
the value set by the threshold set operation (key operation).
g Reflective sensor (when using a manual threshold value)
Feeding takes place according to the parameters designated by the Label
Size Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back of the
tag paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the paper
position is finely adjusted for every piece, according to the value set by the
threshold set operation (key operation).
(2) Cut/non-cut
This option is valid in the batch feed mode only. (Non-cut is selected in the strip
mode.) If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 1 second when
the automatic forward feed is set to ON, the printer automatically performs an
approximately 13.7-mm forward feed.
When the Feed Command is received in the forward feed standby state, the
printer performs a reverse feed to the original position.
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.
For cutting the label having label pitch of 38 mm or less by the swing cutter,
refer to the section regarding the Position Fine Adjust Command.
(3) Feed mode
[C: Batch (Non-cut)]
Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) Completes a feed.
(Completes feeding to the top of paper and stops.)
[C: Batch (Cut)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to OFF in the system mode.
• The swing cutter is used.
Cut position Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) Completes a feed.
(Completes feeding to the top of paper.)
(3) Feeds to the cut position.
(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.
(5) Feeds back to the home position.
- 181 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C: Batch (Cut)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to ON in the system mode.
• The swing cutter is used.
Cut position Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) Completes a feed.
(Completes feeding to the top of paper.)
(3) Feeds to the cut position.
(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.
(5) Feeds back to the home position.
(6) After 1 second, performs 13.7-mm automatic
forward feed.
[C: Batch (Cut)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to OFF in the system mode.
• The rotary cutter is used.
Cut position Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) Completes a feed.
(Completes feeding to the top of paper.)
(3) Feeds to the cut position.
(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.
(5) Since non-stop cutting is performed, paper is
fed and stopped over the cut position.
(6) Feed back to the home position.
- 182 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C: Batch (Cut)]
• “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to ON in the system mode.
• The rotary cutter is used.
Cut position Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) Completes a feed.
(Completes feeding to the top of paper.)
(3) Feeds to the cut position.
(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.
(5) Since non-stop cutting is performed, paper is
fed and stopped over the cut position.
(6) Feeds back to the home position.
(7) After 1 second, performs 13.7-mm automatic
forward feed.
[D: Strip]
Strip position Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) Feeds back to the home position.
(3) Starts a feed.
(4) Completes a feed.
(Completes feeding to the top of form and stops)
* Even if a label is not removed, a feed is
performed.
- 183 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E: Strip (Feed mode: E)]
Expansion I/O is installed:
The strip sensor is ignored. A feed is performed by checking a PAUSE signal
generated from the expansion I/O.
Strip position Head position
(1) Place paper.
The PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O, is turned ON.
(2) Remove the label.
The PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O, is turned OFF.
(3) Feeds back to the home position.
(4) Completes a feed.
(Completes feeding to the top of form and stops)
The PAUSE signal generated from the expansion
I/O, is turned ON.
Expansion I/O is not installed:
The strip sensor is ignored. A feed is performed.
Strip position Head position
(1) Place paper.
(2) Feeds back to the home position
(3) Completes feeding to the top of form and stops
*1 Feed mode E is different from feed mode D. In feed mode E, a label is fed,
regardless of whether or not a label to be stripped is placed.
*2: The peripheral device such as an applicator, must control the PAUSE signal
generated from the expansion I/O.
- 184 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Feed speed
• A feed is performed at the designated speed.
However, the back feed speed in the cut mode or the strip mode is 3 ips. This
back feed speed can be changed from 3 ips to 2 ips in the system mode.
• For B-SX4T, the print speed “10 ips” is not supported for printing with the rotary
cutter. If “10 ips” is specified when the rotary cutter has been installed, the
print speed is corrected from 10 ips to 6 ips, regardless of the cut designation.
• The possible issue speed varies according to types and sizes of the paper
supply. For details, refer to the Supply Specification.
Model
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
Rotary cutter Rotary cutter
not installed
3 ips
installed
3 ips
Parameter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
3 ips
5 ips
6 ips
6 ips
10 ips
8 ips
(5) With/without ribbon
Without ribbon: The ribbon motor is not operated at feed.
With ribbon: The ribbon motor is operated at feed.
With ribbon saving: When the use of the ribbon saving system is set to ON
(used) in the system mode, ribbon saving will be performed
automatically.
When “without ribbon saving” is selected, or the use of the
ribbon saving system is set to OFF (not used) in the system
mode, ribbon saving will not be performed.
- 185 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
(1) If a change of label size or type of sensor, feed fine adjustment, cut position fine
adjustment (or strip position fine adjustment) or back feed fine adjustment is
made, one label must be fed to adjust the first print position prior to printing.
(2) The parameter of the Feed Command is protected in memory (even if the power is
turned off).
(3) When “status response made” is selected in the Issue Command parameter
setting, a status response is made after the end of feed or when an error occurs.
(4) For explanation about the process to stop the label at the home position, refer to
the section regarding the Issue Command.
(5) If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 1 second after the last
label has been fed, the printer automatically performs an approximately 13.7-mm
forward feed when “Automatic forward feed standby” is set to ON in the system
mode. When the Feed Command is received during the forward feed standby,
the printer feeds the label in reverse to the original position, and then ejects it.
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.
Examples
41.0
mm
76.2 mm
S a m p l e
73.2
mm
15.0 mm
82.0 mm
Paper feed direction
[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] AX; +010, +000, +10 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C3001 [LF] [NUL]
- 186 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.16 EJECT COMMAND
[ESC] IB
Function
Ejects (cuts) the label presently remaining between the head and the cutter and returns
to the original position.
Format
Notes
[ESC] IB [LF] [NUL]
If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 1 second after ejection, the
printer automatically performs an approximately 13.7-mm forward feed when
“Automatic forward feed standby” is set to ON in the system mode.
When the Eject Command is received in the forward feed standby state, the printer
feeds the label in reverse to the original position, and then ejects it.
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.
Examples
• The swing cutter is used:
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling
A
(2) Completes printing the 1st label (A).
(3) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).
(4) Completes printing the 3rd label (B).
A
B
B
A
B
C
A
B
C
(5) Feeds to the cut position by the Eject
Command
A
C
(6) Completes cutting labels.
(7) Feeds back to home position.
- 187 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The rotary cutter is used:
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling
A
B
C
(2) Completes printing the 1st label (A).
(3) Completes printing the 2nd label (B).
(4) Completes printing the 3rd label (C).
A
B
A
B
(5) Feeds to the cut position by the
Eject Command
A
B
C
A
C
(6) Completes cutting labels.
(7) Since non-stop cutting is performed,
paper is fed and stopped over the cut
position.
(8) Feeds back to home position.
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; A [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] IB [LF] [NUL]
- 188 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.17 FORWARD/REVERSE FEED COMMAND
[ESC] U1, [ESC] U2
Function
After printing or feeding the paper, feeds the paper to the position at which a label can
be cut manually.
When issuing the next label, feeds the paper back to the first print position.
Format
Forward Feed
[ESC] U1; aaaa (, b) [LF] [NUL]
Reverse Feed
[ESC] U2; aaaa (, b) [LF] [NUL]
Term
aaaa:
b:
Feed value by which the paper is fed forward or backward.
0030 to 2000 (in 0.1 mm units)
Head up function (Omissible. When omitted, the head up function is not
performed.)
0: Head up function is not performed.
1: Head up function is performed.
Notes
(1) When the [FEED] key is pressed on the printer, one label is fed, and then fed by
the forward feed value automatically if the Forward Feed Command has already
been transmitted.
(2) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command is protected in memory (even if the power is
turned off).
(3) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command is ignored in the strip mode and the cut
issue mode.
(4) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command feeds the label without ribbon saving even
if the ribbon saving issue is designated.
(5) The forward feed is performed at the speed designated by the Issue Command or
Feed Command. The reverse feed is performed at 3 ips. This reverse feed
speed can be changed from 3 ips to 2 ips in the system mode.
(6) There may be cases, where a specified length of a reverse feed is not performed,
depending on the print conditions. In issues where any paper sensor is used, if
the label pitch length is almost the same as the distance between the thermal print
head and the paper sensors (75.5 mm), a label/tag may not be returned to the first
print position, even when the same value is specified for both a forward feed and a
reverse feed. It may result in an error. In such cases, to prevent an error from
occurring, the reverse feed length should be set to a value larger than the forward
feed value.
- 189 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
Cut position
Head position
(1) Idling
(2) Feeds one label.
(3) Feeds to the position at which a
label can be cut manually.
(4) Cut manually.
(5) Standby
(6) Feeds back to the home position.
(7) Prints three A labels.
A
A
A
A
A
A
(8) Feeds to the position at which
labels can be cut manually.
A
A
A
(9) Cut manually.
(10) Standby
(11) Feeds back to home position.
(12) Prints one B label.
B
B
(13) Feeds to the position at which
a label can be cut manually.
B
(14) Cut manually.
(15) Standby
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
Cut manually.
[ESC] U2; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; A [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0003, 0002C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
Cut manually.
[ESC] U2; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
- 190 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.18 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND
[ESC] XF
• For the firmware before V5.0
Function
Format
Term
Allocates the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board.
[ESC] XF; aa, bb, cc [LF] [NUL]
aa: Size of the TrueType font storage area
00 to 14 (0 KB to 896 KB)
(in units of 64 KB)
bb: Size of bit map writable character storage area
00 to 14 (0 KB to 896 KB)
(in units of 64 KB)
cc: Size of BASIC file storage area
00 to 14 (0 KB to 896 KB)
(in units of 64 KB)
AA: The current BASIC file storage area and contents are retained.
Explanation
(1) The storage area in flash ROM has a total capacity of 896 KB.
In case that the size of BASIC file storage area is set in a range of “00” to “14”:
(2) When this command is received, the entire area in flash ROM on the CPU board is
cleared.
(3) If this command is not sent, the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board
cannot be used.
(4) The storage areas are allocated in the following order of precedence – the
TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage area, and the
BASIC file storage area. After these storage areas are allocated, the remaining
area is used for the PC save area.
(5) If the sum of the TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character
storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, specified by this command, is 896
KB, the TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage area,
and the BASIC file storage area are allocated as specified, respectively. In this
case, however, there is no PC save area.
(6) If the sum of TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage
area, and the BASIC file storage area, specified by this command, exceeds 896
KB, the TrueType font storage area is allocated as specified with the highest
priority. Then, the remaining area is allocated to the bit map writable character
storage area. If there is still remaining area after the TrueType font storage area
and the bit map writable character storage area are allocated, it is used for the
BASIC file storage area. There is no PC save area.
(7) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for each of the TrueType font storage area, the bit
map writable character storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, the storage
area is not allocated.
(8) When “14” (896 KB) is specified for any of the TrueType font storage area, the bit
map writable character storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, the entire
storage areas are occupied by that area. For example, if “14” is specified for the
TrueType Font storage area, the entire storage areas are used for the TrueType
Font storage area. The bit map writable character storage area, the BASIC file
storage area, and the PC save area cannot be allocated.
- 191 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In case that the size of BASIC file storage area is set to “AA”:
(9) When this command is received, the BASIC file storage area is reserved and the
other areas in flash ROM on the CPU board are cleared.
(10) If this command is not sent, the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board
cannot be used.
If “AA” is set for the size of the BASIC file storage area with the BASIC file storage
area being unallocated, the BASIC file storage area remains unallocated.
(11) The storage areas except for the BASIC file storage area are allocated in the
following order of precedence – the TrueType font storage area, and the bit map
writable character storage area. After these storage areas are allocated, the
remaining area is used for the PC save area.
(12) If the sum of the TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable character
storage area, specified by this command, is the size of ‘896 KB minus the BASIC
file storage area size’, the TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable
character storage area are allocated as specified. In this case, however, there is
no PC save area.
(13) If the sum of TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable character
storage area, specified by this command, exceeds the size of ‘896 KB minus the
BASIC file storage area size’, the TrueType font storage area is allocated as
specified with the highest priority. Then, the remaining area is allocated to the bit
map writable character storage area. There is no PC save area.
(14) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for each of the TrueType font storage area and the
bit map writable character storage area, the storage area is not allocated.
(15) If the size of ‘896 KB minus the BASIC file storage area size’ or more is specified
for either the TrueType font storage area or the bit map writable character storage
area, each area other than the BASIC file storage area is allocated as specified.
For example, when setting “10” or “11” for the size of the TrueType font storage
area while the BASIC file storage area secures “4” (256KB), the entire storage
areas except the BASIC file storage area are allocated to the TrueType font
storage area. There is no bit map writable character storage area or PC save
area.
Refer to
Example
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• 2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command ([ESC] XE)
The TrueType font storage area and bit map writable character storage area are set to
640 KB and 192 KB, respectively.
(PC save area: 896 KB - 640KB - 192 KB = 64 KB)
[ESC] XF; 10, 03, 00 [LF] [NUL]
- 192 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• For the firmware V5.0 or greater (MAIN 4-R or greater PC board is required.)
Format
Term
[ESC] XF; aa, bb, cc [LF] [NUL]
aa: Size of the TrueType font storage area
00 to 48 (0 KB to 3072 KB)
(in units of 64 KB)
bb: Size of bit map writable character storage area
00 to 48 (0 KB to 3072 KB)
(in units of 64 KB)
cc: Size of BASIC file storage area
00 to 48 (0 KB to 3072 KB)
(in units of 64 KB)
AA: The current BASIC file storage area and contents are retained.
Explanation
(1) The storage area in flash ROM has a total capacity of 3072 KB.
In case that the size of BASIC file storage area is set in a range of “00” to “48”:
(2) When this command is received, the entire area in flash ROM on the CPU board is
cleared.
(3) If this command is not sent, the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board
cannot be used.
(4) The storage areas are allocated in the following order of precedence – the
TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage area, and the
BASIC file storage area. After these storage areas are allocated, the remaining
area is used for the PC save area.
(5) If the sum of the TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character
storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, specified by this command, is 3072
KB, the TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage area,
and the BASIC file storage area are allocated as specified, respectively. In this
case, however, there is no PC save area.
(6) If the sum of TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage
area, and the BASIC file storage area, specified by this command, exceeds 3072
KB, the TrueType font storage area is allocated as specified with the highest
priority. Then, the remaining area is allocated to the bit map writable character
storage area. If there is still remaining area after the TrueType font storage area
and the bit map writable character storage area are allocated, it is used for the
BASIC file storage area. There is no PC save area.
(7) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for each of the TrueType font storage area, the bit
map writable character storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, the storage
area is not allocated.
(8) When “48” (3072 KB) is specified for any of the TrueType font storage area, the bit
map writable character storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, the entire
storage areas are occupied by that area. For example, if “48” is specified for the
TrueType Font storage area, the entire storage areas are used for the TrueType
Font storage area. The bit map writable character storage area, the BASIC file
storage area, and the PC save area cannot be allocated.
- 193 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In case that the size of BASIC file storage area is set to “AA”:
(9) When this command is received, the BASIC file storage area is reserved and the
other areas in flash ROM on the CPU board are cleared.
(10) If this command is not sent, the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board
cannot be used.
If “AA” is set for the size of the BASIC file storage area with the BASIC file storage
area being unallocated, the BASIC file storage area remains unallocated.
(11) The storage areas except for the BASIC file storage area are allocated in the
following order of precedence – the TrueType font storage area, and the bit map
writable character storage area. After these storage areas are allocated, the
remaining area is used for the PC save area.
(12) If the sum of the TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable character
storage area, specified by this command, is the size of ‘3072 KB minus the BASIC
file storage area size’, the TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable
character storage area are allocated as specified. In this case, however, there is
no PC save area.
(13) If the sum of TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable character
storage area, specified by this command, exceeds the size of ‘3072 KB minus the
BASIC file storage area size’, the TrueType font storage area is allocated as
specified with the highest priority. Then, the remaining area is allocated to the bit
map writable character storage area. There is no PC save area.
(14) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for each of the TrueType font storage area and the
bit map writable character storage area, the storage area is not allocated.
(15) If the size of ‘3072 KB minus the BASIC file storage area size’ or more is specified
for either the TrueType font storage area or the bit map writable character storage
area, each area other than the BASIC file storage area is allocated as specified.
For example, when setting “10” or “11” for the size of the TrueType font storage
area while the BASIC file storage area secures “4” (256KB), the entire storage
areas except the BASIC file storage area are allocated to the TrueType font
storage area. There is no bit map writable character storage area or PC save
area.
Refer to
Example
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• 2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command ([ESC] XE)
The TrueType font storage area and bit map writable character storage area are set to
640 KB and 192 KB, respectively.
(PC save area: 3072 KB − 640KB − 192 KB = 2240 KB)
[ESC] XF; 10, 03, 00 [LF] [NUL]
- 194 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.19 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] J1
Function
Format
Term
Formats (initializes) the flash memory card or flash ROM on the CPU board for storage.
[ESC] J1; a (, b) [LF] [NUL]
a: Formatting (initializing) range
A: All area of flash memory
B: PC save area of flash memory
C: Writable character storage area of flash memory
b: Drive (Omissible. If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Slot 1 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
2: Slot 2 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
Explanation
(1) Only a 4-MB flash memory card can be formatted.
(2) The flash memory card can be roughly divided into the PC save area and the
writable character storage area. They can be formatted (initialized) either
separately or at the same time.
(3) When using a new flash memory card, the area to be used must be formatted
(initialized) before the PC interface command is saved or writable characters are
stored.
(4) After the flash memory card is formatted, the remaining memory is the PC save
area (895 Kbytes) and writable character storage area (3147 Kbytes). The
remaining memory is displayed on the LCD.
(5) When the flash memory card is used and the already stored data (PC interface
commands, writable characters, logos) is stored again, memory is consumed with
every storing unless the Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1) is
transmitted.
(6) When the label issue operation is performed after the Flash Memory Format
Command is sent, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
(7) When storing of writable characters, logos, or PC interface commands is not
continued, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation)
after about 10 seconds. In this case, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
Refer to
Example
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
[ESC] J1; A, 1 [LF] [NUL]
- 195 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.20 ATA CARD FORMAT COMMAND
[ESC] JA
Function
Format
Term
Formats (initializes) the ATA card for storage.
[ESC] JA; a [LF] [NUL]
a: Drive
1: Slot 1 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
2: Slot 2 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
Explanation
(1) Only up to 128-MB ATA cards manufactured by SanDisk or Hitachi, can be used.
(2) When performing the label issue operation is performed after the ATA Card Format
Command is sent, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
(3) When storing of writable characters, logos, or PC interface commands is not
continued, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation)
after about 10 seconds. In this case, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
(4) Before the ATA card is formatted, the Web printer function should be set to OFF.
Refer to
Example
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XA)
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XV)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
[ESC] JA; 2 [LF] [NUL]
- 196 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.21 2-BYTE WRITABLE CHARACTER CODE RANGE COMMAND
[ESC] XE
Function
Sets the code range when a 2-byte writable character code is stored in flash ROM on
the CPU board.
Format
Term
[ESC] XE; a1a1a1a1, b1b1b1b1, a2a2a2a2, b2b2b2b2 ------, anananan, bnbnbnbn [LF] [NUL]
aaaa:
bbbb:
First character code for each range
2020 to FFFF (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)
No. of characters for each range
0001 to 4000 (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)
Explanation
(1) For a 2-byte character code such as Kanji, the character code range may be
divided into two or more. The control information area for the unnecessary
codes can be deleted by designating the character code range, and the capacity
of flash memory is not wasted.
(2) The total number of characters for each range must not exceed 0x4000 (16384
characters).
(3) Up to 2700 can be designated for the range.
(4) A character code which is not appropriate for the setting for this command cannot
be stored.
(5) The first character code for each area to be set,p should be sent in the ascending
order. Each area must not overlap. If these are not satisfied, the operation is
not guaranteed.
Refer to
Example
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
In the case that Shift JIS 8140H to 83DFH:
Character data is present.
Character data is not present.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
8140
:
81F0
:
8240
:
82F0
:
8340
:
83D0
[ESC] XE; 8140, 00BD, 8240, 00B7, 8340, 00BD [LF] [NUL]
- 197 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.22 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND (For Flash Memory) [ESC] XD
Function
Writes writable characters and logos in the flash memory card or flash ROM on the
CPU board.
Format
Term
[ESC] XD; (Sj, ) aa, b, ccc, ddd, eee, fff, ggg, h, iii ------ iii [LF] [NUL]
Sj:
Drive in which writable characters or logos are stored
(Omissible. If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
j: Drive
0: Flash ROM on CPU board
1: Slot 1 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
2: Slot 2 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
aa:
Writable character set
• Flash memory card
01 to 40
41
42
43
44
16 × 16 dots
24 × 24 dots
32 × 32 dots
48 × 48 dots
• Flash ROM on the CPU board
01 to 40
41
42
43
44
51
16 × 16 dots
24 × 24 dots
32 × 32 dots
48 × 48 dots
2-byte code character
b(b): Writable character code
20H to FFH (Set in hex.)
40H to 7EH, 80H to FCH (When the writable character set is 41 to 44)
2020H to FFFFH (When the writable character is 51.)
ccc:
ddd:
eee:
fff:
Left offset
000 to 719 (in dots)
Top offset
000 to 719 (in dots)
Character width
001 to 720 (in dots)
Character height
001 to 720 (in dots)
ggg:
h:
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
000 to 999 (in dots)
Type of writable character data
0: Nibble mode (4 bits/byte)
1: Hex. mode (8 bits/byte)
iii --- iii: Writable character data to be stored
*
If each parameter for left offset, top offset, character width, character height, and
horizontal spacing/proportional spacing is fixed as “000”, the setting is ignored when
the writable character set is 41 to 44.
- 198 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.23 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND (For ATA Card)
[ESC] XA
Function
Format
Term
Writes writable characters and logos in the ATA card.
[ESC] XA, j, aa, b(b), ccc(c), ddd(d), eee(e), fff(f), ggg(g), h, iii ------ iii [LF] [NUL]
j:
Drive
1: Slot 1 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
2: Slot 2 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
aa:
Writable character set
01 to 40
41 16 × 16 dots
42 24 × 24 dots
43 32 × 32 dots
44 48 × 48 dots
51 to 55
(2-byte code character)
b(b): Writable character code
20H to FFH (Set in hex.)
40H to 7EH, 80H to FCH (When the writable character set is 41 to 44)
2020H to FFFFH (When the writable character set is 51 to 55)
ccc(c): Left offset
B-SX4T: 000 to 831 (in dots)
B-SX5T: 000 to 1535 (in dots)
ddd(d): Top offset
B-SX4T and B-SX5T: 000 to 5460 (in dots)
eee(e): Character width
B-SX4T: 000 to 832 (in dots)
B-SX5T: 000 to 1536 (in dots)
fff(f): Character height
B-SX4T and B-SX5T: 000 to 5460 (in dots)
ggg(g): Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
B-SX4T: 000 to 832 (in dots)
B-SX5T: 000 to 1536 (in dots)
h:
Type of writable character data
0: Nibble mode (4 bits/byte)
1: Hex. mode (8 bits/byte)
iii --- iii: Writable character data to be stored
*
If each parameter for left offset, top offset, character width, character height, and
horizontal spacing/proportional spacing is fixed as “000”, the setting is ignored when
the writable character set is 41 to 44.
- 199 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Explanation
(1) Type of writable character
Up to 44 and 49 writable character sets can be stored for the flash card and the
ATA card, respectively. However, the maximum number of characters varies
depending on the writable character size and number of characters because of
the limited memory capacity. For writable character sets 41 to 44, each writable
character size is fixed.
(2) Character code
Up to 224 characters can be stored per character set. The maximum number of
characters are 40 sets × 224 characters = 8960 characters. It varies depending
on the writable character size and the number of characters because of the limited
memory capacity. For character sets 41 to 44, a character code consisting of 1
byte is stored. However, when the character code is called up, F0H is added to
the upper digit of it, and consists of 2 bytes. In this case, up to 188 characters
can be stored per character set.
(3) Only a 4-MB flash memory card can be used for storing a writable character.
(4) The configuration of the writable character file stored in the ATA card is as follows.
1st byte
2nd byte
3rd byte
4th byte
5th byte
6th byte
7th byte
8th byte
9th byte
10th byte
11th byte
No. of dots for left offset
(from upper to lower)
No. of dots for top offset
(from upper to lower)
No. of dots for character height
(from upper to lower)
No. of dots for character width
(from upper to lower)
No. of dots for horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
(from upper to lower)
Writable character data (Hex. data)
(If it is stored in the nibble mode, data is 8 bits/byte.)
(5) When writable characters are stored in the ATA card, the “GAIJI” directory is
created, and then the directory for each writable character set is created under the
“GAIJI” directory level as shown on the next page. One writable character file is
created in the writable character set directory per writable character.
- 200 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-byte writable character
0100
W/C = Writable character
01000020. UDF (W/C file for character code 20H)
01000021. UDF (W/C file for character code 21H)
01000022. UDF (W/C file for character code 22H)
ATA card
GAIJI
(Writable character 01)
0101
(Writable character 02)
0102 Each W/C file
(Writable character 03)
Each W/C file
010000FD. UDF (W/C file for character code FDH)
010000FE. UDF (W/C file for character code FEH)
010000FF. UDF (W/C file for character code FFH)
0126
(Writable character 39)
0127 Each W/C file
Each W/C file
(Writable character 40)
Writable character with Kanji size
001A
001A0040. UDF (W/C file for character code 40H)
001A0041. UDF (W/C file for character code 41H)
(Writable character 41)
001B
(Writable character 42)
001C Each W/C file
(Writable character 43)
001D Each W/C file
Each W/C file
001A007E. UDF (W/C file for character code 7EH)
001A0080. UDF (W/C file for character code 80H)
001A0081. UDF (W/C file for character code 81H)
(Writable character 44)
001A00FC. UDF (W/C file for character code FCH)
2-byte writable character
0200
02002020. UDF (W/C file for character code 2020H)
02002021. UDF (W/C file for character code 2021H)
02002022. UDF (W/C file for character code 2022H)
(Writable character 51)
0201
(Writable character 52)
0202 Each W/C file
(Writable character 53)
0203 Each W/C file
(Writable character 54)
0204 Each W/C file
(Writable character 55)
Each W/C file
0200FFFD. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFDH)
0200FFFE. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFEH)
0200FFFF. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFFH)
• How to assign the directory name for a writable character set
Directory name for writable character 01
Directory name for writable character 02
→
→
“0100”
“0101”
Directory name for writable character 39
Directory name for writable character 40
Directory name for writable character 41
→
→
→
“0126”
“0127”
“001A”
Directory name for writable character 44
Directory name for writable character 51
→
→
“001D”
“0200”
Directory name for writable character 55
→
“0204”
• How to assign the file name
0100 0022. UDF (Writable character 01: writable character file for character code 22H)
Identifier indicating the writable character file
Character code (2-byte code: Code 22H)
Writable character set (Writable character 01: Same as the directory name)
- 201 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6)
Top
offset
22 dots
Char.
height
31 dots
Base line
Reference
point
Reference point
of next char.
Left
offset
Char. width
26 dots
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
30 dots
(7) Writable character set: 01 to 40, 51 to 55
Char. width 26 dots
Nibble mode
1
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
30H
3FH
30H
3CH
30H
37H
3FH
3CH
30H
30H
30H
10
11
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Char.
height
31 dots
240 30H
241 3FH 242 3FH 243 3FH 244 3CH 245 30H 246 30H 247 30H 248 30H
Hex. mode
1
5
2
6
3
4
00H
0FH
7FH
C0H
00H
FCH
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
120 00H
121 FFH 122 FCH 123 00H 124 00H
- 202 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 248). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as
data 0.
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:
Data count of writable characters to be stored =
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots × 2
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 124).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as
data 0.
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:
Data count of writable characters to be stored =
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.
Notes
(1) With the same writable character set designated, character width and character height can be
designated for each writable character code. In other words, character size can be changed
for each character, thus saving memory.
(2) Proportional spacing and descending characters are possible depending on the parameters
of horizontal spacing/proportional spacing, left offset, and top offset.
(3) When top offset is 000, the reference coordinates are at the above left when drawing because
the base line is at the top. (Coordinate setting is facilitated for logos.)
- 203 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(8) Writable character set: 41 (16×16 dots )
Nibble mode
Character width 16 dots
1
5
2
6
3
4
30H
30H
30H
31H
30H
38H
30H
7
•
Character
height
16 dots
•
•
58
62
59
63
60
64
31H
30H
38H
30H
30H
30H
61
30H
Hex. mode
4
4
4
4
1
5
2
6
3
4
00H
01H
00H
80H
01H
01H
80H
8
8
7
•
•
•
26
30
27
31
28
32
80H
80H
01H
00H
80H
00H
29
01H
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 64). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 64 bytes.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 32).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 32 bytes.
* When writable character 41 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 16
dots.
- 204 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) Writable character set: 42 (24×24 dots )
Character width 24 dots
Nibble mode
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
5
6
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
33H
30H
30H
30H
•
•
•
•
•
Character
height
24 dots
137 30H 138 30H
139 30H 140 30H 141 30H 142 30H 143 30H 144 30H
Hex. mode
1
4
2
5
3
6
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
4
4
4
4
4
4
3CH
•
8
8
8
•
•
•
67
70
68
71
69
72
00H
00H
3CH
00H
00H
00H
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 144). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 144 bytes.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 72).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 72 bytes.
* When writable character 42 is designated, the width and height of the character are both
24 dots.
- 205 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(10) Writable character set: 43 (32×32 dots)
Character width 32 dots
Nibble mode
1
8
2
9
3
4
5
6
7
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
37H
30H
30H
10
11
12
30H
•
•
•
•
•
Character
height
32 dots
248 30H 249 30H
250 30H 251 30H 252 30H 253 30H 254 30H 255 30H 256 30H
Hex. mode
1
5
2
6
3
4
00H
00H
00H
07H
C0H
C0H
00H
7
•
•
•
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
•
123 C0H 124 00H
125 00H 126 00H 127 00H 128 00H
8
8
8
8
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 256). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 256 bytes.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 128).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 128 bytes.
* When writable character 43 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 32
dots.
- 206 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(11) Writable character set: 44 (48×48 dots)
Character width 48 dots
Nibble mode
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
5
6
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
30H
10
•
•
•
•
•
569 30H 570 30H
571 30H 572 30H 573 30H 574 30H 575 30H 576 30H
Character
height
48 dots
Nibble mode
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
5
6
00H
00H
00H
00H
00H
07H
00H
E0H
00H
00H
10
•
•
•
•
•
281 00H 282 00H
283 00H 284 00H 285 00H 286 00H 287 00H 288 00H
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 576). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 576 bytes.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 288).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 288 bytes.
* When writable character 44 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 48
dots.
- 207 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
(1) No matter what character set or character code is selected, no memory will be
wasted.
(2) When a new writable character is stored, the Flash Memory Format Command
([ESC] J1) or the ATA Card Format Command ([ESC] JA) must be transmitted.
(3) A character code already stored can be stored in the flash memory card again if
the Bit Map Writable Character Store Command ([ESC] XD) is transmitted, but
memory will be consumed with every storage. Memory can be efficiently used by
sending the Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1) before storing.
(4) If a flash memory card is used, and a label issue operation is performed after
sending the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD), the image buffer is
cleared automatically.
(5) When the storing operation is not continued after storing the writable character
and logos, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation)
after about 10 seconds. In this case, when the flash memory card is used, the
image buffer will be cleared automatically.
(6) Only a 4-MB flash memory card manufactured by Maxell can be used for storing a
writable character.
Refer to
Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
ATA Card Format Command ([ESC] JA)
- 208 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
Writable character set:
03
Writable character code: 70H
Top
offset
22 dots
Char.
height
31 dots
Base line
Reference
point of next
char.
Reference
point
Left offset
2 dots
Char. width 26 dots
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
30 dots
[ESC] J1; C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XD; 03, p, 002, 022, 026, 031, 030, 0, 000?<000?<7??800?<???<00?=?03>001?
<00?001?8007001?0007801>0003801>0003<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01>
0001<01>0003<01>0003801?0007801?800?001?<01?001=?07>001<???<001<7??8001<0?<
0001<0000001<0000001<0000001<000000???<0000???<0000???<0000 [LF] [NUL]
* 30H = ”0”
31H = ”1”
32H = ”2”
33H = ”3”
34H = ”4”
35H = ”5”
36H = ”6”
37H = ”7”
38H = ”8”
39H = ”9”
3AH = ”:”
3BH = ”;”
3CH = ”<”
3DH = ”=”
3EH = ”>”
3FH = ”?”
- 209 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.24 GRAPHIC COMMAND
[ESC] SG
Function
Format
Draws graphic data.
[ESC] SG; aaaa(D), bbbb(D), cccc, dddd, e, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]
or
[ESC] SG0; aaaa(D), bbbb(D), cccc, dddd, e, ffff, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]
Term
aaaa(D): Print origin of X-coordinate for drawing graphic data
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
* If “D” is attached after a 4-digit value, the coordinate is specified in dots.
0000D ~
bbbb(D): Print origin of Y-coordinate for drawing graphic data
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
* If “D” is attached after a 4- or 5-digit value, the coordinate is specified in
dots.
0000D ~
cccc:
dddd:
No. of graphic width dots
Fixed as 4 digits (in dots)
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected,
this designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is
contained in the graphic data.)
No. of graphic height dots
4 or 5 digits (in dots)
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected,
this designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is
contained in the graphic data.)
When “3: TOPIX compression mode” is selected for the type of graphic data:
Resolution of graphic data:
*only two types
0150: 150 DPI (The data is drawn in double resolution.)
0300: 300 DPI (The data is drawn in single resolution.)
e:
Type of graphic data
[ESC] SG; -- command:
0: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing
1: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte)
2: BMP file mode
Overwrite drawing
Overwrite drawing
3: TOPIX compression mode Overwrite drawing
4: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) OR drawing
5: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte)
6: PCX file mode
OR drawing
Overwrite drawing
7: TOPIX compression mode XOR drawing
[ESC] SG0; -- command:
A: Printer driver compression mode
Overwrite drawing
- 210 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ffff:
Data count (Effective only for [ESC] SG0; -- command)
Fixed as 4 digits
Represents the total number of bytes for the compressed graphic data by 32
bits in Hex.
Range: 0 to 4,294,967,295 bytes
(00H, 00H, 00H, 00H to FFH, FFH, FFH, FFH)
ggg --- ggg: Graphic data
Explanation
(1) When the graphic data “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “6”, or “A” is selected, the graphic data is
drawn by overwriting the image buffer.
(2) When the graphic data “4” or “5” is selected, the graphic data is drawn by carrying
out OR between the graphic data and the data in the image buffer.
Backing paper
Label
Backing paper
Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Print origin of
coordinates
Graphic
height dots
Effective
print length
Effective
print length
Graphic
height dots
Print origin of
coordinates
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Graphic width
dots
Graphic width
dots
Effective
Effective
print width
print width
X
Y
0
Paper feed direction
Paper feed direction
Y
X
0
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]
[Print direction: Printing top first]
- 211 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Print origin of
coordinates
Graphic width 19 dots
Nibble mode
1
7
2
8
3
4
5
6
30H
30H
30H
30H
33H
30H
30H
30H
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Graphic
height
22 dots
126 30H
127 33H 128 3FH 129 30H 130 30H 131 30H 132 30H
Hex. mode
1
4
2
5
3
00H
00H
30H
00H
38H
•
•
•
•
•
4
4
4
4
4
4
63
66
00H
00H
8
8
8
64
65
3FH
00H
[Nibble mode]
(1) The graphic data is separated into four dot units and sent in the following
order (1 → 132). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The graphic data is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are
transmitted as data 0.
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic
height dots × 2
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The graphic data is separated into eight dot units and sent in the following
order (1 → 66).
(2) The graphic data is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are
transmitted as data 0.
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic
height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.
- 212 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[When TOPIX compression mode is selected]
Range for length
First line
Second line
Graphic data
Length L1
L1
L2
L3
(1) Length: Total number of bytes of the graphic data (0001H ~ )
0 0 1 4
Ex. Length = 20 bytes:
(2) L1 parameter: Shows in which large block (512 dots/block) the changed data is contained.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L1
0: Not present
1: Present
512 dots 512 dots 512 dots
(3) L2 parameter: Shows in which medium block (64 dots/block) the changed data is contained
(of the L1 large block).
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L2
0: Not present
1: Present
64 dots
64 dots
64 dots
(4) L3 parameter: Shows in which small block (8 dots/block) the changed data is contained (of
the L2 medium block).
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L3
0: Not present
1: Present
8 dots
8 dots
8 dots
Exclusive-OR is carried out between the current image data and the
image data one line previous. Only the changed bit is set to ON (1).
The alignment of dots is MSB (left dots) and LSB (right dots).
*
The graphic width for only the smaller value of either the designated value or the max. buffer
size (512 KB) is drawn. The minimum unit of the data drawing is 8 dots (1 byte). If the
graphic width is set to 3 dots, it will be reset to 8 dots (1 byte).
- 213 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[When the printer driver compression mode is selected]
(1) For the [ESC] SG0; -- command, only “A: Printer driver compression mode” can be selected
for the type of graphic data. The parameter for the data count is attached after the
parameter for the type of graphic data. When the total number of data cannot be provided
by the printer driver, “00H, 00H, 00H, 00H” should be specified for the number of graphic
data. However, in this case, the printer diver cannot support printing through a serial
interface (RS-232C).
(2) How to compress data
Compression is performed for every data of one line specified for the number of graphic
width dots.
The data is made up in units of 8 dots. A repeated value is encoded in 2 bytes. The first
byte is a numeric value n indicating that a value is repeated (-n + 1) times.
The range is between -127 and -1. The second byte is the repeated value.
If a value is not repeated, the first byte is the numeric value m. The length of the values is
indicated in (m+1). The range of “m” is between 0 and 126. The length of the repetition of
the value “n” and ”m” should not exceed 127 and 126, respectively.
If it exceeds the range, it should be divided into blocks of repetition.
When the same contents as the data for 1 line appear repeatedly in the next line and after,
the number of lines in which the same contents appear is encoded in 2 bytes. The first byte
is fixed as 127. The second byte indicates “N” times that the same contents are repeated.
Its range is between 1 and 255. “N” should not exceed 255. If it exceeds the range, the
data for the excess number of times should be compressed as the new data of 1 line, and
the remaining number of repetitions should be encoded.
[Example]
Data before being compressed (Width: 120 dots, Height: 300 lines)
Line No.
1
Graphic data
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh
FFh FFh
2
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh
FFh FFh
299
300
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh
FFh FFh
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh
FFh FFh
Data after being compressed
Line No.
1
Graphic data
FAh AAh 03h BBh CCh DDh EEh FEh FFh
2 to 256
257
7FH FFH
FAh AAh 03h BBh CCh DDh EEh FEh FFh
7FH 2BH
258 to 300
FEh = -2
-(-2) + 1 = 3
FFh is repeated 3 times.
03h = 3
3 + 1 = 4
4-byte data (BBh CCh DDh EEh) without
repetition
FAh = -6
-(-6) + 1 = 7
AAh is repeated 7 times.
- 214 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes
(1) The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of drawing the
graphic data will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set
Command ([ESC] D).
(2) The number of graphic width dots and the number of graphic height dots must
also be set so that the result of drawing the graphic data will be within the effective
print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D) in the same manner as
the above.
(3) Both width and height are 8 dots/mm and 12 dots/mm for the B-SX4T and the B-
SX5T, respectively.
(4) The actual result of drawing may deviate within ±0.5 mm and ±0.33 mm for the B-
SX4T and the B-SX5T, respectively, in the X direction with respect to the
designated print origin of the X-coordinate.
To draw the received graphic data at high speed, the data is directly
developed in the image buffer without applying correction to each bit with
respect to the designated X-coordinate. Consequently, an error of up to 4
bits occurs.
[Effective print area]
[mm]
Model
B-SX4T
B-SX5T
Cut
Cut
Swing
cutter
Rotary cutter
Swing
cutter
Rotary cutter
Head-up
Head-up
Head-up
Head-up
Issue mode Batch
Strip
Batch
Strip
operation operation
operation operation
Item
not
performed
not
performed
performed
performed
Effective print width
Min.
10.0
10.0
Max.
104.0
128.0
Effective print
length
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
30.0
3 ips:
79.0
3 ips:
23.0
Label Min.
6.0
8.0
21.4
23.0 6 ips:
6 ips:
30.0
6.0
21.4
23.0 5 ips:
5 ips:
23.0
91.0
87.0
10 ips: – 10 ips: –
(NOTE 1) (NOTE 1)
1492.0
8 ips:
8 ips:
23.0
98.0
Max.
1496.0
1496.0
1492.0
3 ips: 28.0
3 ips: 28.0
23.4 5 ips: 28.0
8 ips: 36.0
Tag Min.
–
–
23.4 6 ips: 28.0
8.0
–
–
10 ips: – (NOTE 1)
1498.0
Max. 1498.0
1498.0
1498.0
NOTE 1: The use of the rotary cutter at 10 ips is not supported for the B-SX4T.
- 215 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
10.0 mm
Origin
(0, 0)
24.0 mm
Graphic width 19 dots
Graphic
height
22 dots
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0022, 0, 003000003800003<00003>000037000033800031
<00030<00030>00030600030>00030<00031<00033800?33003??0007??000???000??
>000??>0007? <0003?0000 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
* 30H = “0”
31H = “1”
32H = “2”
33H = “3”
34H = “4”
35H = “5”
36H = “6”
37H = “7”
38H = “8”
39H = “9”
3AH = “:”
3BH = “;”
3CH = “<”
3DH = “=”
3EH = “>”
3FH = “?”
- 216 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[TOPIX compression mode]
10.0 mm
Origin
(0, 0)
24.0 mm
Graphic width 19 dots
Graphic
height
22 dots
[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0300, 3, 00 5C 80 80 40 30
Length
L1 L2 L3 Data (1st line)
80 80 40 08 80 80 40 04 80 80 40 02 80 80 40 09
(2nd line)
(3rd line)
(4th line)
(5th line)
80 80 60 04 80 80 80 60 02 40 80 80 40 01 80 80 20 20
(6th line)
(7th line)
(8th line)
(9th line)
80 80 20 80 80 80 20 80 80 80 20 20
(10th line) (11th line) (12th line)
80 80 40 01
(13th line)
80 80 60 02 40 80 80 A0 0F 80 80 80 C0 30 C3 80 80 80 40
(14th line) (15th line) (16th line) (17th line)
80 80 80 80 80 80 40 10 00 80 80 C0 80 20 80 80 C0 40 C0 [LF] [NUL]
(18th line) (19th line)(20th line) (21st line) (22nd line)
- 217 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.25 SAVE START COMMAND (For Flash Memory)
[ESC] XO
Function
Declares the start of saving PC interface commands.
(Places the printer in the mode where PC interface commands are written in flash
memory.)
Format
Term
[ESC] XO; aa, (Sb, ) c [LF] [NUL]
aa: Identification number to be used for saving in flash memory or calling
01 to 99
Sb: Drive in which the PC interface command is stored
(Omissible. If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
b: Drive
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Slot 1 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
2: Slot 2 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
c: Status response at save time
0: No status response made
1: Status response made
Notes
(1) After sending the Save Start Command ([ESC] XO), any command other than the
following will be saved into flash memory without being analyzed.
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
• Saved Data Call Command ([ESC] XQ, [ESC] XT)
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD, [ESC] XA)
• Reset Command ([ESC] WR)
• Status Request Command ([ESC] WS)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• ATA Card Format Command ([ESC] JA)
(2) No error check is made for the commands at save time.
(3) Up to 64 KB can be saved per a save.
Refer to
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
Examples
[ESC] J1; B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XO; 01, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]
- 218 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.26 SAVE START COMMAND (For ATA Card)
[ECS] XV
Function
Declares the start of saving PC interface commands.
(Places the printer in the mode where PC interface commands are written in the ATA
card.)
Format
Term
[ESC] XV; dddddddd, b, c [LF] [NUL]
dddddddd:
Identifier to be used for saving in the ATA card or calling
File name using from 1 to 8 characters
Available characters:
A to Z:
0 to 9:
A to Z (in both upper and lower case)
Numerals from 0 to 9
Symbols: !, ”, #, $, %, &, ’, ), (, -, ^, _, {, }, ¯
b: Drive
1: Slot 1 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
2: Slot 2 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
c: Status response at save time
0: No status response made
1: Status response made
Explanation
(1) When the PC interface command is stored in the ATA card, directory “PCSAVE” is
created, and then the directory “Specified file name. PCS” is created under the
“PCSAVE” directory level.
(2) Up to about 1 MB can be saved per a save.
Notes
(1) After sending the Save Start Command ([ESC] XV), any command other than the
following will be saved into the ATA card without being analyzed.
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
• Saved Data Call Command ([ESC] XQ, [ESC] XT)
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD, [ESC] XA)
• Reset Command ([ESC] WR)
• Status Request Command ([ESC] WS)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• ATA Card Format Command ([ESC] JA)
(2) No error check is made for the commands at save time.
Refer to
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] JA)
Examples
[ESC] JA; B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XV; PC_SAVE, 1, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL
- 219 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.27 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND
[ESC] XP
Declares the termination of saving PC interface commands.
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]
Function
Format
Note
If the storing operation is not continued after the PC interface command is stored, the
printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about 10 seconds. In this
case, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.
Refer to
Save Start Command ([ESC] XO, [ESC] XV)
- 220 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.28 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND (For Flash Memory)
[ESC] XQ
Function
Format
Term
Calls PC interface commands saved in flash memory.
[ESC] XQ; aa, (Sb,) c, d [LF] [NUL]
aa: Identification number of the file to be called from the flash memory card
01 to 99
Sb: Drive from which the command is called
(Omissible. If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
b: Drive
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: Slot 1 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
2: Slot 2 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
c:
d:
Status response when the data is called up
0: No status response made
1: Status response made
Auto call at power on time
L: Auto call
M: No auto call
Notes
(1) If the relevant save identification number is not found, an error will result.
(2) However, if no save identification number subject to auto call is found with the
option for auto call at power on time selected, the option for no auto call will be
selected causing no error.
(3) If a command error is found in the PC interface command in auto call at power on
time by the Saved Data Call Command, a command error will result. After an
error has occurred, the power must be turned off. The option for no auto call is
selected when the power is turned on again.
(4) The printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) when the Save Data
Call Command is sent after the Save Terminate Command.
Refer to
•
•
Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
Examples
[ESC] XQ; 01, 0, L [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 100 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 221 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.29 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND (For ATA Card)
[ESC] XT
Function
Format
Term
Calls PC interface commands saved in the ATA card.
[ESC] XT; dddddddd, b, c, d [LF] [NUL]
dddddddd: Identifier for the file to be called from the ATA card
File name within 8 characters
b:
c:
d:
Drive
1: Slot 1 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
2: Slot 2 on the PCMCIA board (Option)
Status response when the data is called up
0: No status response made
1: Status response made
Auto call at power on time
L: Auto call
M: No auto call
Notes
(1) If the relevant save identifier is not found, an error will result.
(2) However, if no save number subject to auto call is found with the option for auto
call at power on time selected, the option for no auto call will be selected causing
no error.
(3) If a command error is found in the PC interface command in auto call at power on
time by the Saved Data Call Command, a command error will result. After an
error has occurred, the power must be turned off. The option for no auto call is
selected when the power is turned on again.
(4) The printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) when the Save Data
Call Command is sent after the Save Terminate Command.
Refer to
•
•
Save Start Command ([ESC] XV)
Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
Examples
[ESC] XT; PC_SAVE, 1, 0, M [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 100 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
- 222 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.30 HEAD BROKEN DOTS CHECK COMMAND
[ESC] HD
Function
Format
Checks the thermal head for broken dots.
[ESC] HD001 (, a) [LF] [NUL].................All broken dots check
[ESC] HD003, s1s1s1s1, e1e1e1e1, s2s2s2s2, e2e2e2e2,--- s8s8s8s8, e8e8e8e8 (, a) [LF] [NUL]
.......................................................
Partial broken dots check
Term
a: Check result status response (Omissible)
A: Status response made
(If omitted, the check result status response is not made.)
s1s1s1s1 --- s8s8s8s8: Start coordinate of partition Fixed as 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
e1e1e1e1 --- e8e8e8e8: End coordinate of partition Fixed as 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
Explanation
(1) The Head Broken Dots Check Command is subject to batch processing. If the
Label Issue Command for 100 labels is transmitted, followed by the Head Broken
Dots Check Command, the head broken dots check will be executed after issuing
100 labels.
(2) For the all broken dots check, the head broken dots check will be made on all the
heater elements of the thermal head.
(3) If the check result is found to be normal when the check result status response is set
so that it is not made, the next command is processed. If the check result is found
to be abnormal, an error occurs. Whether or not the status is sent when an error
occurs is determined according to the setting for the status response specified by
the Issue Command.
If the check result is found to be normal when the check result status response is
set, a head broken dots check normal end status is sent, and then the next
command is processed. If the check result is found to be abnormal, the head
broken dots error status is sent, and then the printer stops.
Status for normal end
[SOH] [STX] “0020000” [EXT] [EOT] [CR] [LF]
Status for head broken dots error
[SOH] [STX] “1720000” [EXT] [EOT] [CR] [LF]
(4) All broken dots check takes approx. 1 second.
(5) Partial broken dots check:
• Up to 8 positions for the range can be designated. However, the range is
omissible, if it is less than 8 positions.
• When the value set for the start coordinate is larger than the value set for the end
coordinate, the end coordinate is recognized and processed as the start
coordinate, and the start coordinate is recognized and processed as the end
coordinate.
• Plural coordinates specifying the range can be designated at the same time.
• If a coordinate beyond the head width is specified, it is processed the same as
when the max. value is designated. Therefore, a command error does not
occur.
Examples
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] HD001 [LF] [NUL]
- 223 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.31 MESSAGE DISPLAY COMMAND
[ESC] XJ
Function
Format
Displays the message on the upper line of the LCD.
[ESC] XJ; aaa ------ aaa [LF] [NUL]
Term
aaa ------ aaa: Display data (16 digits)
Explanation
When the printer receives the Message Display Command, it displays the message on
the upper line of the LCD then enters a pause state after processing the received data
(after completing the label issue, if the Issue Command has been sent).
The pause state is cleared by pressing the [RESTART] key and the LCD displays the
normal message. After the pause state is cleared, the printer resumes processing the
received data following the Message Display Command.
Notes
(1) 16 characters are displayed. When the display data is less than 16 characters,
the blank data is processed as spaces. When the display data exceeds 16
characters, the excess data is discarded.
(2) During a pause, a halt due to an error, or a head open state, the Message Display
Command is not processed even if it is received. In this case, the command is
processed after the above state is cleared.
(3) The following data can be displayed.
If a code other than the following data is received, “?” is displayed or a command
error results.
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
B
C
D
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
.
^
→
←
/
_
*
The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.
- 224 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Examples
c Load paper.
d Feed one label.
e Issue 4 labels.
41.0
mm
S a m p l e
76.2
mm
73.2
mm
15.0 mm
82.0 mm
f Message “Please set [Tag]” is displayed.
g Change paper.
h Press the [RESTART] key.
i Feed one label.
j Issue 2 labels.
10.0
mm
60.0
mm
57.0
mm
20.0 mm
50.0 mm
[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XJ; Please set [Tag] [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0600, 0500, 0570 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0100, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; 12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0011C3001 [LF] [NUL]
- 225 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.32 RESET COMMAND
[ESC] WR
Function
Format
Returns the printer to its initial state.
[ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
The printer is returned to the same state as when the power is turned on. When the
printer receives this command during printing, it returns to its initial state after issuing
the label which is being printed. The next command must not be sent while the printer
is performing initial processing after this command is transmitted.
Notes
(1) When the printer receives a command in the system mode, only the Reset
Command can be processed and any other commands cannot be processed.
(2) If a command error or communication error occurs when receiving the Reset
Command, the error message is displayed in the online mode. However, it is not
displayed in the system mode.
(3) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or the
Graphic Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Reset Command is not processed
until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.
Example
[ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]
- 226 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.33 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND
[ESC] WS
Function
Format
Sends the printer status to the host computer.
[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
This command makes the printer send its status regardless of the setting of “status
response/no status response.” The status to be transmitted is the current printer
status, and indicates the latest status only. The remaining count indicates the
remaining count of the batch currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch
waiting to be printed is transmitted.
Notes
(1) This command is available for the RS-232C, USB, Centronics interfaces, and
socket communications. However, when SPP mode of Centronics is selected,
the printer returns a status to the Nibble mode negotiation immediately after this
command is received. When ECP mode of Centronics is selected, the printer
returns a status to the reverse request immediately after this command is
received.
(2) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.
(3) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not
processed until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.
(4) A max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the printer sends the status after
receiving the Status Request Command.
(5) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next
Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is
less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the Status Request Command.
Example
[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]
- 227 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.34 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND
[ESC] WB
Function
Sends information on the printer status and the free space of the receive buffer to the
host.
Format
[ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
(1) This command makes the printer send information on its status and free space of
the receive buffer regardless of the setting of “status response/no status
response.” The status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and
indicates the latest status only. The remaining count indicates the remaining
count of the batch currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch
waiting to be printed is transmitted. Free space of the receive buffer for the
interface which sent this command, is returned to the host.
Notes
(1) This command is available for the RS-232C, USB, Centronics interfaces, and
socket communications. However, when SPP mode of Centronics is selected,
the printer returns a status to the Nibble mode negotiation immediately after this
command is received. When ECP mode of Centronics is selected, the printer
returns a status to the reverse request immediately after this command is
received.
(2) The printer returns the status only for the interface which sent this command to
the host.
(3) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not
processed until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.
(4) A max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the printer sends the status after
receiving the Status Request Command.
(5) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next
Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is
less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the next Status Request
Command.
Example
[ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
- 228 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.35 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND
[ESC] WV
Function
Format
Sends information such as the program version of the printer.
[ESC] WV [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
(1) The format of the program version data (total 27 bytes of data) to be returned to
the host is as follows.
SOH
STX
01H
02H
30H
31H
48H
49H
56H
32H
30H
30H
32H
42H
2DH
53H
58H
34H
54H
20H
56H
31H
2EH
30H
41H
03H
04H
0DH
0AH
“0”
“1”
“N”
“O”
“V”
“2”
“0”
“0”
“2”
“B”
“-“
Creation date of program:
9 bytes of data indicated in order of Day-
Month-Year
Creation date
“S”
“X”
“4”
“T”
SP
“V”
“1”
“.”
Model:
Model
7 bytes of ASCII code indicating the
model
Program version:
5 bytes of data: Vx.xx
Revision
Version
“0”
“A”
Version
ETX
EOT
CR
LF
(2) This command is one of the command types that are processed as they are
received. Processing takes place starting from the ones received first. Until the
process of the command previously sent is completed, the next command is not
processed. Therefore, if the printer is not in the idle state when this command is
sent, the program version data may not be returned immediately.
Notes
(1) This command is effective only for the serial interface (RS-232C).
- 229 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.36 ATA CARD INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND
[ESC] WI
Function
Format
Term
Sends information regarding the use of the ATA card to the host.
[ESC] WI; a, b [LF] [NUL]
a: Drive
1: Slot 1
2: Slot 2
ATA card
ATA card
b: Information to be acquired
A: Free space
B: Writable character list
C: Stored PC command save file
Explanation
(1) The format of information to be returned to the host is as follows:
A: Free space
SOH STX “A” Slot
Free space (Kbyte)
ETX EOT CR
LF
01H 02H 41H xxH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Free space (in units of Kbytes):
000000 (KB) to 999999 (KB)
Slot:
“1” (31H): Slot 1
“2” (32H): Slot 2
When the ATA card is not inserted into a specified slot, “00H, 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H,
00H” is returned for free space.
B: Writable character list
Storage information of writable character
SOH STX “B” Slot
ETX EOT CR
LF
(55 bytes)
01H 02H 42H xxH “0”/“1” “0”/“1” ········ “0”/“1” “0”/“1” 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Writable character No. 55
Stored/Not stored
Writable character No. 54
Stored/Not stored
Writable character No. 02
Stored/Not stored
Writable character No. 01
Stored/Not stored
Slot
“0” (30H): Not stored
“1” (31H): Slot 1
“1” (31H): Stored
“2” (32H): Slot 2
If only one writable character is stored, information of the writable character No. is set to
“1” (Stored). The storage information of a specified character code can be acquired by
using the ATA Card Writable Character Information Acquire Command ([ESC] WG).
The storage information of the writable character has a total of 55 bytes. The writable
character No. is assigned from 01 to 44, and from 51 to 55. Therefore, bytes to which
Nos. 45 to 50 are assigned are sure to be set to “0” (30H). When the ATA card is not
inserted in the specified slot, “00H” for the storage information of the writable character
is returned.
- 230 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C: Stored PC command save file
Stored PC command save file name
SOH STX “C” Slot
01H 02H 43H xxH
ETX EOT CR
LF
03H 04H 0DH 0AH
File name 1 00H File name 2 00H ··· File name n
00H
File name (including extension):
“00H” should be placed between file
names.
Slot:
“1” (31H): Slot 1
“2” (32H): Slot 2
In the following cases, 1 byte of “00H” is returned as the stored PC command save
file name.
c There is no file.
d The ATA card has not been inserted in the specified slot.
(2) This command is one of the command types that are processed as they are
received. Processing takes place starting from the ones received first. Until the
process of the command previously sent is completed, this command is not
processed. Therefore, if the printer is not in the idle state when this command is
sent, the information data may not be returned immediately.
Note
(1) This command is effective only for the serial interface (RS-232C).
- 231 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.37 ATA CARD WRITABLE CHARACTER INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND
[ESC] WG
Function
Format
Term
Sends the writable character information stored in the ATA card to the host.
[ESC] WG; a, bb, cc [LF] [NUL]
a:
Drive
1: Slot 1 ATA card
2: Slot 2 ATA card
bb: Writable character set
01 to 44, 51 to 55
cc: Writable character code
If there is a 1-byte writable character, “00H” should be attached to the top of the
data to make it 2 bytes.
Explanation
(1) The format of information to be returned to the host is as follows:
Writable
character set
Character
code
SOH STX “D” Slot
Storage
“0”/“1”
ETX EOT CR
LF
01H 02H 44H 3xH 3xH 3xH xxH xxH
03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Storage of writable character
“0”: Not stored
“1”: Stored
Character code (to be described in 2 bytes)
If there is 1-byte writable character, “00H”
is attached to the top of the data.
Writable character set
“01” (30H, 31H) to “44” (34H, 34H)
“51” (35H, 31H) to “55” (35H, 35H)
Slot
“1” (31H): Slot 1
“2” (32H): Slot 2
When the ATA card is not inserted in a specified slot, “00H” is returned for all
information from “Writable Character Set” to “Storage” (5 bytes).
Example
When the following information in the ATA card in Slot 1 is acquired:
Writable character set 44, writable character code 41H
[ESC] WG; 1, 44, (0x00) (0x41) [LF} [NUL]
* (0x00) represents data of 00H.
* (0x41) represents data of 41H.
- 232 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.38 PRINTER OPTION STATUS ACQUIRE COMMAND
[ESC] WN
Function
Format
Sends the information what optional devices are installed, to the host.
[ESC] WN [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
(1) The format of information to be returned to the host is as follows:
SOH STX “E”
Option status
ETX EOT CR LF
01H 02H 45H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Reserved A, B, and C
Internal serial port
30H: Not installed.
31H: RFID module (H1)
32H: RFID module (U1)
33H: RFID module (H2)
34H: RFID module (U2)
Cutter
30H: Not installed.
31H: Swing cutter
32H: Rotary Cutter
USB board
30H: Not installed.
31H: Installed
100Base LAN board
30H: Not installed.
31H: Installed
PCMCIA Slot2
30H: Not installed.
31H: ATA card
32H: LAN card
PCMCIA Slot1
30H: Not installed.
31: ATA card
- 233 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.39 IP ADDRESS SET COMMAND
[ESC] IP
Function
Format
Term
Sets the IP address to be required for the network connection.
[ESC] IP; a, bbb, ccc, ddd, eee [LF] [NUL]
a: IP address to be set
2: Printer IP address
3: Gateway IP address (Initial value: 0.0.0.0)
4: Subnet mask (Initial value: 255.255.255.0)
bbb: First 8 bits: 000 to 255
(Initial value: 192.168.10.20)
ccc: Second 8 bits: 000 to 255
ddd: Third 8 bits:
eee: Last 8 bits:
000 to 255
000 to 255
Explanation
The IP address setting can also be made in the system mode. The setting which was
last made takes effect.
Example
Function
Sets the printer IP address to “157.69.9.78”.
[ESC] IP; 2, 157, 069, 009, 078 [LF] [NUL]
Enables or disables the socket communication, and sets the communication port
number to be used.
Format
Term
[ESC] IS; a, bbbbb [LF] [NUL]
a:
0: Socket communication is disabled.
1: Socket communication is enabled.
bbbbb: Port number (It must be set in 5 digits.)
00000 to 65535
Explanation
Example
These settings can also be made in the system mode. The setting which was last
made takes effect.
To enable the socket communication and set the port number to “8000”.
[ESC] IS; 1, 08000 [LF] [NUL]
- 234 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.40 SOCKET COMMUNICATION PORT SET COMMAND
[ESC] IS
Function
Enables or disables the socket communication, and sets the communication port
number to be used.
Format
Term
[ESC] IS; a, bbbbb [LF] [NUL]
a:
0: Socket communication is disabled.
1: Socket communication is enabled.
bbbbb: Port number (It must be set in 5 digits.)
00000 to 65535
Explanation
Example
These settings can also be made in the system mode. The setting which was last
made takes effect.
To enable the socket communication and set the port number to “8000”.
[ESC] IS; 1, 08000 [LF] [NUL]
- 235 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.41 DHCP FUNCTION SET COMMAND
[ESC] IH
Function
Format
Term
Enables or disables the DHCP function, and sets the DHCP client ID.
[ESC] IH; a, bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb [LF] [NUL]
a:
0: DHCP function is disabled.
1: DHCP function is enabled.
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb: DHCP client ID
(16 bytes of data should be described in 32
bytes in Hex.)
Explanation
• These settings can also be made in the system mode. The setting which was last
made takes effect.
• “FFH” in the client ID is assumed as a terminator. Therefore, “FFH” must not be
used in data.
• If “FFH” is specified as the first byte of the DHCP client ID, the printer assumes the
DHCP client ID is not specified, and uses the MAC address of the LAN board installed
on the printer as the DHCP client ID.
Example
To enable the DHCP function and set the DHCP client ID to “12H56HCDH”.
[ESC] IH; 1, 1256CDFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF [LF] [NUL]
- 236 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.42 PASS-THROUGH COMMAND
[ESC] @002
Function
Format
Term
Passes the serial interface data through the internal serial interface (CN14).
[ESC] @002; aaa, bbb --- bbb [LF] [NUL]
aaa:
Number of bytes to be passed through
001 to 999
bbb --- bbb: Binary data to be passed through
Explanation
This command is used for making a serial communication with the RF-ID module. The
number of bytes of data specified by this command is output to the internal serial
interface (CN14: RF-ID) without being processed. Data received from the internal
serial interface (CN14: RF-ID) is output to the serial interface.
- 237 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3.43 INTERNAL SERIAL INTERFACE PARAMETER SET COMMAND
[ESC] IZ
Function
Format
Term
Sets communication parameters for the internal serial interface.
[ESC] IZ; a, b, c, d [LF] [NUL]
a:
Communication speed
0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
b:
c:
d:
Data length
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Stop bit length
0: 1 bit
1: 2 bits
Parity
0: None
1: Even
2: Odd
Explanation
The settings by this command take effect immediately after this command is analyzed.
(A restart of the printer is not required.) This command is saved into memory and is
kept even if the power is turned OFF.
When a communication error occurs in the internal serial interface, the ON LINE LED
goes off and the ERROR LED goes ON. “INTERNAL COM ERR” is displayed on the
upper LCD, and then the printer stops due to an error.
Example
To set the communication speed, the data length, the stop bit length, and the parity to
9600 bps, 8 bits, 1 bit, and even parity, respectively.
[ESC] IZ; 2, 1, 0, 1 [LF] [NUL]
- 238 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4 COMMANDS FOR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
6.4.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND
[ESC] Z2; 1
Function
Format
Term
Sets each parameter on the printer.
[ESC] Z2; 1, abcdefghijkklmnooppqqrstuuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJK [LF] [NUL]
a:
Character code selection
0: PC-850
1: PC-852
2: PC-857
3: PC-8
4: PC-851
5: PC-855
6: PC-1250
7: PC-1251
8: PC-1252
9: PC-1253
A: PC-1254
B: PC-1257
C: LATIN9
D: Arabic
E: UTF-8 (Supported by V4.4A or Xx.x only)
b:
c:
Font “0” selection
0: 0 (without slash)
1: 0 (with slash)
RS-232C communication speed
0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
5: 115200 bps
d:
e:
f:
RS-232C data length
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Stop bit length
0: 1 bit
1: 2 bits
RS-232C parity check
0: NONE
1: EVEN
2: ODD
- 239 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g:
RS-232C transmission control
0: XON/XOFF protocol
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the
power is turned OFF)
1: READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the
power is turned OFF)
2: XON/XOFF + READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol:
(XON output when the power is turned on, XOFF output when the power is
turned OFF)
3: XON/XOFF protocol:
(XON output when the power is turned on, XOFF output when the power is
turned OFF)
4: RTS protocol
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the
power is turned OFF)
h:
Language for LCD messages
0: ENGLISH
1: GERMAN
2: FRENCH
3: DUTCH
4: SPANISH
5: JAPANESE
6: ITALIAN
i:
j:
Forward feed standby after an issue
0: OFF (Not performed)
1: ON (Performed)
Fine adjustment direction for the stop position of the forward feed standby
+: Increase the length of the forward feed
-: Decrease the length of the forward feed
kk:
l:
Fine adjustment value for the stop position of the forward feed standby
00 to 50 (in units of 0.1 mm, in steps of 0.5 mm) (*1)
Head-up operation in the cut issue mode, or the use of the rewinder in the batch
issue mode.
0: OFF (Head-up operation is not performed/the rewinder is not used.)
1: ON (Head-up operation is performed/the rewinder is used.)
m:
n:
Ribbon saving system
0: OFF (Not used)
1: ON (Head lever position is “TAG”)
2: ON (Head lever position is “LABEL”)
Type of control code
0: Automatic selection
1: ESC, LF, NUL mode
2: {, |, } mode
3: Any set code mode
- 240 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
oo: 1st byte code of the control code (*2)
“00” to “FF” (Specify the hex code in 2 bytes of ASCII code.) (*3)
pp: 2nd byte code of the control code (*2)
“00” to “FF” (Specify the hex code in 2 bytes of ASCII code.) (*3)
qq: 3rd byte code of the control code (*2)
“00” to “FF” (Specify the hex code in 2 bytes of ASCII code.) (*3)
r:
s:
t:
Peel-off wait status selection
0: OFF (No peel-off wait status selection)
1: ON (Peel-off wait status selection)
[FEED] key function
0: FEED: Feeds one label.
1: PRINT: Prints data of the image buffer on one label.
Kanji code selection
0: TYPE1
1: TYPE2
uu: Euro code setting
“20” to “FF” (Specify the hex code in 2 bytes of ASCII code) (*3)
v:
Automatic head broken dots check
0: OFF (When the power is turned on, the broken dots check is not
automatically performed.)
1: ON (When the power is turned on, the broken dots check is automatically
performed.)
w:
x:
y:
z:
Centronics ACK/BUSY timing setting
0: TYPE1
1: TYPE2
Web printer function setting
0: OFF (Web printer function is disabled.)
1: ON (Web printer function is enabled.)
Reset process when the nInit signal is ON
0: OFF (Reset process is not performed.)
1: ON (Reset process is performed.)
Ribbon near end detection setting
0: Not detected.
1: Detected when the remaining length of the ribbon is 30 m.
2: Detected when the remaining length of the ribbon is 70 m.
A:
B:
Expansion I/O operation mode setting
0: Standard mode
1: In-line mode
Centronics operation mode setting
0: SPP (Compatibility mode)
1: ECP (ECP mode)
- 241 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C:
D:
Plug-and-play operation mode setting
0: OFF (Plug-and-play operation is disabled.)
1: ON (Plug-and-play operation is enabled.)
Label end/ribbon end process setting
0: TYPE1 (When the label end state is detected, the printer stops even if it is
printing a label.)
1: TYPE2 (When the label end state is detected, the printer stops after it
completes printing a label.)
E:
F:
G:
H:
I:
Pre-peel-off process setting
0: OFF (The pre-peel-off process is not performed.)
1: ON (The pre-peel-off process is performed.)
Back feed speed setting
0: 3 ips
1: 2 ips
Installed solenoid type setting
0: TYPE 1 (TDS-12C)
1: TYPE 2 (TDS-16A: Stronger pull force type)
MaxiCode specification setting
0: TYPE1 (Compatible with the current version)
1: TYPE2 (Special specification)
Forward feed standby action
0: Mode 1
1: Mode 2
J:
Print head type setting
0: V1 type (B-SX4T: TPH104R2, B-SX5T: TPH128R4)
1: V2 type (B-SX4T: TPH104R7, B-SX5T: TPH128R5)
K:
XML specification setting (Supported by V4.4A or Xx.x only)
0: STD
1: ORACLE
Explanation
(1)
(2)
This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command take effect when the
power is turned on or the printer is reset.
*1: The value can be set in units of 0.1 mm. However, the value which is actually set
on the printer is in units of 0.5 mm. When a value from 0.0 mm to 0.4 mm is set, it
is actually set on the printer as 0.0 mm. Also when a value from 0.5 mm to 0.9
mm is set, it is actually set on the printer as 0.5 mm. This fine adjustment value is
set only when parameter “i” (Forward feed standby after an issue) is set to “1”
(Performed). If it is set to “0” (Not performed), this value is discarded.
*2 This fine adjustment value is set only when parameter “n” (Type of the control
code) is set to “3” (Any set code mode). If it is set to any value other than “3”, this
value is discarded.
*3 To specify the hex code to be set in 2 bytes of ASCII code as shown below:
Example 1: To set 36H: ”36” (33H, 36H)
Example 2: To set 42H: ”42” (34H, 32H)
Example 3: To set FFH: ”FF” (46H, 46H)
- 242 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT VALUE SET COMMAND
[ESC] Z2; 2
Function
Format
Term
Sets various fine adjustment values on the printer.
[ESC] Z2; 2, abbbcdddeffghhhijjkllmnnoppqqrr [LF] [NUL]
a:
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a feed length fine
adjustment is to be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
bbb: Feed length fine adjustment value
(*1)
000 to 500 (in units of 0.1 mm, in steps of 0.5 mm)
c:
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a cut position (or strip
position) fine adjustment is to be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
ddd: Fine adjustment value for the cut position (or strip position)
(*1)
000 to 500 (in units of 0.1 mm, in steps of 0.5 mm)
e:
Indicates whether the back feed is to be increased or decreased.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
ff:
g:
Back feed length fine adjustment value
(*1)
00 to 95 (in units of 0.1 mm, in steps of 0.5 mm)
Indicates the direction, positive or negative, in which the X-coordinate fine
adjustment is to be made.
+: Positive direction
-: Negative direction
hhh: X-coordinate fine adjustment value
(*1)
000 to 995 (in units of 0.1 mm, in steps of 0.5 mm)
i:
Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density in the thermal transfer print
mode.
+: Increase (darker)
-: Decrease (lighter)
jj:
k:
Print density fine adjustment value (for the thermal transfer print mode)
00 to 10 (in units of 1 step)
Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density in the direct thermal print
mode.
+: Increase (darker)
-: Decrease (lighter)
ll:
Print density fine adjustment value (for the direct thermal print mode)
00 to 10 (in units of 1 step)
m:
Fine adjustment direction for the ribbon rewind motor voltage
-: Fixed as Negative (The voltage is lowered.)
nn: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon rewind motor voltage
00 to 15 (in units of 1 step)
- 243 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
o:
Fine adjustment direction for the ribbon back tension motor voltage
-: Negative (The voltage is lowered.)
pp: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon back tension motor voltage
00 to 15 (in units of 1 step)
qq: Reflective sensor manual threshold fine adjustment value
00 to 40 (in units of 0.1 V)
rr:
Transmissive sensor manual threshold fine adjustment value
00 to 40 (in units of 0.1 V)
Explanation
(1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
(2) With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command take effect when the
power is turned on or the printer is reset.
*1: The value can be set in units of 0.1 mm. However, the value which is actually set
on the printer is in units of 0.5 mm. When a value from 0.0 mm to 0.4 mm is set, it
is actually set on the printer as 0.0 mm. Also when a value from 0.5 mm to 0.9
mm is set, it is actually set on the printer as 0.5 mm.
- 244 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4.3 RFID PARAMETER SET COMMAND
[ESC] Z2; 3
Function
Format
Term
Sets RFID related parameters on the printer.
[ESC] Z2; 3, abbcdddeeeffggghhijjkkkllmnnooppq [LF] [NUL]
a:
RFID module type selection
0: Not installed.
1: H1 (B-9704-RFID-H1-QM)
2: U1 (B-9704-RFID-U1-US/EU(-R))
3: H2 (B-SX704-RFID-H2)
4: U2 (B-SX704-RFID-U2-EU/US/CN/AU-R)
bb: Tag type
00: None
11: I-Code
12: Tag-it
13: C220
14: ISO15693
15: C210
16: C240
17: C320
21: EPC Class 0
22: EPC Class 1
23: ISO 18000-6B
24: EPC Class 1 Generation 2
c:
RFID error tag detection
(Invalid from firmware V4.7. This is programmed in the printer system mode.)
0: Not detected.
1: Detected.
ddd: Max. number of RFID issue retries
000 to 255
eee: Max. number of RFID read retries
000 to 255
ff:
RFID read retry time-out
00 to 99 (In units of 0.1 sec.: 0.0 sec. to 9.9 sec.)
ggg: Max. number of RFID write retries
000 to 255
hh: RFID write retry time-out
00 to 99 (In units of 0.1 sec.: 0.0 sec. to 9.9 sec.)
i:
Feed direction of adjustment for retry
+: Backward
−: Forward
jj:
Feed amount of adjustment for retry
00 to 99 (In units of 1 mm: 0 mm to 99 mm)
Only the value of −3 mm or less, or +3 mm or more becomes effective.
kkk:
RFID wireless power level
000 to 255
- 245 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ll:
RFID AGC threshold setting
00 to 15
m: RFID channel setting
0: AUTO
1: 2CH
2: 3CH
3: 4CH
4: 5CH
5: 6CH
6: 7CH
7: 8CH
nn: Q value
00 to 15
oo: AGC threshold for data write
00 to 15
pp: AGC threshold lower limit for retry
00 to 15
q: Hibiki tag multi-word write setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Explanation
(1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
(2) With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command take effect when the
power is turned on or the printer is reset.
- 246 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4.4 BATCH RESET COMMAND
[ESC] Z0 (zero)
Function
Format
Resets the printer.
[ESC] Z0 [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
• This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
• Some values in the Parameter Set Command ([ESC] Z2;1) and the Fine Adjustment
Value Set Command ([ESC Z2;2]), will take effect when the printer is initialized. This
command should be sent after the Parameter Set Command ([ESC] Z2;1) or Fine
Adjustment Value Set Command ([ESC] Z2;2) is sent.
- 247 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.5 EXPLANATION OF THE RFID RELATED COMMANDS
6.5.1 RFID TAG POSITION ADJUSTMENT COMMAND
[ESC] @003
Function
Sets the feed amount to adjust the RFID tag position before writing data onto it.
If the RFID tag is not positioned just above the RFID antenna when the paper is at the
print start position, the printer automatically feeds the paper forward or backward by the
specified amount to write data onto the RFID tag prior to printing.
Also, specifies the offset printing function which enables printing and writing data on
short-pitch tags at the same time.
Format
Term
[ESC] @003; abbbb(, c) [LF] [NUL]
a:
Feed direction
+: Backward
−: Forward
bbbb: Feed amount
0000 to 9999 (In units of 0.1 mm)
c:
Offset printing (Omissible)
0: Offset printing is not performed (normal operation). (Default)
1: Offset printing is performed without a reverse feed of the first label.
2: Offset printing is performed with a reverse feed of the first label.
Explanation
(1) The printer automatically feeds paper forward or backward before writing data onto
the RFID tag as specified in this command. After that, the printer returns the
paper to the print start position for printing.
(2) Only the value of −30 or less, or +30 or more becomes effective.
(3) When the head up function has been enabled, it will be performed when the feed
amount is set to −50 or less, or +50 or more .
(4) Transmitting the Image Buffer Clear Command clears the settings of this
command.
(5) This command is ignored for on-the-fly issues.
(6) The offset printing is a function that the printer prints on a label while writing data
onto the tag of a next label. This is useful to continuously issue multiple RFID
labels.
When using approx. 20-mm pitch labels, for example, a next label (Label 2) is
supposed to be positioned just above the antenna when the previous label (Label
1) is at the print position. In this case, enabling the offset printing eliminates a
need for a reverse feed to the tag write position, causing the total throughput to
increase.
Print head
Label 1
Label 2
RFID Antenna
Feed
direction
Label 3
Label 4
- 248 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When print data for several labels is transmitted to the printer, how the printer
performs printing and data write is explained for each of the offset printing
parameter options using the above illustration, as follows.
[0:Offset printing is not performed. (Normal operation)] (When two labels are issued.)
(1) The printer feeds the labels in the reverse direction for the amount specified by @003 command.
The feed amount should be the distance between the print start position and the antenna position.
(2) Data is written onto the tag of Label 1.
(3) The printer feeds the labels in the forward direction for the same amount as Step (1) to return Label
1 to the print start position.
(4) Label 1 is printed. If a data write to Label 1 failed, the void patter is printed on Label 1.
(5) The printer feeds the labels in the reverse direction for the amount specified by @003 command.
(6) Data is written onto the tag of Label 2.
(7) The printer feeds the labels in the forward direction for the same amount as Step (5) to return Label
2 to the print start position.
(8) Label 2 is printed. If a data write to Label 2 failed, the void pattern is printed on Label 2.
[1:Offset printing is performed without a reverse feed of the first label.] (When two labels are issued.)
(1) The printer feeds the labels in the forward/reverse direction for the amount specified by @003
command. This feed is to adjust the position of Label 2 so that it is positioned just above the
antenna when Label 1 is at the print start position. When the feed amount is set to 0, the printer
does not feed the labels.
(2) Data is written onto the tag of Label 2.
(3) The printer feeds one label in the forward direction.
(4) Data is written onto the tag of Label 3.
(5) The printer feeds the labels in the forward/reverse direction for the same amount as Step (1) to
return Label 2 to the print start position.
(6) Label 2 is printed. If a data write to Label 2 failed, the void patter is printed on Label 2.
(7) Label 3 is printed. If a data write to Label 3 failed, the void pattern is printed on Label 3.
Note: This mode wastes Label 1.
[2:Offset printing is performed with a reverse feed of the first label.] (When two labels are issued.
(1) The printer feeds the labels in the reverse direction for the amount specified by @003 command
plus one label pitch so that Label 1 is positioned just above the antenna.
(2) Data is written onto the tag of Label 1.
(3) The printer feeds one label in the forward direction.
(4) Data is written onto the tag of Label 2.
(5) The printer feeds the labels in the forward direction for the same amount as Step (1) to return Label
1 to the print start position.
(6) Label 1 is printed. If a data write to Label 1 failed, the void pattern is printed on Label 1.
(7) Label 2 is printed. If a data write to Label 2 failed, the void pattern is printed on Label 2.
- 249 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.5.2 RFID TAG READ COMMAND
[ESC] WF
Function
Format
Term
Reads the data stored on the RFID tag which is positioned just above the antenna.
[ESC] WF (;) (Naaaa) (,Abbb) (,Tcc) (,Id) (,Jeeeeeeee) (,Xfgggggggg…) [LF] [NUL]
Naaaa: Number of bytes to be read (Omissible)
0001 to 4096
When omitted, the number of bytes specified for the tag type being used will
be designated.
Abbb: Address of data to be read (Omissible)
000 to 999
The address where reading the RFID tag is started is specified.
This parameter is effective for the ISO18000-6B tag only.
When omitted, the value will be set to 18.
Tcc:
Type of tag (Omissible)
00: None
11: I-Code
12: Tag-it
13: C220
14: ISO15693
15: C210
16: C240
17: C320
21: EPC Class 0
22: EPC Class 1
23: ISO18000-6B
24: EPC Class 1 Generation 2
Designates the type of RFID tag from which data is to be read.
When omitted, the tag type set in system mode will be designated.
In accordance with the tag type designated by this setting, the tag type set in
system mode changes.
When “00: NONE” is designated, the backed up tag type will be set, and the
system mode setting will not be changed.
Id:
RFID read mode (Omissible)
1: Only user data is read.
2: Only tag ID is read.
3: Both tag ID and user data are read.
When omitted, only user data will be read.
When the tag type is Gen2, user data equals to TID bank + user bank,
and tag ID equals to EPC bank.
Jeeeeeeee: Access to the password-protected tags (Omissible)
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
Accesses the password-protected tags.
This parameter is effective only for the EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type.
- 250 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Xfgggggggg: User block access password execution setting (Effective only when the
Hibiki tag is used for the B-SX704-RFID-U2-R.)
Designates a password to access and read a tag of which user block is
read-locked.
Up to five user blocks can be specified continuously.
For example: X4AABBCCDD,X5BBCCDDEE,X6CCDDEEFF
f: Designates a user area bank. (4 to 8)
4: Bank4 (User block 1)
5: Bank5 (User block 2)
6: Bank6 (User block 3)
7: Bank7 (User block 4)
8: Bank8 (User block 5)
gggggggg: User block access password
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
Explanation
(1) The parameter, “Number of bytes to be read”, is effective only when RFID read
mode is set to 1 or 3, as this parameter is intended for reading user data. When
reading tag ID, this parameter is ignored.
(2) When the value exceeding the maximum number of bytes storable in a tag is
designated for “Number of bytes to be read”, a read error results.
(3) When the number of bytes to be read is omitted, the user data and the ID bytes of
the specified data bytes will be returned in accordance with the tag types, as
shown in the table below.
Tag type
Number of user data bytes
8 bytes
EPC Class 0
EPC Class 1
Tag-it
8 bytes
32 bytes
I-Code
44 bytes
C220
9 bytes
C320
32 bytes
ISO15693
C210
32 bytes
0 bytes
C240
224 bytes
32 bytes
8 bytes
ISO18000-6B
EPC Class 1
Generation 2
Tag type
Number of ID bytes
12 bytes
8 bytes or 12 bytes
4 bytes
EPC Class 0
EPC Class 1
Tag-it
I-Code
8 bytes
C220
5 bytes
ISO15693
C210
8 bytes
8 bytes
C240
8 bytes
ISO18000-6B
EPC Class 1
Generation 2
8 bytes
8 bytes or 12 bytes
- 251 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supplemental explanation of parameter “I”
When Gen2 tag is used, options for the parameter “I” are as follows:
I1: TID & User area data
I2: EPC data
I3: EPC data + TID & User area data
As the readability of the TID & User area differs depending on the tag manufacturers,
refer to the memory map of each tag.
Example)
• In the case of OMRON’s Gen2 tag
4-byte TID area is readable, and the user area is read/write protected.
• In the case of HITACHI’s Gen2 tag (Hibiki)
8-byte TID area is readable/writable and 30-byte user area is readable/writable.
(4) The format of information to be returned to the host is as follows.
SOH
STX
“F”
01H
02H
46H
Start of the status block
30H30H: Reading failed.
31H31H: I-Code
31H32H: Tag-it
31H33H: C220
31H34H: ISO15693
31H35H: C210
30H
30H
Tag
type
31H36H: C240
31H37H: C320
32H31H: EPC Class 0
32H32H: EPC Class 1
32H33H: ISO18000-6B
32H34H: EPC Class 1 Generation 2
Tag data (0 bytes to 9999 bytes)
Data
ETX
EOT
CR
---
03H
04H
ODH
OAH
End of the status block
LF
- 252 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example
Examples of the status to be returned are shown below. (The number of bytes to be
read is omitted.)
[When a reading failed.]
Header
“F”
Tag type
Footer
01H 02H 46H 30H 30H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Reading has failed.
[When a reading succeeded. (When RFID read mode=1 or omitted.)]
Header
“F” Tag type
User data (32 bytes)
Footer
01H 02H 46H 32H 33H 41H 42H 43H xxH xxH 44H 45H 46H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Read data
“ABC···DEF”
Tag type: ISO18000-6B
[When a reading succeeded. (When RFID read mode=2.)]
Header
“F” Tag type
Tag ID (8 bytes)
Footer
01H 02H 46H 32H 33H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Read data
“12345678”
Tag type: ISO18000-6B
[When a reading succeeded. (When RFID read mode=3.)]
Header
“F” Tag type
Tag ID + User data (8 bytes + 32 bytes)
Footer
01H 02H 46H 32H 32H 31H 32H xxH xxH xxH 44H 45H 46H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Read data
“123···678ABC···DEF”
Tag type: ISO18000-6B
- 253 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.5.3 RFID VOID PATTERN PRINT COMMAND
[ESC] @006
Function
Format
Prints the void pattern to indicate an RFID tag error.
[ESC] @006 [LF] [NUL]
Explanation
(1) The void patter is printed according to the currently set label size.
(2) After the void pattern is printed, the print data image is still retained.
(3) This void pattern is printed when data cannot be written onto the RIFD tag properly
due to breakage of RFID chip or some other reasons. The void pattern visually
indicates that the RFID tag is faulty.
(4) Usually, the void pattern is automatically printed if writing data onto the RFID tag
results in an error, therefore, this command does not need to be transmitted.
This command is intended to be used if writing data onto the RFID tag failed while
the BASIC interpreter or the Pass Through Command is used and the RFID
module is manually controlled to issue RFID labels.
(5) The paper printed by this command is cut one by one.
(6) The status indicating the end of the void pattern printing caused by this command
is 60 (end of the void pattern printing).
(7) Even when an image buffer clear command is sent after this command, void
pattern image is not cleared and the printer prints the void pattern.
- 254 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.5.4 RFID DATA WRITE COMMAND
[ESC] @012
Function
Format
Writes a specified data onto an RFID tag. No printing is performed.
The result of a data write is notified by returning a detailed status.
[ESC]@012;a (,Abbb) (,Mc) (,Pd) (,Fe) (,Tff) (,Dgg) (,Gh) (,Riiiiiiii) (,Kjjjjjjjj) (,Lkk) (,Jllllllll)
(,Vm) (,Bnn) (,Hopppppppp · · ·) (,Qqrstuvw · · ·) (,Xxyyyyyyyy · · ·) =ooo------ooo) [LF]
[NUL]
Term
a:
Data write parameter
w: Data is written onto an RFID tag.
Abbb:
Address where the data is written (Omissible)
000 to 999
Designates the address where data starts to be written.
When omitted, this parameter will be set to 18 for ISO18000-6B tag, or 0 for
other tag types.
Mc:
Format of U-Code V1.19 (Omissible)
0: SGTIN 96 format
1: SSCC96 format
2: (Reserved)
When the format of U-Code V1.19 is designated, the specified address,
where the data is written, will become invalid. This parameter is effective
only when the tag type is ISO18000-6B.
When omitted, the U-Code V1.19 format is not used.
When 2: (Reserved) is selected, operations are not guaranteed.
Pd:
Fe:
Tff:
Partition number (Omissible)
0 to 6
This parameter is effective only when U-Code V1.19 or EPC format is
designated. When omitted, 5 will be set.
Filter number (Omissible)
0 to 7
This parameter is effective only when U-Code V1.19 or EPC format is
designated. When omitted, 0 will be set.
Tag type (Omissible)
00: None
11: I-Code
12: Tag-it
13: C220
14: ISO15693
15: C210
16: C240
17: C320
21: EPC Class 0
22: EPC Class 1
23: ISO 18000-6B
24: EPC Class 1 Generation 2
Designates the type of RFID tag onto which data is to be written.
When omitted, the tag type set in the system mode will be designated.
In accordance with the tag type designated by this setting, the tag type set in
the system mode changes.
When “00: NONE” is designated, the backed up tag type will be designated,
and the system mode setting will not be changed.
- 255 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dgg:
EPC format (Omissible)
00: No format (When omitted)
10: GID-96
11: SGTIN-64
12: SGTIN-96
13: SSCC-64
14: SSCC-96
15: SGLN-64
16: SGLN-96
17: GRAI-64
18: GRAI-96
19: GIAI-64
20: GIAI-96
21: DoD-64
22: DoD-96
23:SGTIN-198
24:SGLN-195
25:GRAI-170
26:GIAI-202
Gh:
Data type (Omissible)
0: No conversion of data (Default)
1: Conversion to binary
2: Conversion to hexadecimal
Riiiiiiii:
Access password setting (Omissible)
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
Sets a password to access tags.
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type.
Kjjjjjjjj:
Lkk:
Kill password setting (Omissible)
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
Sets a kill password for tags.
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type.
Lock/unlock setting (Omissible)
Access
Kill password
EPC code
TID
User data
password
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
- 256 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
33 Permanent lock
34 Unlocked
35 Permanent lock Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
36
37 Permanent lock
38 Unlocked
39 Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
40
41 Permanent lock
42 Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
43 Permanent lock Permanent lock
44
45 Permanent lock
46 Unlocked
47 Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
48
49 Permanent lock
50 Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
Permanent lock
51 Permanent lock Permanent lock
52
53 Permanent lock
54 Unlocked
55 Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock
56
57 Permanent lock
58 Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock
59 Permanent lock Permanent lock
60
61 Permanent lock
62 Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Unlocked
Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
63 Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
64 Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock Permanent lock
Designates the areas to be locked. When omitted, no areas are locked.
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class 1 Generation 2 tag type.
Jllllllll:
Access to the password-protected tags (Omissible)
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
Accesses the password-protected tags.
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class1 Generation 2 tag type.
Vm:
Write data verify designation (Omissible)
0: Verification disabled (Omissible)
1: Verification enabled
This parameter verifies if data has been written successfully. Select “1”
(Verification enabled) for tags which may generate a phenomenon that the
written data may not be the same as actual data even when an issue has
successfully completed. When “1” is selected, it takes more time than
- 257 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
when “0” (Verification disabled) is selected.
Bnn:
Designates the area where the data is written (Omissible)
00: Blank0 (Reserved area)
01: Blank1 (EPC area) (When omitted)
02: Blank2 (TID area)
03: Blank3 (User area)
04: Bank4 (User block 1)
05: Bank5 (User block 2)
(Effective only when the Hibiki tag is
used for the B-SX704-RFID-U2-R.)
06: Bank6 (User block 3)
07: Bank7 (User block 4)
08: Bank8 (User block 5)
This parameter is effective only for EPC Class1 Generation 2 tag type. The
area where data can be written differs depending on tag types.
When a format is designated, this parameter is ignored.
When the RFID module type is the U1, the EPC area and user area are
effective.
Hopppppppp: User block password setting (Effective only when the Hibiki tag is used
for the B-SX704-RFID-U2-R.)
Designates a password to lock certain user blocks.
Up to five user blocks can be specified continuously.
For example: H4AABBCCDD,H5BBCCDDEE,H6CCDDEEFF
o: Designates a user area bank (4 to 8)
4: Bank4 (User block 1)
5: Bank5 (User block 2)
6: Bank6 (User block 3)
7: Bank7 (User block 4)
8: Bank8 (User block 5)
pppppppp: User block password
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
- 258 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Qqrstuvw: Area lock designation (Effective only when the Hibiki tag is used for the B-
SX704-RFID-U2-R.
Designates an area lock type.
Area lock type can be specified for up to eight areas continuously.
For example: Q1100000,Q4101010,Q5100010, which indicates:
Bank1:Read lock, Bank4:Read lock, Write lock, Password read/write lock
Bank5:Read lock, Password read/write lock
q: Area bank designation (1 to 8)
1: Bank1 (EPCC/UII bank)
2: Bank2 (TID bank)
3: Bank3 (User area)
4: Bank4 (User block 1)
5: Bank5 (User block 2)
6: Bank6 (User block 3)
7: Bank7 (User block 4)
8: Bank8 (User block 5)
r: Read lock designation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
s: Read permanent lock designation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
t: Write lock designation (Effective to Bank4 to Bank8 only)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
u: Write permanent lock designation (Effective to Bank4 to Bank8 only)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
v: User block password read/write lock designation (Effective to Bank4 to
Bank8 only)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
w:User block password read/write permanent lock designation (Effective to
Bank4 to Bank8 only)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NOTES:
1. Once a permanent lock is enabled for parameter s, u, or w, any
subsequent change is disabled.
2. When read/write permanent lock is selected, a read/write lock state is
retained. To permanently prohibit reading/writing a tag, enable both
the read/write lock and the read/write permanent lock. The setting
which disables the read/write lock and enables the read/write
permanent lock allows the tag to be read/written permanently.
- 259 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Xxyyyyyyyy: User block access password execution setting (Effective only when the
Hibiki tag is used for the B-SX704-RFID-U2-R.)
Designates a password to access and write a tag of which user block is
write-locked.
Up to five user blocks can be specified continuously.
For example: X4AABBCCDD,X5BBCCDDEE,X6CCDDEEFF
x: Designates a user area bank. (4 to 8)
4: Bank4 (User block 1)
5: Bank5 (User block 2)
6: Bank6 (User block 3)
7: Bank7 (User block 4)
8: Bank8 (User block 5)
yyyyyyyy: User block access password
Fixed to 8-digit hexadecimal number
00000000 to FFFFFFFF
ooo---ooo: Print data string (Omissible)
Max. 512 digits, but the number of digits to be written is different depending
on the tag types.
The result of a data write is returned in the following format.
SOH
STX
01H
02H
30H
30H
35H
30H
30H
30H
30H
03H
04H
0DH
0AH
Indicates the start of the status block
36H33H: Writing data succeeded. (“63”)
36H34H: Writing data failed. (“64”)
Status
Fixed to 5 (RFID status)
Remaining
count
Remaining issue count (0000 to 9999)
ETX
EOT
CR
Indicates the end of the status block.
LF
- 260 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. CONTROL CODE SELECTION
(1) Automatic Selection
This printer automatically selects [ESC] (1BH). [LF] (0AH). [NUL] (00H) or {(7BH). | (7CH).} (7DH)
as an interface command control code. After the power is turned on, the program checks the data
from the host for [ESC] and { and assumes the data whichever has been sent first to be a control
code.
For example, if [ESC] is sent first after the power is turned on, [ESC]. [LF]. [NUL] becomes a
control code, and if { is sent first, { . | . } becomes a control code. Control code selection is made
for every command. If the first command is [ESC] ~ [LF] [NUL], followed by [ESC], the control
code becomes [ESC]. [LF]. [NUL], and if it is followed by { , the control code for the next command
becomes { . | . }. When { . | . } is a control code, the data of 00H to 1FH in { ~ | } is ignored.
However, the data of 00H to 1FH becomes valid while processing the Graphic Command or the Bit
Map Writable Character Command in hexadecimal mode. When { . | . } is the control code, { . | . }
cannot be used in the data of the Data Command or the Message Display Command.
Power ON
Read received data
No
<Received data ESC?>
No
Yes
<Received data { ?>
Yes
Assume control code
to be ESC. LF. NUL
Assume control code
to be { . | . }
Discard read
data
Command processing
(2) Manual Selection (ESC. LF. NUL)
The control code of the command is [ESC] (1BH). [LF] (0AH). [NUL] (00H), and the control code
selection is not performed.
(3) Manual Selection ({ . | . })
The control code of the command is {(7BH). | (7CH).} (7DH), and the control code selection is not
performed. Data of 00H to 1FH is ignored and discarded in this mode. However, data of 00H to
1FH becomes valid while processing the Graphic Command or the Bit Map Writable Character
Command in hexadecimal mode. When { . | . } is used as the control code, { . | . } cannot be used
in the data of the Data Command or the Message Display Command.
(4) Manual Selection (Any set code)
The control code of the command is the code set in the system mode, and the control code
selection is not performed. The code used in each command should not be set as the control
code.
In the Data Command or the Message Display Command, the code set as the control code cannot
be used.
- 261 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. ERROR PROCESSING
If the printer detects any of the following errors, it will display the error message (LCD, LED), makes
status response (serial interface, parallel interface), and stops its operation.
8.1 COMMUNICATION ERRORS
(1) Command Errors
An error results if a command length error, command transmission sequence error, command
format error, or parameter designation error is found in analyzing the command. An error results
if the Format Command of a field is not transmitted and its Data Command is transmitted. When
attempting to call a PC Save Command of a save identifier which is not saved, an error results.
An undefined command is not detected as an error, and data is discarded until [ESC] or [{] is
received.
(2) Hardware Errors
An error results if a framing error or parity error is found during data reception when using the
serial interface (RS-232C).
* At the moment when a command error or hardware error occurs, the printer shows the error
message and makes status response before stopping. The Status Request Command and
Reset Command only can be processed and other commands are not processed. When the
printer is restored by the [RESTART] key, the printer enters the initial state which is obtained
after the power is turned on.
8.2 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING
(1) Paper Jam
c When the relation between the programmed label (or tag) pitch (A) and the label (or tag) pitch
detected by the sensor (B) is not indicated by the following formula, an error will result:
(A) × 50% ≤ (B) ≤ (A) × 150%
• A paper jam has occurred during paper feed.
• The paper is not placed properly.
• The actual label does not match the type of the sensor.
• The sensor position is not aligned with the black mark.
• The actual label size does not meet the designated label length.
• No label-to-label gap is detected due to preprint.
• The sensor is not thoroughly adjusted.
(The sensor is not adjusted for the label to be used.)
d If the stripped label does not cover the strip sensor when printing or feeding is completed in
the strip mode, an error will result.
- 262 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) Cutter Error
• Rotary cutter
When the cutter does not move from the cutter home position 40 msec or more after the cutter
solenoid is driven, an error will result.
The cutter moves from the home position, however, it does not return to the home position after
150 msec.
• Swing cutter
When the cutter home position sensor does not detect 1.5 sec or more after the cutter motor is
driven, an error will result.
• A paper jam has occurred at the cutter. (The cutter does not return to the home position.)
• The cutter does not move from the home position.
• The cutter cover is open.
(3) Label End
Error processing differs depending on the setting of label end/ribbon end process in the system
mode.
When TYP1 is selected. (default):
c When the transmissive sensor or the reflective sensor detects a continuous 3-mm long label
end state, an error will result.
d When an issue, a feed, or an ejection is attempted in a printer stop state while the
transmissive sensor or the reflective sensor detects the label end state, an error will result.
When TYP2 is selected. (effective only when the ribbon saving function is not used.):
c When the transmissive sensor or the reflective sensor detects a continuous 3-mm long label
end state, the printer completes the printing of half-finished label, and then an error will result
when the next label is at the home position.
d When an issue, a feed, or an ejection is attempted in a printer stop state while the
transmissive sensor or the reflective sensor detects the label end state, an error will result.
(4) Ribbon End
Error processing differs depending on the setting of label end/ribbon end process in the system
mode.
When TYP1 is selected. (default):
c With the ribbon being selected, when the ribbon end sensor detects a continuous 5-mm long
ribbon end state, an error will result.
d With the ribbon being selected, when an issue, a feed, or an ejection is attempted in a printer
stop state while the ribbon end sensor detects the ribbon end state, an error will result.
When TYP2 is selected. (effective only when the ribbon saving function is not used.)
c With the ribbon being selected, when the ribbon end sensor detects a continuous 5-mm long
ribbon end state, the following process depends on the unfinished label length as follows.
• When unfinished label length is 30 mm or more, an error results after the printer prints
the label for 20 mm.
• When unfinished label length is less than 30 mm, the printer completes the half-finished
label and stops printing when the next label is at the home position.
d With the ribbon being selected, when an issue, a feed, or an ejection is attempted in a printer
stop state while the ribbon end sensor detects the ribbon end state, an error will result.
- 263 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5)
Head Open Error
c If the head open sensor detects the open state in 5 mm continuously, an error will result.
d If the head open sensor detects the open state when an issue, a feed, or an ejection is
attempted in a printer stop state, an error will result.
e If the head-up sensor detects the head-up state in 5 mm continuously, an error will result.
f If the head-up sensor detects the head-up state when an issue, a feed, or an ejection is
attempted in a printer stop state, an error will result.
However, the feeding by the [FEED] key on the printer and the issuing and feeding by the
expansion I/O are not included.
(6) Thermal Head Error
c A broken dot error has occurred in the thermal head.
d An error has occurred in the thermal head driver.
(7) Thermal Head Excessive Temperature
c When the open-air temperature detection thermistor detects an excessively high temperature
(61 °C or more), an error will result.
d When the thermal head temperature detection thermistor detects an excessively high
temperature (80 °C or more), an error will result.
e When the heat sink sensor detects an excessively high temperature (91 °C or more), an error
will result.
(8) Ribbon Error
c When the ribbon rewind motor sensor and ribbon back tension motor sensor do not perform
detection if twice the prescribed time has passed, an error will result.
• An abnormal condition has occurred in the sensor for determining the torque for the ribbon
motor.
• A ribbon jam has occurred.
• The ribbon has run out.
• The ribbon has not been installed.
(9) Rewinder Overflow
c If the rewinder overflow sensor detects the overflow state in 5 mm continuously when the strip
function or the built-in rewinder is specified, an error will result.
d If the overflow sensor detects an overflow state when an issue, a feed, or an ejection is
attempted in a printer stop state after the strip function or the built-in rewinder is specified, an
error will result.
* At the moment an error occurs, the printer shows the error message, makes a status response,
and then stops. Only the Status Request Command and the Reset Command can be
processed. Other commands are not processed. Restoration using the [RESTART] key is
possible except in the case of a thermal head excessive temperature error. (The printer
resumes printing a label at which the error had occurred.)
- 264 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.3 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES
(1) Write Error
• An error has occurred in writing in flash memory for storage.
(2) Format Error
• An erase error has occurred in formatting flash memory for storage.
(3) Memory Full
• Storing is impossible because of the insufficient flash memory for storage.
* At the moment when an error occurs, the printer shows the error message, makes status
response, then stops. The Status Request Command and the Reset Command only can be
processed and other commands are not processed. Restoration using the [RESTART] key is
impossible.
8.4 SYSTEM ERRORS
(1) Momentary Power Interruption Error
• A momentary power interruption has occurred.
(2) Address error
• A command has been fetched from an odd address.
• Word data has been accessed from a place other than the boundary of the word data.
• Long word data has been accessed from a place other than the boundary of the long word data.
(3) General invalid command exception
• An undefined command in a place other than the delay slot has been decoded.
(4) Slot invalid exception
• An undefined command in the delay slot has been decoded.
• A command which rewrites the data in the delay slot has been decoded.
* At the moment when an error occurs, the printer shows the error message, then stops. (None
of the commands and key operations will be processed.)
(5) EEPROM Error
• The EEPROM for back-up cannot be read/written properly.
8.5 RESET PROCESSING
When the [RESTART] key is held down for more than 3 seconds during the error which can be
cleared by the [RESTART] key and during a pause, the printer returns to the initial status which is
obtained after the power is turned on.
- 265 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.6 RFID ERROR
(1) RFID Write Error
If writing data onto the RFID tag continuously failed for the maximum number of RFID write
retries, an RFID write error will result. (The maximum number of RFID write retries can be set in
the system mode.)
* When an error has occurred, the printer shows an error message, sends a status response, and
then stops. Only the Status Request Command and the Reset Command can be processed.
Other commands are not processed. Restoration using the [RESTART] key is possible. (The
printer resumes printing the label at which the error had occurred.)
(2) RFID Error
If a problem has occurred when the printer communicates with the RFID module, an RFID error
will result.
- 266 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. STATUS RESPONSE
9.1 FUNCTIONS
There are three kinds of status response functions.
(1) Status transmission function at the end of a normal transmission and the occurrence of an error
(auto status transmission)
This function is available for the RS-232C interface and for the mail function.
If the option for “status response” has been selected, the printer sends the status to the host
computer when the printer performs a feed or completes an issue normally (For the batch/cut
mode: after the designated number of labels is printed, For the strip mode: after one label is
printed). In the online mode, the head up/down status is sent to the host computer.
When each error occurs, the status is sent to the host computer.
The remaining count in the status response indicates the remaining count of the batch currently
being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted.
(2) Status transmission function by status request (Status Request Command)
This function is available for the RS-232C, USB, Centronics interfaces, and socket
communications.
Upon request to send status by the Status Request Command, the printer sends the latest status
indicating its current state to the host computer, regardless of the option for “status response/no
status response” . The remaining count indicates the remaining count of the batch currently
being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted. This
command is not stored in the receive buffer and executed immediately when it is received.
(3) Receive buffer free space status transmission function by status request (Receive Buffer Free
Space Status Request Command)
This function is available for the RS-232C, USB, Centronics interfaces, and socket
communications.
Upon request to send status by the Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command, the
printer sends the latest status indicating its current state to the host computer, regardless of the
option for “status response/no status response” . The remaining count indicates the remaining
count of the batch currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed
is transmitted. This command is not stored in the receive buffer and executed immediately when
it is received.
•
Peel-off wait status
The peel-off wait status (05H) returned by the Status Request Command depends on the
system mode setting.
When the peel-off wait status is set to “OFF” in the system mode:
If the Status Request Command is sent when a label is on the strip shaft (for example,
while idling, after feeding a label, after printing all labels), the printer returns (00H) to the
host.
When the peel-off wait status is set to “ON” in the system mode:
If the Status Request Command is sent when a label is on the strip shaft (for example,
while idling, after feeding a label, after printing all labels), the printer returns (05H) to the
host.
If the Status Request Command is sent while a label is being printed or issued, the peel-off
wait status (05H) is returned for both settings.
- 267 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.1.1 STATUS FORMAT
SOH STX
Status
Remaining count
ETX EOT CR
LF
01H 02H 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Remaining count
• 0000 ~ 9999
(Fixed as 0000 in the save mode)
Type of status
• “1” (31H) (Status Request Command)
• “2” (32H) (Auto status transmission)
• “3” (33H) (Receive buffer free space status
request)
• “4” (34H) (RFID data read status)
• “5” (35H) (RFID data write status)
Detail status
Status to be returned for the Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command
SOH
STX
01H
02H
Indicates the top of the status block
3XH Printer status
Status
3XH
* Details are described above.
Status type
Remaining
count
33H Indicates the status for the ECP mode.
3XH Remaining issue count
3XH
3XH
3XH
* Details are described above.
Length
3XH Total number of bytes of this status block.
3XH
Free space
3XH Free space of the receive buffer
of receive buffer
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
“00000” (0 Kbyte) to “99999” (99999 Kbytes)
However, the maximum value should be the total capacity of
the receive buffer
Receive buffer
Total capacity
3XH Total capacity of the receive buffer
3XH
3XH
3XH
3XH
0DH
0AH
“00000” (0 Kbyte) to “99999” (99999 Kbytes)
However, the maximum value differs depending on the models.
CR
LF
Indicates the end of the status block.
- 268 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.1.2 DETAIL STATUS
LCD Message of
Detail Status
Upper Line
(English)
Auto Status
Transmission
Status
Request
Command
Printer Status
ON LINE
HEAD OPEN
ON LINE
The head was closed with the head open.
The head was opened in the online mode.
Operating (Analyzing command, drawing, printing,
feeding)
00
01
–
00
01
02
PAUSE
****
In a pause state
–
–
04
05
06
ON LINE
Waiting for stripping
A command error was found in analyzing the
command.
06
Display of error message
(See NOTE 1.)
COMMS ERROR
A parity error or framing error occurred during
communication by RS-232C
07
07
PAPER JAM ****
CUTTER ERROR****
NO PAPER ****
NO RIBBON ****
HEAD OPEN ****
A paper jam occurred during a paper feed.
An abnormal condition occurred at the cutter.
The label has run out.
11
12
13
14
15
11
12
13
14
15
The ribbon has run out.
An attempt was made to feed or issue with the
head open (except the [FEED] key)
A broken dot error has occurred in the thermal
head.
HEAD ERROR ****
EXCESS HEAD TEMP
RIBBON ERROR****
17
18
21
17
18
21
The thermal head temperature has become
excessively high.
An abnormal condition occurred in the sensor for
determining the torque for the ribbon motor.
An overflow error has occurred in the rewinder.
Ribbon near end state (Online)
Ribbon near end state (In a pause state)
Ribbon near end state (Operating)
A label issue has been completed normally.
A feed has been completed normally.
A head broken dots check has been completed
normally.
REWIND FULL ****
ON LINE
22
–
22
27
28
29
–
PAUSE
–
ON LINE
–
ON LINE
40
41
00
ON LINE
–
ON LINE
–
SAVING #### &&&&
SAVING %%%%%%%
FLASH WRITE ERR.
In writable character or PC command save
mode
–
55
50
51
54
–
An error has occurred in writing data into memory
for storage.
50
51
54
–
FORMAT ERROR
An erase error has occurred in formatting memory
for storage.
FLASH CARD FULL
Saving failed because of the insufficient capacity of
memory for storage.
POWER FAILURE
A momentary power interruption has occurred.
The memory card for storage is being initialized.
(Initialization is carried out for a max. of
approximately 15 seconds)
INITIALIZING...
- 269 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD Message of
Detail Status
Upper Line
(English)
Auto Status
Transmission
Status
Request
Command
Printer Status
EEPROM ERROR
SYSTEM ERROR
An EEPROM for back up cannot be read/written
properly.
–
–
(a) A command has been fetched from an odd
address.
–
–
(b) Word data has been accessed from a place
other than the boundary of the word data.
(c) Long word data has been accessed from a
place other than the boundary of the long word
data.
(d) An undefined command in a place other than
the delay slot has been decoded.
(e) An undefined command in the delay slot has
been decoded.
(f) A command which rewrites the data in the
delay slot has been decoded.
-
A void pattern printing is completed.
When data cannot be written onto the RFID tag
properly, the printer prints the void pattern to
indicate that this tag is faulty, and then,
automatically retries according to the setting for the
maximum number of RFID write retries. When the
void pattern printing is completed, the printer sends
this status.
60
---
RFID WRITE ERROR
When writing data onto the RFID tag continuously
failed for the maximum number of RFID write
retries, the printer enters an error state and sends
this status.
61
61
RFID ERROR
-
When the printer cannot communicate with the
RFID module, due to a failure of the RFID module
or some other reasons, this error occurs.
Writing data onto an RFID tag succeeded.
When a data write, performed by an RFID Data
Write Command (@012), succeeded, this status is
returned.
62
---
62
---
-
Writing data onto an RFID tag failed.
When a data write, performed by an RFID Data
Write Command (@012), failed, this status is
returned.
---
---
INPUT PASSWORD
The printer is waiting for a password to be entered.
Password entered was not correct consecutively for
three times.
---
---
---
---
PASSWORD INVALID
RFID CONFIG ERR
B-SX704-RFID-U2-US-R only
65
65
RFID module’s destination code is not specified
- 270 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.1.3 SUMMARY OF STATUS RESPONSE
Interface
RS-232C
Status transmission timing
Automatic status transmission
Status size
13 bytes
13 bytes
23 bytes
N/A
Reception of [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]
Reception of [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Centronics System
mode setting
SPP Automatic status transmission
Nibble mode negotiation immediately after
[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL] is received
Nibble mode negotiation immediately after
[ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] is received
ECP Automatic status transmission
Reverse request immediately after [ESC] WS
[LF] [NUL] is received
13 bytes
23 bytes
N/A
13 bytes
Reverse request immediately after [ESC] WB
[LF] [NUL] is received
23 bytes
USB
Automatic status transmission
N/A
Reception of [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]
Reception of [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Automatic status transmission
13 bytes
23 bytes
13 bytes
13 bytes
23 bytes
13 bytes
Socket communications
Mail function
Reception of [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]
Reception of [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Automatic status transmission
- 271 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE SIGNALS
9.2.1 COMPATIBILITY MODE
LCD Messages
of Upper Line (English)
ON LINE
Printer Status
Output Signal
Busy
L
Select nFault PError
In the online mode
H
H
L
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
ON LINE
In the online mode (communicating)
The head was opened in the online mode.
In a pause state
L, H
H
HEAD OPEN
PAUSE
****
H
L
L
ON LINE
Data was set from the host with the receive
buffer full.
H
H
H
ON LINE
ON LINE
After data was sent from the host with the
receive buffer full, some data is processed
and room becomes available.
L
H
H
L
Initialize process in execution (After the power
is turned on or the nInit signal is received)
A command error has occurred in analyzing
the command.
H
H
H
L
H
L
L
L
Display of error command
PAPER JAM ****
CUTTER ERROR****
NO PAPER ****
NO RIBBON ****
HEAD OPEN ****
A paper jam occurred during a paper feed.
An abnormal condition occurred at the cutter.
The label has run out.
H
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
L
The ribbon has run out.
A feed or an issue was attempted with the
head opened. (except the [FEED] key)
A broken dot error has occurred in the thermal
head.
HEAD ERROR ****
EXCESS HEAD TEMP
RIBBON ERROR****
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
The thermal head temperature has become
excessively high.
An abnormal condition occurred in the sensor
for determining the torque for the ribbon
motor.
REWIND FULL ****
An overflow error has occurred in the
rewinder.
H
L
L
L
ON LINE
Ribbon near end state (Online)
Ribbon near end state (In a pause state)
Ribbon near end state (Operating)
In writable character or PC command save
mode
L
H
L
H
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
PAUSE
ON LINE
H
H
H
H
SAVING #### &&&&
SAVING %%%%%%%
FLASH WRITE ERR.
L
An error has occurred in writing data into
memory for storage.
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
FORMAT ERROR
An erase error has occurred in formatting
memory for storage.
FLASH CARD FULL
Saving failed because of the insufficient
capacity of memory for storage.
A momentary power interruption has occurred.
The memory card for storage is being
initialized. (Initialization is carried out for a
max. of approximately 15 seconds)
POWER FAILURE
INITIALIZING...
- 272 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCD Messages
of Upper Line (English)
EEPROM ERROR
Printer Status
Output Signal
Busy
Select nFault PError
An EEPROM for back-up cannot be
read/written properly.
H
L
L
L
SYSTEM ERROR
(a) A command has been fetched from an
odd address.
H
L
L
L
(b) Word data has been accessed from a
place other than the boundary of the word
data.
(c) Long word data has been accessed from
a place other than the boundary of the
long word data.
(d) An undefined command in a place other
than the delay slot has been decoded.
(e) An undefined command in the delay slot
has been decoded.
(f) A command which rewrites the data in the
delay slot has been decoded.
RFID WRITE ERROR
Writing data onto the RFID tag continuously
failed for the maximum number of RFID write
retries.
H
L
L
L
RFID ERROR
The printer cannot communicate with the
RFID module.
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
INPUT PASSWORD
PASSWORD INVALID
RFID CONFIG ERR
The printer is waiting for a password to be
entered.
Password
entered
was
not
correct
consecutively for three times.
B-SX704-RFID-U2-US-R only
RFID module’s destination code is not
specified
9.3 E-MAIL
The printer can notify the PC of the printer status by e-mail. The status to be notified by e-mail is the
same as the status which is notified through the serial interface. For details, refer to the Network
Specification (TAA-1401).
- 273 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. LCD MESSAGES AND LED INDICATIONS
The model and the firmware version are displayed on the lower line of the LCD.
Restoration Acceptance
LED Indication
by the
[RESTART]
key
of Status
Request
Reset
Command
Yes/No
LCD Messages of
Upper line
No.
1
Printer Status
(English)
Yes/No
POWER ON LINE ERROR
ON LINE
In the online mode
{
{
{
z
z
-
-
Yes
Yes
ON LINE
In the online mode
(Communicating)
The head was opened in the
online mode.
HEAD OPEN
2
{
z
z
-
Yes
PAUSE
****
In a pause state
3
4
{
{
z
z
z
{
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
COMMS ERROR
A parity error or framing error
has occurred during
communication by RS-232C.
A paper jam occurred during
paper feed.
PAPER JAM ****
CUTTER ERROR****
5
6
{
{
z
z
{
{
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
An abnormal condition occurred
at the cutter.
NO PAPER ****
NO RIBBON ****
HEAD OPEN ****
The label has run out.
7
8
9
{
{
{
z
z
z
{
{
{
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
The ribbon has run out.
A feed or an issue was
attempted with the head
opened.
(except the [FEED] key)
A broken dot error has occurred
in the thermal head.
HEAD ERROR
10
11
12
{
{
{
z
z
z
{
{
{
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
EXCESS HEAD TEMP
RIBBON ERROR****
The thermal head temperature
has become excessively high.
An abnormal condition occurred
in the sensor for determining the
torque for the ribbon motor.
An overflow error has occurred
in the rewinder.
Yes
REWIND FULL ****
13
14
{
{
z
{
{
z
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
SAVING #### &&&&
SAVING %%%%%%%
FLASH WRITE ERR.
In writable character or PC
command save mode
An error has occurred in writing
data into memory for storage
(flash memory card, the ATA
card, or flash ROM on the CPU
board).
15
16
17
{
{
{
z
z
z
{
{
{
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
FORMAT ERROR
An erase error has occurred in
formatting memory for storage
(flash memory card, the ATA
card, or flash ROM on the CPU
board).
FLASH CARD FULL
Saving failed because of the
insufficient capacity of memory
for storage (flash memory card,
the ATA card, or flash ROM on
the CPU board).
- 274 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restoration Acceptance
LED Indication
by the
[RESTART]
key
of Status
Request
Reset
LCD Messages of
Upper line
No.
Printer Status
POWER ON LINE ERROR
(English)
Yes/No
Command
Yes/No
A command error has occurred
in analyzing the command.
18 Display of error
command
{
z
{
Yes
Yes
(See NOTE 1.)
POWER FAILURE
A momentary power interruption
has occurred.
19
20
{
{
z
z
{
z
No
–
No
–
INITIALIZING...
The memory card is being
initialized.
(Initialization is carried out for a
max. of approximately 15
seconds)
EEPROM ERROR
SYSTEM ERROR
An EEPROM for back-up cannot
be read/written properly.
21
22
{
{
z
z
{
{
No
No
No
No
When any abnormal operations
as below are performed, a
system error occurs.
(a) Command fetch from an odd
address
(b) Access to the word data
from a place other than the
boundary of the word data
(c) Access to the long word
data from a place other than
the boundary of the long
word data
(d) Access to the area of
80000000H to FFFFFFFFH
in the logic space in the user
mode.
(e) Undefined command placed
in other than the delay slot
has been decoded.
(f) Undefined command in the
delay slot has been
decoded.
(g) Command to rewrite the
delay slot has been
decoded.
100BASE LAN
23
24
–
–
–
–
{
{
z
z
z
z
The 100BASE LAN is being
initialized.
INITIALIZING...
(This is spread over the
upper and lower lines)
* When the B-9700-LAN-QM
(built-in 10/100BASE Ethernet
interface board) has been
installed.
DHCP CLIENT
The DHCP client is being
initialized.
INITIALIZING...
(This is spread over the
upper and lower lines)
* When the DHCP function is
enabled.
- 275 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acceptance
of Status
Request
Reset
Command
Yes/No
Restoration
by the
[RESTART]
key
LCD Messages of
Upper line
LED Indication
No.
25
Printer Status
(English)
POWER ON LINE ERROR
Yes/No
RFID WRITE ERROR
Yes
Yes
{
z
{
Writing data onto the RFID tag
continuously failed for the
maximum number of RFID write
retries.
RFID ERROR
26
27
28
No
No
No
Yes
No
{
{
{
z
z
z
{
z
z
The printer cannot communicate
with the RFID module.
INPUT PASSWORD
PASSWORD INVALID
The printer is waiting for a
password to be entered.
Password entered was not
correct consecutively for
three times.
No
RFID CONFIG ERR
29
B-SX704-RFID-U2-US-R
only
No
No
{
z
z
RFID module’s destination
code is not specified.
NOTE 1: When a command error is found in the command sent, 16 bytes of the command code of the
error command are displayed on the upper line of the LCD. (However, [LF] and [NUL] are
not displayed.)
[Example 1] [ESC] PC001; 0A00, 0300, 2, 2, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
Command error
LCD display
PC001;0A00,0300,
B-SX4T
V1.0A
[Example 2] [ESC] T20 G30 [LF] [NUL]
Command error
LCD display
T20G30
B-SX4T
V1.0A
[Example 3] [ESC] XR; 0200, 0300, 0450, 1200, 1 [LF] [NUL]
Command error
LCD display
XR;0200,0300,045
B-SX4T
V1.0A
NOTE 2: When the command error is displayed, “? (3FH)” is displayed for codes other than 20H to 7FH
and A0H to DFH.
- 276 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE 3: {:
ON
:
Blinking
z:
OFF
****:
Remaining number of labels to be printed
to 9999 (in units of 1 label/tag)
(in units of 1 K byte)
%%%%%%%: Remaining memory capacity for ATA card 0 to 9999999
* Firmware V4.x, X4.x, or C4.x (MAIN3 PC board)
###:
Remaining memory capacity of PC save area of the flash memory card:
0 to 895 (in K bytes)
&&&&: Remaining memory capacity of writable character storage area for the flash memory card
0 to 3147 (in K bytes)
* Firmware V5.0 or greater (MAIN4-R PC board or greater)
####: Remaining memory capacity of PC save area of the flash memory card:
0 to 3072 (in K bytes)
&&&&: Remaining memory capacity of writable character storage area for the flash memory card
0 to 3072 (in K bytes)
NOTE 4: If the ribbon near end detection setting is specified, the ERROR LED blinks slowly, while the
printer is in a ribbon near end state and displays messages 1, 2, or 3.
- 277 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.
LCD MESSAGES IN DIFFERENT LANGUAGES (UPPER LINE OF LCD)
No.
1
ENGLISH
ON LINE
No.
1
GERMAN
ON LINE
No.
1
FRENCH
PRETE
TETE OUVERTE
HEAD OPEN
PAUSE
KOPF OFFEN
PAUSE
2
2
2
****
****
PAUSE
****
3
3
3
COMMS ERROR
UEBERTR.-FEHLER
PAPIERSTAU ****
MESSERFEHL. ****
PAPIERENDE ****
FARBB.-ENDE ****
KOPF OFFEN ****
KOPF DEFEKT
ERR. COMMUNICAT.
PB. PAPIER ****
PB. CUTTER ****
FIN PAPIER ****
FIN RUBAN ****
TETE OUVERTE****
ERREUR TETE
4
4
4
PAPER JAM ****
CUTTER ERROR****
NO PAPER ****
NO RIBBON ****
HEAD OPEN ****
HEAD ERROR
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
EXCESS HEAD TEMP
RIBBON ERROR****
REWIND FULL ****
SAVING #### &&&&
SAVING %%%%%%%
FLASH WRITE ERR.
FORMAT ERROR
KOPF UEBERHITZT
FB-FEHLER ****
AUFWI.VOLL ****
SP.-MOD #### &&&&
SP.-MOD %%%%%%%
FLASH FEHLER
TETE TROP CHAUDE
ERREUR RUBAN****
ERR.REMB. ****
MEM LIB #### &&&&
MEM LIB %%%%%%%
ERREUR MEM FLASH
ERREUR DE FORMAT
MEM INSUFFISANTE
POWER FAILURE
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
FORMATFEHLER
FLASH CARD FULL
POWER FAILURE
FLASH ZU KLEIN
POWER FAILURE
INITIALIZING...
EEPROM ERROR
INITIALIZING...
EEPROM ERROR
INITIALIZING...
EEPROM ERROR
SYSTEM ERROR
SYSTEM ERROR
SYSTEM ERROR
RFID WRITE ERROR
RFID ERROR
RFID WRITE ERROR
RFID ERROR
RFID WRITE ERROR
RFID ERROR
INPUT PASSWORD
PASSWORD INVALID
RFID CONFIG ERR
INPUT PASSWORD
PASSWORD INVALID
RFID CONFIG ERR
INPUT PASSWORD
PASSWORD INVALID
RFID CONFIG ERR
- 278 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. DUTCH
No. SPANISH
No. JAPANESE
IN LIJN
KOP OPEN
PAUZE
ON LINE
1
2
1
2
1
2
CABEZAL ABIERTO
****
PAUSA
****
3
3
3
COMM. FOUT
ERROR COMUNICACI
ATASCO PAPEL****
ERROR CORTAD****
SIN PAPEL ****
SIN CINTA ****
CABEZA ABIER****
ERROR DE CABEZAL
TEMP.CABEZA ALTA
ERROR CINTA ****
REBOBI.LLENO****
SALVAR #### &&&&
SALVAR %%%%%%%
ERROR ESCRITURA
ERROR DE FORMATO
MEMORIA INSUFICI
POWER FAILURE
4
4
4
PAPIER VAST ****
SNIJMES FOUT****
PAPIER OP ****
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
LINT OP
****
8
8
8
KOP OPEN ****
PRINTKOP DEFECT
TEMP. FOUT
9
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
LINT FOUT ****
OPROL VOL ****
MEM
MEM
#### &&&&
%%%%%%%
FLASH MEM FOUT
FORMAAT FOUT
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
GEHEUGEN VOL
POWER FAILURE
INITIALIZING...
EEPROM ERROR
INITIALIZING...
EEPROM ERROR
SYSTEM ERROR
SYSTEM ERROR
RFID WRITE ERROR
RFID ERROR
RFID WRITE ERROR
RFID ERROR
INPUT PASSWORD
PASSWORD INVALID
RFID CONFIG ERR
INPUT PASSWORD
PASSWORD INVALID
RFID CONFIG ERR
* Japanese messages are omitted here.
- 279 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
1
Italian
PRONTA
TESTA APERTA
2
PAUSA
****
3
ERR. COMUNICAZ.
CARTA INCEP.****
ERR. TAGL. ****
NO CARTA ****
NO NASTRO ****
TESTA APERTA****
ERROR TESTA
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
TEMP. TESTA ALTA
ERR. NASTRO ****
RIAVV.PIENO ****
SALVA #### &&&&
SALVA %%%%%%%
ERR.SCRITT.CARD
ERR. FORMATTAZ.
MEM. CARD PIENA
POWER FAILURE
INITIALIZING...
EEPROM ERROR
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
SYSTEM ERROR
RFID WRITE ERROR
RFID ERROR
INPUT PASSWORD
PASSWORD INVALID
RFID CONFIG ERR
- 280 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. CHARACTER CODE TABLE
The followings are the character code tables. However, the characters which can be printed are
different according to the character type.
12.1 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER,
GOTHIC725 BLACK
(Bit map font type: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, N, O, P, Q, R, q)
(1) PC-850
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
1
Í
Ó
ß
-
!
”
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
Ô
Ò
õ
=
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
¾
ö
¶
§
÷
¸
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
©
Õ
µ
û
ã
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
Ã
Î
þ
(
ÿ
¿
®
¬
½
¼
¡
Ï
Þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
°
¨
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
*
J
j
•
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
¹
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
³
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
×
¢
¥
¦
Ì
Ý
¯
²
^
~
Ä
Å
«
»
g
/
_
ƒ
¤
´
(2) PC-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
α
β
≡
±
≥
≤
⎧
⎭
÷
≈
°
!
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
Γ
π
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ö
Σ
σ
µ
τ
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
ò
û
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ê
ë
è
ÿ
¿
Φ
Θ
Ω
)
Ö
Ü
•
•
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
ï
î
¢
£
½
¼
¡
δ
∞
∅
ε
√
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
n
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
2
^
_
~
Ä
Å
Pt
∫
«
g
/
»
∩
- 281 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) PC-852
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
É
á
í
Ó
ß
!
”
Ð
Ë
ó
ú
Ô
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ô
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
Á
Â
§
÷
¸
Í
Î
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
(
°
¨
)
ë
Ö
Ü
Ú
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
¬
•
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
ý
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Ý
^
~
Ä
×
«
»
g
/
_
¤
(4) PC-857
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
º
Ó
ß
-
!
"
ª
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
Ê
Ë
È
Ô
Ò
õ
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
¾
¶
§
÷
¸
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
©
Õ
µ
û
ã
Í
Î
Ï
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
Ã
(
¿
®
¬
×
Ú
Û
Ù
ì
°
)
Ö
Ü
ø
¨
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
•
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
½
¼
¡
¹
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
³
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Ø
¢
¥
¦
Ì
ÿ
¯
²
^
~
Ä
Å
«
g
/
_
»
¤
´
- 282 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) PC-851
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
±
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ô
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
§
û
ù
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
ê
ë
è
Ï
¸
°
¨
(
)
Ö
Ü
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
½
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
Ä
«
»
g
/
_
(6) PC-855
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
§
^
~
«
»
g
/
_
¤
- 283 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) PC-1250
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
¤
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
!
”
Á
Â
á
â
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
Ó
Ô
ó
ô
´
µ
¶
·
Ä
ä
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
¦
§
¨
Ö
×
ö
÷
G
H
I
g
h
i
Ç
É
Ë
ç
é
ë
(
¸
)
©
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
Ú
ú
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
Ü
Ý
ü
ý
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
Î
í
î
^
~
®
/
_
ß
(8) PC-1251
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
¤
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
¦
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
)
©
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
®
/
_
- 284 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) PC-1252
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
!
”
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
³
´
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
(
^
˜
¸
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
)
©
ª
¹
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
º
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
¼
½
¾
¿
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
^
~
®
Î
î
þ
ÿ
/
_
Ï
ï
(10) PC-1253
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ƒ
£
¤
¥
¦
³
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
(
)
©
ª
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
½
^
~
®
/
_
- 285 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(11) PC-1254
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
!
”
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
¹
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
³
´
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
(
^
˜
¸
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
)
©
ª
¹
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
º
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
¼
½
¾
¿
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
^
~
®
Î
î
/
_
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
(12) PC-1257
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
!
"
¢
£
¤
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
³
Ó
ó
´
Ä
Å
ä
å
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
Õ
Ö
×
õ
ö
÷
¦
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
Ø
©
ø
¹
)
É
é
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
¼
½
¾
æ
Ü
ß
ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
¨
¸
¯
^
~
®
/
_
Æ
- 286 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(13) LATIN9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
!
”
¡
¢
£
C
¥
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
³
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
)
©
ª
¹
º
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
^
~
®
Î
î
þ
ÿ
/
_
¿
Ï
ï
(14) Arabic
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
/
_
- 287 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.2 PRESENTATION (Bit map font type: M)
(1) PC-850, PC-857
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
indicates “¥”.
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
¥
/
_
(2) PC-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
indicates “¥”.
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
M
N
O
]
¥
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 288 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) PC-852
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
indicates “¥”.
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
indicates “¥”.
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 289 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
¥
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
^
˜
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
indicates “¥”.
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
(6) PC-1253
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
¥
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
indicates “¥”.
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 290 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) LATIN9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
C
¥
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
indicates “¥”.
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 291 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.3 OCR-A (Bit map font type: S)
(1) PC-850, PC-857
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese
-
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
. > N
¥
/
O
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P
p
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n
When Japanese
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
¥
/ ? O
o
- 292 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) PC-8
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
-
¥
. > N
indicates “¥”.
/
O
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P
p
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
¥
indicates “¥”.
/ ? O
o
- 293 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) PC-852
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese
-
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
. > N
/
O
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P
p
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n
When Japanese
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
/ ? O
o
- 294 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese
-
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
. > N
/
O
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P
p
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n
When Japanese
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
/ ? O
o
- 295 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
¥
^
˜
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese
-
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
. > N
/
O
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P
p
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
¥
^
˜
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n
When Japanese
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
/ ? O
o
- 296 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) PC-1253
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
¥
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese
-
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
. > N
/
O
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P
p
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
¥
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n
When Japanese
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
/ ? O
o
- 297 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) LATIN9
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
¥
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese
-
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
. > N
/
O
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P
p
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
¥
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n
When Japanese
message is selected in
the system mode, code
5CH indicates “¥”.
/ ? O
o
- 298 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.4 OCR-B (Bit map font type: T)
(1) PC-850, PC-857
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
-
. > N
¥
indicates “¥”.
/
O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P ` p
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n ~
/ ? O _ o
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
¥
indicates “¥”.
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
- 299 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) PC-8
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
-
¥
. > N
indicates “¥”.
/
O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P ` p
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n ~
/ ? O _ o
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
¥
indicates “¥”.
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
- 300 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) PC-852
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
-
. > N
indicates “¥”.
/
O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P ` p
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n ~
/ ? O _ o
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
- 301 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
-
. > N
indicates “¥”.
/
O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P ` p
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n ~
/ ? O _ o
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
- 302 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254, LATIN9
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
¥
˜
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
-
. > N
indicates “¥”.
/
O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P ` p
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
¥
˜
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n ~
/ ? O _ o
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
- 303 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) PC-1253
c B-SX4T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
P
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 A Q
" 2 B R
3 C S
$ 4 D T
5 E U
6 F V
7 G W
8 H X
9 I Y
J Z
¥
+
K
< L
M
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
-
. > N
indicates “¥”.
/
O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
d B-SX5T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 @ P ` p
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
! 1 A Q a q
" 2 B R b r
# 3 C S c s
$ 4 D T d t
% 5 E U e u
& 6 F V f v
' 7 G W g w
( 8 H X h x
) 9 I Y i y
¥
: J Z j z
*
+ ; K [ k {
, < L \ l |
- = M ] m }
. > N ^ n ~
/ ? O _ o
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
indicates “¥”.
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
- 304 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.5 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 (Outline font type: A, B)
(1) PC-850
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
ß
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
C
-
!
”
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ö
õ
µ
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
§
÷
û
ã
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ÿ
¿
°
•
)
Ö
Ü
ø
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
¡
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
¢
¥
²
^
~
Ä
Å
«
g
/
_
ƒ
»
¤
(2) PC-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
C
α
β
≡
±
≥
≤
⎧
⎭
÷
≈
°
!
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
Γ
π
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ö
Σ
σ
µ
τ
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
ò
û
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ê
ë
è
ÿ
¿
Φ
Θ
Ω
)
Ö
Ü
•
•
J
j
¬
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
ï
î
¢
£
½
¼
¡
δ
∞
∅
ε
√
<
=
>
?
n
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
2
^
_
~
Ä
Å
Pt
∫
«
g
/
»
∩
- 305 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) PC-852
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
ß
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
É
á
í
C
C
!
”
ó
ú
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ô
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
§
÷
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
(
°
•
)
ë
Ö
Ü
*
J
j
¬
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
Ä
«
»
g
/
_
¤
(4) PC-857
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
C
º
ª
!
"
ß
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ö
õ
µ
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
ò
§
÷
û
ã
g
h
i
ù
(
ê
ë
è
¿
¬
°
•
)
Ö
Ü
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
ï
î
ø
£
½
¼
¡
<
=
>
?
ì
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Ø
¢
¥
ÿ
2
^
_
~
Ä
Å
«
g
/
»
¤
- 306 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) PC-851
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
C
C
!
"
±
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ô
ö
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
§
°
û
ù
g
h
i
ç
ê
ë
è
(
)
Ö
Ü
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
Ï
î
½
<
=
>
?
£
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
Ä
8
«
»
g
/
(6) PC-855
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
g
h
i
(
)
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
§
^
_
~
«
»
parameter setting in the
system mode.
g
/
¤
- 307 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) PC-1250
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
Ä
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
á
â
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ó
ô
¤
§
ä
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Ö
ö
÷
g
h
i
Ç
É
ç
(
)
é
J
j
ú
ü
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
<
=
>
?
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
Î
/
(8) PC-1251
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
¤
§
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
g
h
i
(
)
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
/
- 308 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) PC-1252
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
Ñ
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
!
"
¡
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
¢
£
¤
¥
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
Ä
Å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Æ
Ç
Ö
Ø
g
h
i
§
(
^
˜
è
é
ê
)
J
j
ª
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
ì
û
ü
<
=
>
?
¼
½
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
î
/
¿
ï
ÿ
(10) PC-1253
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
£
¤
¥
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
g
h
i
§
(
)
J
j
ª
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
½
^
_
~
/
- 309 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(11) PC-1254
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
Ñ
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
!
"
¡
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
¢
£
¤
¥
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
Ä
Å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Æ
Ç
Ö
Ø
g
h
i
§
(
^
˜
è
é
ê
)
É
J
j
ª
º
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
ì
û
ü
<
=
>
?
¼
½
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
î
/
¿
Ï
ÿ
(12) PC-1257
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
!
"
¢
£
¤
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ó
Ä
Å
ä
å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
õ
ö
÷
Ö
g
h
i
§
·
(
Ø
ø
)
É
é
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
¼
½
Ü
ß
ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
/
Æ
æ
- 310 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(13) LATIN9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
Ñ
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
!
"
¡
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
¢
£
¤
¥
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
Ä
Å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Æ
Ç
Ö
Ø
g
h
i
§
(
è
é
ê
)
É
J
j
ª
º
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
ì
û
ü
<
=
>
?
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
î
/
¿
B
Ï
ÿ
(14) Arabic
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
g
h
i
(
)
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
/
- 311 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6 PRICE FONT 1, 2, 3 (Outline font type: E, F, G)
(1) All types of character codes
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
$
%
,
–
.
¥
~
/
- 312 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.7 TEC OUTLINE FONT 2, 3, GOTHIC725 BLACK (Outline font type: H, I, J)
(1) PC-850
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
Ì
Ó
ß
-
!
”
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
Ô
Ò
õ
=
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
¾
ö
¶
§
÷
¸
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
©
Õ
µ
û
ã
Í
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
Ã
Î
þ
(
ÿ
¿
®
¬
½
¼
¡
Ï
Þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
°
¨
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
•
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
¹
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
³
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
×
¢
¥
¦
Ì
Ý
¯
²
ˆ
~
Ä
Å
«
»
g
/
_
ƒ
¤
´
(2) PC-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
±
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
!
”
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
û
µ
÷
°
•
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ÿ
¿
)
Ö
Ü
¢
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
¡
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
²
ˆ
~
Ä
Å
«
g
/
_
ƒ
»
- 313 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) PC-852
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
É
´
L
á
í
d
Ó
ß
-
´´
!
”
Ð
Í
ó
ú
D
Š
Ô
´
N
‘
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ô
ö
Ë
Š
´
n
A
‘
dŠ
´
A
Š
L
Š
N
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
a
‘
n
Š
§
÷
¸
u
å
´
c
Š
Z
Š
I
Š
A
Â
Í
Î
´
Š
E
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
l
S
z
a
Š
š
´
´
s
¸
S
(
E
‘
e
R
°
¨
´
)
ë
Ö
Ü
Š
T
e
‘
U
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
´´
´
r
*
J
j
O
¬
•
´´
u
Š
R
´´
´
z
Š
C
¸
s
´´
o
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
U
indicates “¥”.
´
t
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
y
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
¨
´
´
¸
r
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Z
L
×
Z
T
Y
å
¨
z
¸
t
ˆ
~
Ä
«
»
U
g
´
Š
c
/
_
C
¤
(4) PC-857
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
º
Ó
ß
-
!
”
ª
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
Ê
Ë
È
Ô
Ò
õ
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
¾
¶
§
÷
¸
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
©
Õ
µ
Š
G
û
ã
Í
Î
Ï
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
¨
I
g
Š
Ã
(
¿
®
¬
×
Ú
Û
Ù
ì
°
)
Ö
Ü
ø
¨
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
•
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
½
¼
¡
¹
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
³
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
¹
Ø
¢
¥
¦
Ì
ÿ
¯
²
¸
S
ˆ
~
Ä
Å
«
g
¸
s
/
_
»
¤
´
- 314 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) PC-851
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
±
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
ô
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
§
û
ù
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
¸
°
¨
(
)
Ö
Ü
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
½
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ˆ
~
Ä
«
»
g
/
_
(6) PC-855
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
§
ˆ
~
«
»
g
/
_
¤
- 315 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) PC-1250
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
Š
B
C
D
Ð
E
F
ð
´
R
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
r
´
´
N
!
”
Á
á
â
n
´
N
n
Š
L
Š
‘
l
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
Ó
Ô
´´
O
ó
ô
¤
´
µ
¶
·
Ä
´
L
´
C
ä
Í
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
A
‘
o
´´
¦
Ö
×
c
´
ö
÷
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
Ç
ç
Š
C
Š
R
(
¸
¸
a
c
é
r
å
u
å
)
É
U
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
¸
s
¸
S
*
J
j
SŠ
s
Š
´
s
E
‘
Ú
e
‘
ú
´´
u
´
´´
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
S
«
¬
-
»
Ë
U
ë
indicates “¥”.
Š
L
´´
Š
E
Š
T
Š
t
<
=
>
?
\
|
Ü
Ý
¸
T
e
Š
ü
ý
¸
t
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
Î
Š
D
í
î
Š
Z
Š
I
¨
z
^
~
z
®
Š
´
¨
´
z
/
_
Z
Z
ß
(8) PC-1251
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
¤
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
¦
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
-
»
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
®
/
_
- 316 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) PC-1252
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
¡
B
C
Á
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
à
á
â
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
£
¤
³
´
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
¦
§
¨
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
ˆ
˜
¸
¹
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
S
Š
s
*
J
j
ª
«
¬
-
º
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
»
¼
½
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
Š
Z
Š
z
^
~
®
Î
î
/
_
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
(10) PC-1253
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
£
¤
³
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
¦
§
¨
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
ª
«
¬
-
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
»
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
½
^
~
®
/
_
- 317 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(11) PC-1254
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
¡
B
C
Á
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
à
á
â
!
”
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
¹
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
£
¤
³
´
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
¦
§
¨
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
ˆ
˜
¸
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
)
¹
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
SŠ
s
ª
«
¬
-
º
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
»
¼
½
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
¸
S
¸
s
^
~
®
-
Î
î
/
_
¿
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
(12) PC-1257
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Š
S
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
A
‘
a
‘
s
Š
´
´
n
!
”
N
´
´
c
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
£
¤
³
C
Ó
ó
´
Ä
Å
ä
å
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
¶
·
Õ
Ö
×
õ
ö
÷
¦
E
‘
e
‘
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
Š
C
c
(
Ø
ø
¹
)
É
L
é
´
z
l
´
s
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
´
´
*
J
j
Z
S
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
¼
½
Ü
ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
¨
¨
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
¨
Š
¯
‘
-
Z
z
Š
z
^
~
®
Æ
Z
/
_
¸
æ
ß
- 318 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(13) LATIN9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
¡
B
C
Á
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
à
á
â
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
£
ð
³
Š
Z
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
S
¾
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
s
z
¹
º
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
ª
«
¬
-
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
»
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
^
~
®
Î
î
ÿ
/
_
¿
Ï
ß
ï
(14) Arabic
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
When Japanese message
is selected in the system
mode, code 5CH
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
indicates “¥”.
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
parameter setting in the
system mode.
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
/
_
- 319 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.8 GB18030 (CHINESE KANJI)
(1) GB18030 (Chinese Kanji)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
¥
|
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ˆ
~
/
_
- 320 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) GB18030 code tables
TBD
- 321 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TBD
- 322 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TBD
- 323 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TBD
- 324 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.9 TrueType FONT
(1) PC-850
(2) PC-8
- 325 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) PC-852
(4) PC-857
- 326 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) PC-851
(6) PC-855
- 327 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) PC-1250
(8) PC-1251
- 328 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) PC-1252
(10) PC-1253
- 329 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(11) PC-1254
(12) PC-1257
- 330 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(13) LATIN9
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
0 @ P
`
p
q
r
° À Ð à
± Á Ñ á
² Â Ò â
³ Ã Ó ã
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
!
1 A Q a
¡
2 " 2 B R b
3 # 3 C S c
4 $ 4 D T d
5 % 5 E U e
6 & 6 F V f
¢
£
s
Š
t
C Z Ä Ô ä
¥ µ Å Õ å
u
v
Š
S ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7
8
9
'
7 G W g w
8 H X h x
§
·
Ç × ç ÷
(
)
s
z È Ø è
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
Š Š
9
:
I Y i
J Z
y
z
© ¹ É Ù é
A *
j
ª
º
Ê Ú ê
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L
D – = M ] m }
« » Ë Û ë
¬ Œ Ì Ü ì
- œ Í Ý í
\
l
|
E
F
.
> N ^ n ~
? O _ o
® Ÿ Î
Þ
ß
î
ï
/
¯
¿
Ï
(14) Arabic
- 331 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. BAR CODE TABLE
(1) WPC (JAN, EAN, UPC)
(2) CODE39 (Standard)
ITF, MSI, UCC/EAN128, Industrial 2 of 5
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
$
%
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
J
*
+
K
L
–
•
M
N
O
/
(3) CODE39 (Full ASCII)
[Transfer code]
[Drawing code]
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
0
1
%V
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
%W +P
+A +Q
+B +R
+C +S
"
2
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
3
4
+D
+E +U
+F +V
+T
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
5
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
6
G
H
I
g
h
i
7
G
H
I
+G +W
+H +X
(
8
)
9
+I
+Y
+Z
*
J
j
/J
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J
J
+J
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
/K
/L
–
K
L
%K +K %P
%L +L %Q
<
=
>
?
\
|
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
M
N
O
%M +M %R
%N +N %S
%O +O %T
^
~
.
/
_
/O
- 356 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) NW-7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
A
B
C
D
a
b
c
d
e
$
t
*
+
–
•
n
6
/
(5) CODE93
[Transfer code]
[Drawing code]
2
3
4
5
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
0
1
%V
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
%W +P
+A +Q
+B +R
+C +S
"
2
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
3
4
+D
+E +U
+F +V
+T
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
5
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
6
G
H
I
g
h
i
7
G
H
I
+G +W
+H +X
(
8
)
9
+I
+Y
+Z
J
j
/J
+
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J
J
+J
*
+
;
K
L
k
l
K
L
%K +K %P
%L +L %Q
%M +M %R
%N +N %S
%O +O %T
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
/L
–
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
M
N
O
^
~
.
/
_
/
- 357 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) CODE128
[Transfer code]
–
–
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
[Drawing code]
G
H
I
g
h
i
Value Code Table
(
HT
EM
)
LF SUB
VT ESC
J
j
*
+
;
K
L
k
l
FF
CR
SO
SI
FS
GS
RS
US
,
–
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
/
_
c
How to transmit control code data:
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A (3EH, 41H)
>B (3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>] (3EH, 5DH)
> ^ (3EH, 5EH)
>_ (3EH, 5FH)
d
How to transmit special codes:
Value
30 (Character >)
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
>0
>1
>2
>3
>4
>5
>6
>7
>8
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
e
Designation of start code:
START (CODE A)
START (CODE B)
START (CODE C)
→
→
→
>7
>6
>5
- 358 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Value Code Table
VALUE CODE CODE CODE
VALUE CODE CODE CODE
VALUE CODE CODE CODE
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
0
SP
!
SP
!
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
D
E
D
E
F
G
H
I
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
BS
HT
h
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
CODE B
1
i
j
2
"
"
F
LF
3
#
$
%
&
'
#
$
%
&
'
G
VT
k
4
H
FF
l
5
I
CR
m
n
o
p
q
r
6
J
J
SO
7
K
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
SI
8
(
(
L
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
9
)
)
M
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
*
*
N
+
,
+
,
O
s
P
t
–
.
–
.
Q
u
v
R
/
/
S
w
x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
T
U
y
V
SUB
ESC
FS
z
W
X
{
¦
Y
GS
}
Z
RS
~
DEL
[
US
\
\
FNC3 FNC3
FNC2 FNC2
SHIFT SHIFT
CODE C CODE C
]
]
^
^
;
;
_
_
`
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
FNC4
CODE B
a
b
c
FNC4
CODE A CODE A
FNC1 FNC1 FNC1
d
e
f
103
104
105
START CODE A
START CODE B
START CODE C
g
- 359 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) Data Matrix
The code to be used is designated using the format ID.
Format ID
Code
Details
0 to 9 space
1
2
3
4
5
6
Numerics
Letters
A to Z space
Alphanumerics, symbols
Alphanumerics
ASCII (7-bit)
0 to 9 A to Z space . , - /
0 to 9 A to Z space
00H to 7FH
ISO (8-bit)
00H to FFH (Kanji)
[Transfer Code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS
SO RS
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI
US
/
_
c How to send control code data:
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
>^
>_
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code:
(3EH)
>
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
- 360 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(8) PDF417
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.
Mode Code Details
EXC mode Alphanumerics, symbol 0 to 9 A to Z a to z space
!
”
#
/
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
[
,
-
.
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
\
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
~
CR HT
Binary/ASCII Plus
mode
Binary International
Character Set
Numerics
00H to FFH (Kanji)
Numeric
0 to 9
Compaction mode
[Transfer Code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS
SO RS
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI
US
/
_
c How to send control code data:
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
>^
>_
d How to send a special code:
(3EH)
>
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
- 361 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) MicroPDF417
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.
Mode
Details
Upper case letters, A to Z, space
space
Binary International 00H to FFH (Kanji)
Character Set
Numerics
0 to 9
[Transfer Code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS
SO RS
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI
US
/
_
c How to send control code data:
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
>^
>_
d How to send a special code:
(3EH)
>
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
- 362 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(10) QR code
When manual mode is selected in the Format Command
y Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode
Mode selection
y Binary mode
Mode selection
y Mixed mode
Data
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
(4 digits)
Data to be printed
“,” (comma)
“,” (comma)
Data
Data
The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji. However,
since the data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used should be
designated by selecting the mode.
Mode
Code
Details
N
A
Numerals
0 to 9
A to Z 0 to 9 space
Alphanumerics, symbols
$
%
*
+
-
.
/
:
B
K
Binary (8-bit)
Kanji
00H to FFH
Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal
If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.
When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code:
Data to be printed
[Transfer code for QR code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
q
r
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
G
H
I
g
h
i
w
(
x
)
y
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
z
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
{
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
CR GS
SO RS
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
•
^
~
SI
US
/
_
DEL
*
The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here.
- 363 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c How to send control code data:
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A (3EH, 41H)
>B (3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
>^ (3EH, 5EH)
>_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code:
(3EH) >0 (3EH, 30H)
>
→
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
Examples of data designation for QR code
c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
A A B C 1 2 3
Data to be printed
Designation of mode
d Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H
B 0 0 0 6 > A > C > E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
e Mixed mode
Numeric mode
Kanji mode
: 123456
: Kanji data
Binary mode
: a
i
u
e
o
Alphanumeric and symbol mode : ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a
i
u
e
o
, A A B C
Data to be
printed
Data to be
printed
Data to be
printed
No. of data Data to be printed
strings
Designation of mode
f Automatic mode
When the same data as e above is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a A B C
Data to be printed
i
u
e
o
- 364 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(11) Postal code
Customer bar code
POSTNET
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
J
K
L
–
M
N
O
RM4SCC
2
KIX CODE
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
p
q
r
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
a
b
c
d
e
f
s
t
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
g
h
i
8
9
(
)
A
B
C
D
E
F
J
J
j
K
L
K
L
k
l
M
N
O
M
N
O
m
n
o
* “(” or “)” can be designated only as a start/stop code.
These should not be entered in data.
If these are entered between data, no bar code is drawn.
- 365 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(12) MaxiCode
Symbol Character
Value
Code Set A
Code Set B
Code Set C
Code Set D
Code Set E
Decimal
Binary
Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
000000
000001
000010
000011
000100
000101
000110
000111
001000
001001
001010
001011
001100
001101
001110
001111
010000
010001
010010
010011
010100
010101
010110
010111
011000
011001
011010
011011
011100
011101
011110
011111
100000
100001
100010
100011
100100
100101
100110
100111
101000
101001
101010
101011
101100
101101
101110
101111
110000
110001
110010
110011
110100
110101
110110
110111
111000
111001
111010
111011
111100
111101
111110
111111
CR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
13
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
‘
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
96
97
98
99
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
J
K
L
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Í
Î
Ï
í
î
ï
CR
SO
SI
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
Ø
Ù
Ú
SUB
[EC]
[NS]
[EC]
[EC]
[NS]
[EC]
[NS]
[EC]
[Pad]
[Pad]
FS
GS
RS
28
29
30
FS
GS
RS
28
29
30
FS
GS
RS
28
29
30
FS
GS
RS
28
29
30
ESC
27
[NS]
[NS]
Space
32
(
123
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
ª
¬
±
²
219
220
221
222
223
170
172
177
178
179
181
185
186
188
189
190
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
¡
251
252
253
254
255
161
168
171
175
176
180
183
184
187
191
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
FS
GS
RS
US
{C159}
NBSP
¢
£
¤
¥
28
29
30
31
[Pad]
[Pad]
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
”
+
,
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
)
~
DEL
;
<
=
>
?
[
\
]
^
_
125
126
127
59
60
61
62
63
91
92
93
94
95
32
44
46
47
58
64
33
124
159
160
162
163
164
165
166
167
169
173
174
182
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
¨
«
¯
°
'
•
³
¹
º
¼
½
§
©
SHY
®
-
.
/
»
¿
Space
¾
{C138}
{C139}
{C140}
{C141}
{C142}
{C143}
{C144}
{C145}
{C146}
{C147}
{C148}
¶
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
,
.
/
:
@
!
{C128}
{C129}
{C130}
{C131}
{C132}
{C133}
{C134}
{C135}
{C136}
{C137}
{C149}
{C150}
{C151}
{C152}
{C153}
{C154}
{C155}
{C156}
{C157}
{C158}
|
[Pad]
[2 Shift A]
[3 Shift A]
[Pad]
[Latch A]
Space 32
[Latch A]
Space 32
[Latch A]
Space
[Shift B]
[Shift C]
[Shift D]
[Shift E]
[Shift A]
[Shift C]
[Shift D]
[Shift E]
[Latch A]
32
[Lock In C]
[Shift D]
[Shift C]
[Lock In D]
[Shift E]
[Shift C]
[Shift D]
[Lock In E]
[Latch B]
[Shift E]
[Latch B]
[Latch B]
[Latch B]
- 366 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c How to send control code data:
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
>^
>_
d How to send a special code:
(3EH)
>
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
NOTE: “NUL” code in the table cannot be used, however, it can be designated.
If it is designated, data following “NUL” code is not printed.
When the MaxiCode specification setting is set to “TYPE2: Special specification” in the system mode:
[Transfer code for MaxiCode]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
U
V
W
X
Y
u
v
w
x
y
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
HT EM
LF
)
A
SUB
*
:
J
Z
j
z
(Note1)
B
C
D
E
F
VT ESC
FF FS
+
,
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
<
=
>
?
|
}
CR GS
SO RS
-
•
/
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
^
_
~
SI
US
DEL
(Note2)
The all codes (00H to FFH) can be used. In the following cases, however, the codes will
become special codes. For the transfer method, refer to the following.
(Note 1) In case of LF (0AH) data:
LF (0AH) →
(Note 2) In case of
(FFH) →
J (FFH, 4AH)
(FFH) data:
(FFH, FFH)
ESC (1BH) and NUL (00H) can be used as they are.
- 367 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(13) CP code
[Transfer Code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB
VT ESC
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS
SO RS
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI
US
/
_
c How to send control code data:
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
>^
>_
d How to send a special code:
(3EH)
>
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code:
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)
- 368 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(14) GS1 DataBar Expanded/GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
[Transfer Code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
P
Q
R
S
T
p
q
r
!
”
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
a
b
c
d
e
f
s
t
FNC1
%
&
’
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
g
h
i
(
)
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
–
.
M
N
O
m
n
o
/
_
c Separator
In the case of the stacked bar code (GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked
Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked), the separator is positioned between the
stacked bar codes. The height varies depending on the versions of bar code, and fixed.
Height of the separator for the stacked bar code
Version of bar code
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Stacked
Omnidirectional
Height of separator
Module width
Module width x 3 layers
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
Module width x 3 layers
(Example)
d Recommended bar code height
Bar code version
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Stacked
Height *1
33x or above
13x
5x/7x
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
33x or above
10x or above
33x or above
33x or above
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
- 369 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e Bar code height calculation method
Example) In the following conditions:
203-dpi print head, Module width: 02, Recommended bar code height: 33x
(25.4 m / 203 dpi) x 2 dots x 33x ≈ 8.25 m
Since the height is specified in units of 0.1 mm, “0082” or “0083” is to be set as 8.25 mm.
f Max. number of data digits
Version of bar code
GS1 DataBar
Max. number of digits
13 digits (Numeral only)
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
13 digits (Numeral only)
13 digits (Numeral only)
13 digits (Numeral only)
74 digits (Numeral only) *1
41 digits (Alphabet only)
74 digits (Numeral only) *1
41 digits (Alphabet only)
GS1 DataBar Expanded
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
*1:Max. 74 digits/41 digits, including AI and FID.
In the following case, the print results vary in spite of the same number of digits.
Non printable:
Printable:
“1A2B3C4D5E6F7G8H9I0J1K2L3M4N5O6P7Q8R9S0T1U2V3W”
“ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW12345678901234567890123”
g Check digit exclusively for each bar code version
Version of bar code
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Stacked
Check digit
MOD79
MODE79
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
MOD79
MOD89
MOD211
MOD211
For the check digit calculation method, refer to ISO 24724 or AIM ITS 99-001.
- 370 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(15) RFID
[Transfer Code]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
SOH DC1
STX DC2
ETX DC3
EOT DC4
ENQ NAK
ACK SYN
BEL ETB
BS CAN
HT EM
!
”
q
r
#
$
%
&
’
s
t
u
v
G
H
I
g
h
i
w
(
x
)
y
LF(*) SUB
*
J
j
z
VT ESC
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
{
FF
FS
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
CR GS
SO RS
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
^
~
SI
US
/
_
DEL
All codes can be used. (00H to FFH)
c How to send control code data:
NUL (00H)
SOH (01H)
STX (02H)
to
→
→
→
>@ (3EH, 40H)
>A
>B
(3EH, 41H)
(3EH, 42H)
GS (1DH)
RS (1EH)
US (1FH)
→
→
→
>]
(3EH, 5DH)
(3EH, 5EH)
(3EH, 5FH)
>^
>_
d How to send a special code:
>(3EH)
→
>0
(3EH, 30H)
- 371 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. DRAWING OF BAR CODE DATA
:
Field to be incremented/decremented
(The absence of a solid line invalidates incrementing/decrementing.)
:
Field subject to printing numerals under bars.
Type of Bar Code: JAN8, EAN8
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
8 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 8 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
8 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 8 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
7 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 7 digits
Not to be drawn
- 372 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: JAN13, EAN13
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
13 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
13 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Input
Data
12 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
11 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 11 digits
Not to be drawn
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
11 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 11 digits
Not to be drawn
- 373 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
12 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
12 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
11 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 11 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
10 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 10 digits
Not to be drawn
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
10 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Not to be drawn
Other than 10 digits
- 374 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
7 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
0
D7
Other than 7 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
7 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
0
D7
Other than 7 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
Calculate and reflect modulus 10 in the bar code.
6 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
C/D
Drawing
Data
0
Other than 6 digits
Not to be drawn
- 375 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: JAN8 + 2 digits, EAN8 + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D9 D10
10 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 10 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D9 D10
Input
Data
10 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 10 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
9 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D
D8 D9
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 9 digits
Not to be drawn
- 376 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: JAN8 + 5 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
13 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Input
Data
13 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
- 377 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: JAN13 + 2 digits, EAN13 + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
15 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
D14 D15
Other than 15 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
15 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
D14 D15
Other than 15 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14
Input
Data
14 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D
D13 D14
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 14 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
13 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
13 digits
P/CD D7
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
- 378 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: JAN13 + 5 digits, EAN13 + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
18 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Other than 18 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
18 digits
Drawing
Data
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Other than 18 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Input
Data
17 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 17 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
16 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 16 digits
Not to be drawn
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
16 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Drawing
Data
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 16 digits
Not to be drawn
- 379 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
14 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14
Other than 14 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
14 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14
Other than 14 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 13 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
D11 D12
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Not to be drawn
Other than 12 digits
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
D11 D12
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Not to be drawn
Other than 12 digits
- 380 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Input
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
17 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Other than 17 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
Input
Data
17 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Other than 17 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
16 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 16 digits
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
15 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Not to be drawn
Other than 15 digits
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
15 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Not to be drawn
Other than 15 digits
- 381 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D8 D9
Input
Data
9 digits
Drawing
0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
D7
Data
Other than 9 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D8 D9
Input
Data
9 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
0
D7
Other than 9 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
Calculate and reflect modulus 10 C/D in
the bar code.
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
8 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
D7 D8
0
C/D
Drawing
Data
Other than 8 digits
Not to be drawn
- 382 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Input
Data
12 digits
Drawing
0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
D7
Data
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Input
Data
12 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
0
D7
Other than 12 digits
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
Calculate and reflect modulus
10 C/D in the bar code.
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
11 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
0
C/D
Drawing
Data
Other than 11 digits
Not to be drawn
- 383 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: MSI
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Input
Data
Not recognized as a check digit.
Max. 15 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
16 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(2) IBM modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Input
Min. 2 digits
Max. 15 digits
(including C/D)
Data
To be checked as IBM modulus 10
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
1 digit
16 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of IBM modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 14 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix IBM modulus 10.
15 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(4) IBM modulus 10 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2
Drawing
Data
Affix IBM modulus 10.
Affix IBM modulus 10.
14 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(5) IBM modulus 11 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2
Drawing
Data
Affix IBM modulus 10.
Affix IBM modulus 11.
14 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 384 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: Interleaved 2 of 5
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Input
Data
Not recognized as a check digit.
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 126 digits
Drawing
Data
0
127 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Input
Min. 2 digits
Max. 126 digits
(including C/D)
Data
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Drawing
Data
0
1 digit
127 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 125 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
126 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(4) Auto affix of DBP modulus 10
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 125 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a DBP modulus 10 C/D.
126 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 385 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: Industrial 2 of 5
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Input
Data
Not recognized as a check digit.
Max. 126 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
127 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus check character check
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Min. 2 digits
Max. 126 digits
(including C/D)
To be checked as a modulus check character
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
1 digit
127 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus check character
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 125 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus check character.
126 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 386 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: CODE39 (Standard)
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Input
Data
Start code
Stop code
Not recognized as a check digit.
Max. 123 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Sp
Drawing
Data
124 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 43 check
No. of Input Digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Start code
Input
Data
Stop code
To be checked as modulus 43 C/D
Min. 2 digits
Max. 123 digits
(including C/D)
Drawing
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Sp
1 digit
124 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 43
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Start code
Sp
Stop code
Max. 122 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
C/D Sp
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 43 C/D.
123 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 387 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: CODE39 (Full ASCII)
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Input
Data
Start code
Stop code
Not recognized as a check digit.
Max. 60 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Sp
Drawing
Data
61 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(2) Modulus 43 check
No. of Input Digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Start code
Input
Data
Stop code
To be checked as modulus 43 C/D
Min. 2 digits
Max. 60 digits
(including C/D)
Drawing
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Sp
1 digit
61 digits or more
Not to be drawn
(3) Auto affix of modulus 43
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Start code
Sp
Stop code
C/D Sp
Max. 60 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 43 C/D.
61 digits or more
Not to be drawn
NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the
codes received are drawn.
Type of Bar Code: NW7
(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix
No. of Input Digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Start code
Input
Data
Stop code
Max. 125 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Sp
Drawing
Data
126 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 388 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: No auto selection of CODE128 (Character “>” to be also counted as a digit)
(1) No affix
PSEUDO103 check
Auto affix of PSEUDO103
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Min. 3 digits
Max. 125 digits
(including start
code)
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 C/D Sp
Affix PSEUDO103 C/D.
Drawing
Data
2 digits or less
126 digits or more
Not to be drawn
NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C
Type of Bar Code: Auto selection of CODE128
(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Max. 60 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 AD D5 D6 D7 AD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Sp
Drawing
Data
Stop code
Start code
Selection code
Affix
PSEUDO103
C/D.
61 digits or more
Not to be drawn
NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C
- 389 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: CODE93
(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Max. 60 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D1 C/D2 Sp
Drawing
Data
Stop code
Affix a modulus 47 “K” C/D.
Affix a modulus 47 “C” C/D.
Start code
61 digits or more
Not to be drawn
NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the
codes received are drawn.
Type of Bar Code: UCC/EAN128
(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19
Data
St FNC1 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 C/D1 C/D2 Sp
19 digits
Drawing
Data
Start code
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix a modulus 11 C/D.
Stop code
Other than 19 digits
Not to be drawn
- 390 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: POSTNET
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
5 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D Sp
Start code
Drawing
Data
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
9 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D Sp
Start code
Drawing
Data
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
11 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D Sp Fr D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Fr
Drawing
Data
Start code
Frame
Frame
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
Other than 5, 9, and
11 digits
Not to be drawn
Type of Bar Code: RM4SCC
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits
(St)
(Sp)
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Start code
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D Sp
Start code
Not to be drawn
Input
Data
Stop code
12 digits
Drawing
Data
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
13 digits or more
Type of Bar Code: KIX CODE
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
18 digits
Drawing
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
19 digits or more
Not to be drawn
- 391 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type of Bar Code: Customer bar code
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
20 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 C/D Sp
Drawing
Data
Start code
Dedicated check digit
Stop code
Data of up to 20 digits is drawn. Data of 21 digits or more is discarded.
21 digits or more
Type of Bar Code: Highest priority customer bar code
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19
19 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 CC7 C/D Sp
Drawing
Data
Start code
CC7
Dedicated check digit
Stop code
Data of up to 19 digits is drawn. Data of 20 digits or more is discarded.
20 digits or more
Type of Bar Code: GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1
DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Limited
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 C/D
Drawing
Data
Dedicated check digit
14 digits or more
Not to be drawn
Type of Bar Code: GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits
Input
Data
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
74 digits
C/D
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Drawing
Data
Dedicated check digit
74 digits or more
Not to be drawn
NOTE: Some data cannot be drawn even if the number of input digits is less than 74.
- 392 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. AUTOMATIC ADDING OF START/STOP CODES
Designation of
Type of Bar Code
Input Data
12345ABC
Drawing Data
Standard
Start/Stop Codes
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345*ABC*
*12345/JABC*
**12345ABC*
*/J12345ABC*
*12345ABC**
*12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC*
*12345/JABC*
*12345ABC
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
*12345ABC
12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345*ABC
**12345ABC
*12345ABC**
*12345*ABC*
12345ABC
Omit
(No designation)
*12345ABC
*12345ABC
12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345*ABC
**12345ABC
*12345ABC**
*12345*ABC*
12345ABC
**12345ABC
*/J12345ABC
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
**12345ABC*
*/J12345ABC*
*12345*ABC
*12345/JABC
***12345ABC
*/J/J12345ABC
**12345ABC**
*/J12345ABC/J*
**12345*ABC*
*/J12345/JABC*
12345ABC*
CODE 39
Add start code
12345ABC*
*12345ABC
12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345*ABC
**12345ABC
*12345ABC**
*12345*ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345ABC**
12345ABC/J*
*12345ABC**
*12345ABC/J*
12345*ABC*
12345/JABC*
**12345ABC*
*/J12345ABC*
*12345ABC***
*12345ABC/J/J*
*12345*ABC**
*12345/JABC/J*
Add stop code
- 393 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Designation of
Start/Stop Codes
Type of Bar Code
Input Data
12345ABC
Drawing Data
Standard
12345ABC
12345ABC
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
Standard
Full ASCII
*12345ABC
12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345*ABC
**12345ABC
*12345ABC**
*12345*ABC*
*12345ABC
*12345ABC
12345ABC*
12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
*12345ABC*
12345*ABC
12345/JABC
**12345ABC
*/J12345ABC
*12345ABC**
*12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC*
*12345/JABC*
CODE 39
Start/stop code
not added
Designation of
Start/Stop Codes
Type of Bar Code
Input Data
Drawing Data
12345678
a12345678
12345678c
b12345678d
12345a678
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
12345678
a12345678a
a12345678
12345678c
b12345678d
a12345a678a
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
a12345678
Omit
(No designation)
a12345678
12345678c
b12345678d
12345a678
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
12345678
aa12345678
a12345678c
ab12345678d
a12345a678
aab12345678
aa12345678bc
ad12345b678c
12345678a
Add start code
NW7
a12345678
12345678c
b12345678d
12345a678
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
12345678
a12345678a
12345678ca
b12345678da
12345a678a
ab12345678a
a12345678bca
d12345b678ca
12345678
Add stop code
a12345678
12345678c
b12345678d
12345a678
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
a12345678
12345678c
Start/stop code
not added
b12345678d
12345a678
ab12345678
a12345678bc
d12345b678c
- 394 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Taurus Group Vacuum Cleaner 2200 User Manual
Technika Car Satellite TV System 22 212i User Manual
Toastmaster Rice Cooker TRC5 User Manual
Toshiba DVD VCR Combo DVR670 User Manual
Toshiba Printer EO1 13016 User Manual
Tripp Lite Mouse IN3008KB User Manual
Vermont Casting Indoor Fireplace D232 User Manual
ViewSonic Computer Monitor Q9B User Manual
VocoPro Musical Instrument KJ 7000 Pro User Manual
VocoPro Musical Instrument VSP M1 User Manual